2007 infiniti g35 sedan owner guide

Foreword

Your INFINITI represents a new way ofthinking about vehicle design. It inte-grates advanced engineering and supe-rior craftsmanship with a simple, refinedaesthetic sensitivity associated with tra-ditional Japanese culture.

The result is a different notion of luxuryand beauty. The car itself is important,but so is the sense of harmony that thevehicle evokes in its driver, and thesense of satisfaction you feel with theINFINITI — from the way it looks anddrives to the high level of dealer service.

To ensure that you enjoy your INFINITI tothe fullest, we encourage you to read thisOwner’s Manual immediately. It explainsall of the features, controls and perfor-mance characteristics of your INFINITI; italso provides important instructions andsafety information.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet is in-cluded in your Owner’s literature portfolio. TheINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide ex-plains details about maintaining and servicingyour vehicle. Always carry it with you when youtake your vehicle to an INFINITI dealer. TheWarranty Information Booklet contents pro-vide complete information about all warrantiescovering this vehicle, the requirements to keepthe warranties in effect as well as the INFINITIRoadside Assistance program.

Additionally, a separate Customer Careand Lemon Law Information Booklet willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’slemon law.

INFINITI is dedicated to providing a satis-fying ownership experience for as long asyou own your car. Should you have anyquestions regarding your INFINITI or yourINFINITI dealer, please contact our Con-sumer Affairs department at:For U.S. customers

1-800-662-6200For Canadian customers

1-800-361-4792

The Consumer Affairs Department will askfor the following information:

— Your name, address, and telephonenumber

— Vehicle identification number (at-tached to the top of the instrumentpanel on the driver’s side)

— Date of purchase

— Current odometer reading

— Your INFINITI dealer’s name

— Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to INFINITI with the infor-mation at:

For U.S. customersINFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canadian customersINFINITI DivisionNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

READ FIRST — THEN DRIVE SAFELYBefore driving your vehicle, read yourOwner’s Manual carefully. This will en-sure familiarity with controls and mainte-nance requirements, assisting you in thesafe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATIONREMINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules to helpensure a safe and comfortable trip for you andyour passengers!

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

O ALWAYS observe posted speed limits andnever drive too fast for conditions.

O ALWAYS give your full attention to drivingand avoid using vehicle features or takingother actions that could distract you.

O ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Pre-teenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

O ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features to alloccupants of the vehicle.

O ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-fication could affect its performance,safety or durability, and may even violategovernmental regulations. In addition,damage or performance problems re-sulting from modification will not be cov-ered under the INFINITI warranties.

WHEN READING THE MANUALThis manual includes information for alloptions available on this model. There-fore, you may find some information thatdoes not apply to your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illus-trations in this manual are those in effectat the time of printing. INFINITI reservesthe right to change specifications or de-sign at any time without notice.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in thismanual. They are used in the followingways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk,the procedures must be followed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moderatepersonal injury or damage to your vehicle.To avoid or reduce the risk, the proceduresmust be followed carefully.

If you see the symbol above, it means“Do not do this” or “Do not let this hap-pen”.

If you see a symbol similar to thoseabove in an illustration, it means thearrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto those above indicate movement or ac-tion.

Arrows in an illustration that are similarto those above call attention to an itemin the illustration.

SIC0697

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine Exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components contain oremit chemicals known to the State of Califor-nia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. In addition, certain fluidscontained in vehicles and certain products ofcomponent wear contain or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to causecancer and birth defects or other reproduc-tive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATEADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-teries, may contain perchlorate material.The following advisory is provided: “Per-chlorate Material - special handling mayapply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”

BLUETOOTH is a trademarkowned by Bluetooth SIG,Inc., U.S.A. and licenced toXanavi Informatics Corpora-tion.

Gracenote is a registeredtrademark of Gracenote, Inc.The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered byGracenote” logo are trade-marks of Gracenote.

© 2007 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a re-trieval system, or transmitted in any form, or byany means, electronic, mechanical, photo-copying, recording or otherwise, without the priorwritten permission of Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.

w 07.2.6/V36-D X

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents 0

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1

Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8

Technical and consumer information 9

Index 10

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraintsystem (SRS) .................................................... 0-2Exterior front .................................................... 0-3Exterior rear ..................................................... 0-4Passenger compartment ................................... 0-5

Cockpit............................................................. 0-6Instrument panel .............................................. 0-8Meters and gauges........................................... 0-9Engine compartment ....................................... 0-10

VQ35HR engine.......................................... 0-10

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Supplemental front-impact air bags(Page 1-35)

2. Front seat belts (P.1-8)3. Front head restraints (P.1-5)4. Supplemental side-impact air bags

(P.1-35)5. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bags (P.1-35)6. Rear seat belts (P.1-8)7. Rear head restraints (P.1-5)8. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-16)9. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) (P.1-41)10. Front seats (P.1-2)11. Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-48)12. Rear seats (P.1-7)

— Child restraints (P.1-16)13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P.1-18)

SSI0258

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Hood (P.3-17)

2. Headlight and turn signal— Operation (P.2-34)— Bulb replacement (P.8-25)— Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)

(if so equipped) (P.2-37)

— Fog light (P.2-39)

3. Windshield wiper and washer— Operation (P.2-32)— Blade replacement (P.8-19)

4. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P.2-54)

5. Power windows (P.2-52)

6. Recovery hook (P.6-14)

7. Tires— Wheel and tires (P.8-28, P.9-8)— Flat tire (P.6-2)— Tire pressure monitoring system

(TPMS) (P.2-16, P.5-3)

8. Outside mirrors (P.3-25)

9. Doors— Keys (P.3-2)— Door locks (P.3-5)— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-14)

SSI0259

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. High-mounted stop light (model with arear spoiler) (Bulb replacement)(P.8-25)

2. High-mounted stop light (modelwithout a rear spoiler) (Bulb replace-ment) (P.8-25)

3. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-33)

4. Rear combination light (Bulb replace-ment) (P.8-25)

5. Satellite antenna (if so equipped)(P.4-32)

6. Fuel-filler door— Operation (P.3-20)— Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

7. Rear view camera (if so equipped)(P.4-21)

8. Trunk— Intelligent Key system (P.3-8)— Remote keyless entry system

(P.3-14)— Trunk lid (P.3-18)

9. Child safety locks (P.3-7)

SSI0260

EXTERIOR REAR


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

1. Coat hooks (P.2-51)

2. Rear personal light (P.2-56)

3. Seats (P.1-2)

4. Power windows (P.2-52)

5. Outside mirror remote control switch(P.3-25)

6. Automatic drive positioner switch (if soequipped) (P.3-26)

7. Sun visors (P.3-23)

8. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P.2-54)

9. Map light (P.2-56)

10. Sunglasses holder (P.2-48)

11. Inside rearview mirror— Anti-glare adjustment (P.3-24)— HomeLink (P.2-59)— Compass (P.2-9)

12. Trunk pass-through (P.1-7)/Rear arm-rest (P.1-7)

13. Rear cup holders (P.2-46)

14. Console box— Power outlet (P.2-44)— Auxiliary input jacks (P.4-57)

15. Front cup holders (P.2-46)

SSI0261

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P.2-42)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-18)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)

4. Instrument brightness control switch(P.2-38)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odom-eter (P.2-7)

6. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-34)

7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-13)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Leftside)— ENTER or tuning switch

(P.4-7, P.4-55)— BACK switch (P.4-55)— TALK switch (P.4-81)/Phone switch

(P.4-58)— Volume control switches (P.4-55)— Source select switch (P.4-55)

9. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)

10. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-32)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls(Right side)— Cruise control switches (P.5-17)— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-19)

12. Hood release handle (P.3-17)

13. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)

14. Electric tilting/telescopic steeringwheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)

15. Manual tilting/telescopic steeringwheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)

SSI0262

COCKPIT


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

16. Steering wheel— Horn (P.2-40)— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-35)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)

2. Meters and gauges (P.2-6)

3. Center ventilator (P.4-25)

4. Audio system (P.4-32)

5. Clock (P.2-43)

6. Center multi-function control panel— Navigation system* (if so

equipped)— Vehicle information and setting

buttons (P.4-9)

— Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P.4-58)

— Audio system (P.4-32)

7. Center display (P.4-3)/Navigation sys-tem* (if so equipped)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch(P.2-40)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P.1-35)

10. Fuse box cover (P.8-22)

11. Parking brake— Parking (P.5-44)

12. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)

13. Automatic climate control system(P.4-25)

14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays(P.2-45)

15. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)(P.2-41)

16. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)(P.2-42)

17. CompactFlash card slot (if soequipped) (P.4-44)

SSI0263

INSTRUMENT PANEL


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

18. Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch (P.2-33)

19. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-48)20. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-18)*: Refer to the separate Navigation System

Owner’s Manual.

1. Tachometer (P.2-8)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-13)

3. Speedometer (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge(P.2-8)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-21)

6. Fuel gauge (P.2-9)

SSI0264

METERS AND GAUGES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

VQ35HR ENGINE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-22)

2. Battery (P.8-15)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-13)

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Trans-mission models) (P.8-14)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir(P.8-14)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

8. Air cleaner (P.8-18)

9. Radiator filler cap (P.8-8)

10. Drive belts (P.8-17)

11. Coolant reservoir (P.8-8)

12. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9)

SSI0265

ENGINE COMPARTMENT


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system

Seats ................................................................ 1-2Front seats................................................... 1-2Head restraint.............................................. 1-5Armrest........................................................ 1-7

Seat belts ......................................................... 1-8Precautions on seat belt usage.................... 1-8Child safety................................................ 1-10Pregnant women ......................................... 1-11Injured persons........................................... 1-11Three-point type seat belt .......................... 1-12Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15Seat belt maintenance................................ 1-15

Child restraints................................................ 1-16Precautions on child restraints................... 1-16Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrensystem (LATCH) .......................................... 1-18Top tether strap child restraint .................. 1-20Child restraint installation using LATCH...... 1-21

Child restraint installation using the seatbelts .......................................................... 1-24

Booster seats .................................................. 1-31Precautions on booster seats .................... 1-31Booster seat installation ............................ 1-33

Supplemental restraint system ........................ 1-35Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem ....................................................... 1-35INFINITI advanced air bag system (frontseats) ......................................................... 1-41Supplemental side-impact air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag system ............ 1-46Pre-tensioner seat belt system (frontseats) ........................................................ 1-48Supplemental air bag warning labels......... 1-49Supplemental air bag warning light ........... 1-49Repair and replacement procedure ............ 1-50

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when theseatback is reclined. This can be dan-gerous. The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. In an accident, youcould be thrown into it and receive neckor other serious injuries. You could alsoslide under the lap belt and receive seri-ous internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor and ad-just the seat belt properly. See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” later in thissection.

O After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in se-rious accidents.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment

Operating tips:

O The seat motor has an auto-reset over-load protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 sec-onds, then reactivate the switch.

O Do not operate the power seat for along period of time when the engine isoff. This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section for automatic drive positioner op-eration.

SSS0133

SEATS

1-2 Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Forward and backward:

Moving the switch q1 forward or back-ward will slide the seat forward or back-ward to the desired position.

Reclining:

Move the recline switch q2 backwarduntil the desired angle is obtained. Tobring the seatback forward again, movethe switch q2 forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment ofthe seatback for occupants of differentsizes for added comfort and to help ob-tain proper seat belt fit. (See “Precautions

on seat belt usage” later in this section.)The seatback may also be reclined toallow occupants to rest when the vehicleis parked.

Seat lifter:

Push the front or rear end of the switchup or down to adjust the angle of thefront portion or height of the seat.

SSS0682 SSS0673

Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Lumbar support (if so equipped):

The lumbar support feature provides tothe driver.

Type A

Push the front q1 or back q2 end of theswitch to adjust the seat lumbar area.

Type B

Move the lever q1 up or down to adjustthe seat lumbar area.

Side support (if so equipped):

The side support feature provides thighand torso supports. Push the switch in-side q1 or outside q2 to adjust the thigharea. Push the switch inside q3 or out-side q4 to adjust the torso area.

SSS0707Type A

SSS0684Type B

SSS0685


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Thigh extension (if so equipped):

The front portion of the front seats can beextended forward for seating comfort. Pullup and hold the lever q1 to extend thefront portion to the desired position.

HEAD RESTRAINT

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted properlyas they may provide significant protectionagainst injury in an accident. Do not removethem. Check the adjustment after someoneelse uses the seat.

Adjustment

To raise the head restraint, pull it up.

To lower, push the lock knob q1 and pushthe head restraint down.

SSS0686 SSS0288


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Adjust the head restraint so the center islevel with the center of your ears.

Active head restraint (front seats)

WARNING

O Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effective-ness of the active head restraint.

O Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system can

prevent all injuries in any accident.

O Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impair ac-tive head restraint function.

The active head restraint moves forwardutilizing the force that the seatback re-ceives from the occupant in a rear-endcollision. The movement of the head re-straint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement andhelping absorb some of the forces thatmay lead to whiplash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for col-lisions at low to medium speeds in whichit is said that whiplash injury occursmost.

Active head restraints operate only in cer-tain rear-end collisions. After the colli-sion, the head restraints return to theiroriginal positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraintsas described in the previous section.

SSS0287 SSS0508


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ARMREST

Rear armrest

Pull the armrest forward until it is hori-zontal.

Trunk pass-through

The rear center seatback can be folded toallow trunk access from inside of the ve-hicle.

To access the trunk, pull down the rearcenter armrest and pull out the trunkpass-through lid q1 .

To lock the lid, use the mechanical keyand turn it to the LOCK position q2 . Tounlock, turn the mechanical key to theUNLOCK position q3 . For the mechanicalkey usage, see “Keys (Intelligent Key)” in

the “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

Make sure that the mechanical key is re-moved from the trunk pass-through lidkey cylinder before opening or closing thelid. Otherwise the lid and the rear armrestmay be damaged.

SSS0678 SSS0677


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properlyadjusted, and you are sitting upright andwell back in your seat with both feet onthe floor, your chances of being injured orkilled in an accident and/or the severityof injury may be greatly reduced. INFINITIstrongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time youdrive, even if your seating position in-cludes a supplemental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts beworn at all times when a vehicle is beingdriven.

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appropri-ate, in a child restraint.

O The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entire re-straint system and increase the chance

or severity of injury in an accident. Se-rious injury or death can occur if the seatbelt is not worn properly.

O Always route the shoulder belt over yourshoulder and across your chest. Neverrun the belt behind your back, underyour arm or across your neck. The beltshould be away from your face and neck,but not falling off your shoulder.

SSS0136A

SEAT BELTS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high could in-crease the risk of internal injuries in anaccident.

O Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

O Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce its effec-tiveness.

O Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

O Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

O If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turned ONwith all doors closed and all seat beltsfastened, it may indicate a malfunctionin the system. Have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

O Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has ac-tivated, it cannot be reused and must bereplaced together with the retractor. Seean INFINITI dealer.

O Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by an INFINITI dealer.

O All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware, shouldbe inspected after any collision by anINFINITI dealer. INFINITI recommendsthat all seat belt assemblies in useduring a collision be replaced unless thecollision was minor and the belts showno damage and continue to operateproperly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during acollision should also be inspected andreplaced if either damage or improperoperation is noted.

O All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any colli-sion. Always follow the restraint manu-facturer’s inspection instructions and re-placement recommendations. The childrestraints should be replaced if they aredamaged.

SSS0134A


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information inthis manual, child safety information isavailable from many other sources, in-cluding doctors, teachers, governmenttraffic safety offices, and community orga-nizations. Every child is different, so besure to learn the best way to transportyour child.

There are three basic types of child re-straint systems:

O Rear facing child restraint

O Front facing child restraint

O Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on thechild’s size. Generally, infants (up toabout 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg))should be placed in rear facing child re-straints. Front facing child restraints areavailable for children who outgrow rearfacing child restraints and are at least 1year old. Booster seats are used to helpposition a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on achild who can no longer use a front facingchild restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protection.The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit themproperly. The shoulder belt may come tooclose to the face or neck. The lap belt maynot fit over their small hip bones. In an acci-dent, an improperly fitting seat belt couldcause serious or fatal injury. Always use ap-propriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require the use of approvedchild restraints for infants and small chil-dren. (See “Child restraints” later in thissection.)

Also, there are other types of child re-straints available for larger children foradditional protection.

INFINITI recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. This is es-pecially important because your vehiclehas a supplemental restraint system (airbag system) for the front passenger. See

SSS0016

SSS0014


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Supplemental restraint system” later inthis section.

Infants

Infants up to at least one year old shouldbe placed in a rear facing child restraint.INFINITI recommends that infants beplaced in child restraints that comply withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.You should choose a child restraint whichfits your vehicle and always follow themanufacturer’s instructions for installa-tion and use.

Small children

Children that are over one year old andweigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) can be placedin a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions forminimum and maximum weight andheight recommendations. INFINITI recom-mends that small children be placed inchild restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana-dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. Youshould choose a child restraint that fitsyour vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation anduse.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child re-straints should be seated and restrainedby the seat belts which are provided. Theseat belt may not fit properly if the childis less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5 cm) tall andweighs between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb(36 kg). A booster seat should be used toobtain proper seat belt fit.

INFINITI recommends that a child beplaced in a commercially availablebooster seat if the shoulder belt in thechild’s seating position fits close to theface or neck or if the lap portion of theseat belt goes across the abdomen. Thebooster seat should raise the child sothat the shoulder belt is properly posi-tioned across the top, middle portion ofthe shoulder and the lap belt is low onthe hips. A booster seat can only be usedin seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seatshould fit the vehicle seat and have alabel certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.Once the child has grown so the shoulderbelt is no longer on or near the face andneck, use the shoulder belt without thebooster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seatand do not allow a child in the cargo areaswhile the vehicle is moving. The child couldbe seriously injured or killed in an accidentor sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMEN

INFINITI recommends that pregnantwomen use seat belts. The seat beltshould be worn snug, and always positionthe lap belt as low as possible around thehips, not the waist, and place theshoulder belt over your shoulder andacross your chest. Never run thelap/shoulder belt over your abdominalarea. Contact your doctor for specific rec-ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

INFINITI recommends that injured personsuse seat belts, depending on the injury.Check with your doctor for specific recom-mendations.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WARNING

O Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

O Do not ride in a moving vehicle when theseatback is reclined. This can be dan-gerous. The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. In an accident, youcould be thrown into it and receive neckor other serious injuries. You could alsoslide under the lap belt and receive seri-ous internal injuries.

O For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor and ad-just the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier inthis section.

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-tractor and insert the tongue into thebuckle until it clicks.

O The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion will permit the belt tomove, and allow you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

O If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

SSS0292Front seat

SSS0293Rear seat


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

3. Position the lap belt portion low andsnug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion towardthe retractor to take up extra slack.Make sure the shoulder belt is routedover your shoulder and across yourchest.

The front passenger and rear seat beltshave a locking mechanism for child re-straint installation. It is referred to as theautomatic locking mode or child restraintmode.

When the automatic locking mechanism is

activated the seat belt cannot be ex-tended again until the seat belt tongue isdetached from the buckle and fully re-tracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. For addi-tional information, see “Child restraints”later in this section.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by an occu-pant, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat seatbacks are completely secured inthe latched position. If they are not com-pletely secured, passengers may be injuredin an accident or sudden stop.

SSS0290Front seat

SSS0291ARear seat


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the belt, push the button onthe buckle. The seat belt will automati-cally retract.

Checking seat belt operation

Your seat belt retractors are designed tolock belt movement by two separatemethods:

O when the belt is pulled quickly fromthe retractor.

O when the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seatbelts, check the operation as follows:

O grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-ward quickly. The retractor should lockand restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during thischeck or if you have any question aboutbelt operation, see an INFINITI dealer.

Center of rear seat

Selecting correct set of seat belts:

The center seat belt buckle is identifiedby the CENTER mark qA . The center seatbelt tongue can be fastened only into thecenter seat belt buckle.

SSS0326 SSS0687


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Shoulder belt height adjustment(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.See “Precautions on seat belt usage” ear-lier in this section.

WARNING

O After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move theshoulder belt anchor up and down tomake sure it is securely fixed in position.

O The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effective-ness of the entire restraint system andincrease the chance or severity of injuryin an accident.

To adjust, push the button qA , and thenmove the shoulder belt anchor to the de-sired position, so that the belt passesover the center of the shoulder. The beltshould be away from your face and neck,but not falling off of your shoulder. Re-lease the button to lock the shoulder beltanchor into position.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving posi-tion, it is not possible to properly fit thelap-shoulder belt and fasten it, an ex-tender is available. The extender adds ap-proximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and

may be used for either the driver or frontpassenger seating position. See anINFINITI dealer for assistance if the ex-tender is required.

WARNING

O Only INFINITI belt extenders, made bythe same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, should beused with the INFINITI seat belts.

O Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use an ex-tender. Such unnecessary use could re-sult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

O Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or asudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

O To clean the seat belt webbings, apply amild soap solution or any non-causticsolution recommended for gentlycleaning cloth upholstery or carpets.

SSS0294A


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Then brush it, wipe with a cloth and al-low it to dry in the shade. Do not allowthe seat belts to retract until they arecompletely dry.

O If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, theseat belts may retract slowly. Wipe theshoulder belt guide with a clean, drycloth.

O Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexiblewires and anchors work properly. Ifloose parts, deterioration, cuts orother damage on the webbing arefound, the entire belt assembly shouldbe replaced.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle. Fail-ure to use a child restraint can result inserious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possible

for even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

SSS0099 SSS0100

CHILD RESTRAINTS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O INFINITI recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a front facing child restraintin the front seat, see “Child restraint in-stallation using the seat belts” in thissection.

O Improper use or improper installation ofa child restraint can increase the risk orseverity of injury for both the child andother occupants of the vehicle and canlead to serious injury or death in an acci-dent.

O Follow all of the child restraint manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a child restraint,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types of child re-straints in your vehicle.

O If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being injuredin a collision or a sudden stop greatly in-creases.

O Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loads im-posed by correctly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstances are they to beused for adult seat belts or harnesses.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

O After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 in (25 mm).If the restraint is not secure, tighten thebelt as necessary, or put the restraint inanother seat and test it again. You mayneed to try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types of ve-hicles.

O When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH Systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles before plac-ing your child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universalchild restraint lower anchor system, re-ferred to as the Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren System or LATCH.Some child restraints include two rigid orwebbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to these lower anchors. Fordetails, see “Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren System (LATCH)” in this sec-tion.

If you do not have a LATCH compatiblechild restraint, the vehicle seat belts canbe used. See “Child restraint installed us-ing the seat belts” later in this section. Ingeneral, child restraints are also designedto be installed with the lap portion of alap/shoulder seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child re-straints for infants and small children ofvarious sizes. When selecting any child


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

restraint, keep the following points inmind:

O Choose only a restraint with a labelcertifying that it complies with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 orCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213.

O Check the child restraint in your ve-hicle to be sure it is compatible withthe vehicle’s seat and seat beltsystem.

O If the child restraint is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thechild restraint and check the variousadjustments to be sure the child re-straint is compatible with your child.Choose a child restraint that is de-signed for your child’s height andweight. Always follow all recom-mended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren SYSTEM (LATCH)

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-chor points that are used with Lower An-chors and Tethers for CHildren System(LATCH) compatible child restraints. Thissystem may also be referred to as theISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. Withthis system, you do not have to use a ve-hicle seat belt to secure the child re-straint.

The LATCH anchor points are provided toinstall child restraints in the rear out-board seating positions only. Do not at-tempt to install a child restraint in thecenter position using the LATCH anchors. LATCH lower anchor point

locations

The LATCH anchors are located at the rearof the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to helpyou locate the LATCH anchors.

SSS0710LATCH label location


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown inthe illustration. If a child restraint is notsecured properly, your child could be se-riously injured or killed in an accident.

O Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH anchors. The child restraint willnot be secured properly.

O Child restraint anchor points are de-signed to withstand only those loads im-posed by correctly fitted child restraints.Under no circumstance are they to beused for adult seat belts or harnesses.

Installing child restraint LATCHanchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints includetwo rigid or webbing-mounted attach-ments that can be connected to two an-chors located at certain seating positionsin your vehicle. With this system, you donot have to use a vehicle seat belt to se-cure the child restraint. Check your childrestraint for a label stating that it is com-patible with LATCH. This information mayalso be in the instructions provided bythe child restraint manufacturer.

SSS0637 SSS0643LATCH webbing-mounted attachment


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

LATCH child restraints generally requirethe use of a top tether strap. See “Toptether strap child restraint” in this sectionfor installation instructions.

When installing a child restraint, carefullyread and follow the instructions in thismanual and those supplied with the childrestraint. See “Child restraint installationusing LATCH” in this section.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINT

If the manufacturer of your child restraintrequires the use of a top tether strap, itmust be secured to an anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designed towithstand only those loads imposed by cor-rectly fitted child restraints. Under no cir-cumstances are they to be used for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located on the rear par-cel shelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with theseat belt or LATCH (rear outboard seat po-sitions only), as applicable.

Flip up the anchor cover from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat. Position the top tether strapover the top of the seatback and secure itto the tether anchor bracket that providesthe straightest installation. Tighten thestrap according to the manufacturer’s in-structions to remove any slack.

If you have any questions when installinga top tether strap child restraint on therear seat, consult your INFINITI dealer fordetails.

SSS0644LATCH rigid attachment

SSS0675


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

O Attach LATCH compatible child re-straints only at the locations shown. Forthe LATCH lower anchor locations, see“Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildrenSystem (LATCH)” in this section. If achild restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

O The LATCH anchors are designed towithstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstance are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

O Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are no ob-structions over the LATCH anchors, suchas seat belt webbing or seat cushion ma-terial. The child restraint will not be se-cured properly if the LATCH anchors areobstructed.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facingchild restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors.

3. The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the vehicle seat-back. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint andit is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating posi-tion or a different child restraint.

SSS0645Front facing — step 2

SSS0646Front facing − step 2


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

4. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center ofthe child restraint with your knee tocompress the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped witha top tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point. See “Toptether strap child restraint” in thissection.

6. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold child restraint near theLATCH attachment and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the anchor at-tachments to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-

straint. Not all child restraints fit in alltypes of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 6.




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on theseat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-tachments to the LATCH lower an-chors.

3. For child restraints that are equippedwith webbing mounted attachments,remove any additional slack from theanchor attachments. Press downwardand rearward firmly in the center ofthe child restraint with your hand tocompress the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

SSS0648Rear facing − step 2




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

4. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe LATCH attachment and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the anchor at-tachments to further tighten the childrestraint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-


5. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the child restraint is loose, repeatsteps 3 through 4.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear-facing childrestraint in the front passenger seat.Supplemental front air bags inflate withgreat force. A rear-facing child restraintcould be struck by the supplementalfront air bag in a crash and could seri-


SSS0100


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ously injure or kill your child.

O INFINITI recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seat tothe rearmost position. Also, be sure thefront passenger air bag status light is il-luminated to indicate the passenger airbag is OFF. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” in this section for de-tails.

O The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

O Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraint notbeing properly secured. The restraintcould tip over or otherwise be unsecuredand cause injury to the child in a suddenstop or collision.

O A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front pas-senger seat.

The instructions in this section apply tochild restraint installation using the ve-hicle seat belts in the rear seat or thefront passenger seat.

Front-facing

Follow these steps to install a front-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat beltin the rear seat or in the front passengerseat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Child re-straints for infants must be used in therear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the

SSS0640Front facing (front passenger seat) — step 1


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

seat. Always follow the child restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint shouldbe secured against the seatback. Ifnecessary, adjust or remove the headrestraint (front passenger seat only) toobtain the correct child restraint fit.See “Head restraint” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, storeit in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the child re-straint is removed. If the seating posi-tion does not have an adjustable headrestraint and it is interfering with theproper child restraint fit, try anotherseating position or a different child re-straint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Be sure to follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for belt routing.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seatbelt retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode (child restraint mode). It re-verts to emergency locking modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

SSS0360BFront facing — step 3



w 06.7.27/V36-D X

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from theseat belt; press downward and rear-ward firmly in the center of the childrestraint with your knee to compressthe vehicle seat cushion and seatbackwhile pulling up on the seat belt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped witha top tether strap, route the top tetherstrap and secure the tether strap tothe tether anchor point (rear seat in-stallation only). See “Top tether strapchild restraint” in this section. Do notinstall child restraints equipped with atop tether strap to seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.

8. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe seat belt path and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the shoulderbelt to further tighten the child re-straint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child re-





w 06.7.27/V36-D X


9. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pullmore seat belt out of the retractor. Ifyou cannot pull any more belt web-bing out of the retractor, the retractoris in the automatic locking mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraintis properly secured prior to each use.If the seat belt is not locked, repeatsteps 3 through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in thefront passenger seat, push the igni-tion switch to the ON position. Thefront passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light isnot illuminated, see “Front passengerair bag and status light” in this sec-tion. Move the child restraint to an-other seating position. Have thesystem checked by an INFINITI dealer.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt is fully retracted, the auto-matic locking mode (child restraint mode)is canceled.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facingchild restraint using the vehicle seat beltin the rear seat:

1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. Position the child restraint onthe seat. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s instructions.


SSS0100


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

2. Route the seat belt tongue through thechild restraint and insert it into thebuckle until you hear and feel thelatch engage. Be sure to follow thechild restraint manufacturer’s instruc-tions for belt routing.

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt isfully extended. At this time, the seatbelt retractor is in the automatic lock-ing mode (child restraint mode). It re-verts to emergency locking modewhen the seat belt is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull upon the shoulder belt to remove anyslack in the belt.

SSS0654Rear facing — step 2




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

5. Remove any additional slack from thechild restraint; press downward andrearward firmly in the center of thechild restraint with your hand to com-press the vehicle seat cushion andseatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

6. Before placing the child in the childrestraint, hold the child restraint nearthe seat belt path and use force topush the child restraint from side toside, and tug it forward to make surethat it is securely held in place. Itshould not move more than 1 in (25mm). If it does move more than 1 in(25 mm), pull again on the shoulderbelt to further tighten the child re-straint. If you are unable to properlysecure the restraint, move the re-straint to another rear seating positionand try again, or try a different childrestraint. Not all child restraints fit in

all types of vehicles.

7. Check that the retractor is in the auto-matic locking mode by trying to pullmore seat belt out of the retractor. Ifyou cannot pull any more seat beltwebbing out of the retractor, the re-tractor is in the automatic lockingmode.

8. Check to make sure that the child re-straint is properly secured prior toeach use. If the belt is not locked, re-peat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed andthe seat belt fully retracted, the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode) iscanceled.




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTER SEATS

WARNING

O Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle. Fail-ure to use a child restraint or boosterseat can result in serious injury or death.

O Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist the

forces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

O INFINITI recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation” inthis section.

O A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use a three-point type seat belt with a booster seatcan result in a serious injury in suddenstop or collision.

O Improper use or improper installation ofa booster seat can increase the risk orseverity of injury for both the child andother occupants of the vehicle and canlead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

O Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protectionduring a collision.

O Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat, besure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types of boosterseats in your vehicle.

O If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

O Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but as up-

SSS0099

BOOSTER SEATS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

right as possible.

O After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does not crossthe abdomen.

O Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

O When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around in caseof a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot. Checkthe seating surface and buckles before plac-ing your child in the booster seat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offeredby several manufacturers. When selectingany booster seat, keep the followingpoints in mind:

O Choose only a booster seat with alabel certifying that it complies withFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

O Check the booster seat in your vehicleto be sure it is compatible with the ve-hicle’s seat and seat belt system.

O Make sure the child’s head will beproperly supported by the boosterseat or vehicle seat. The seatbackmust be at or above the center of thechild’s ears. For example, if a low backbooster seat q1 is chosen, the vehicleseatback must be at or above the cen-ter of the child’s ears. If the seatbackis lower than the center of the child’sears, a high back booster seat q2should be used.

LRS0455 LRS0453


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O If the booster seat is compatible withyour vehicle, place your child in thebooster seat and check the variousadjustments to be sure the boosterseat is compatible with your child. Al-ways follow all recommended proce-dures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply tobooster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

INFINITI recommends that booster seats beinstalled in the rear seat. However, if youmust install a booster seat in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger’s seat tothe rearmost position.

CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt automaticlocking mode when using a booster seatwith the seat belts.

Follow these steps to install a boosterseat in the rear seat or in the front pas-senger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, adjust the seatback so thatit is uplight and then move the seat tothe rearmost position. Do not move theseat with the booster seat attached toit.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.Only place it in a front facing direc-tion. Always follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

LRS0464 SSS0640


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

3. The booster seat should be positionedon the vehicle seat so that it is stable.If necessary, adjust or remove thehead restraint to obtain the correctbooster seat fit. See “Head restraint”earlier in this section. If the head re-straint is removed, store it in a secureplace. Be sure to install the head re-straint when the booster seat is re-moved. If the seating position doesnot have an adjustable head restraintand it is interfering with the properbooster seat fit, try another seatingposition or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seatbelt low and snug on the child’s hips.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of theseat belt toward the retractor to takeup extra slack. Be sure the shoulderbelt is positioned across the top,middle portion of the child’s shoulder.Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for ad-justing the belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-structions for properly fastening a seatbelt shown in the “Three-point typeseat belt” earlier in this section.

LRS0451Center position

LRS0452Outboard position

LRS0454Front seat


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

7. If the booster seat is installed in thefront passenger seat, push the igni-tion switch to the ON position. Thefront passenger air bag status light

may or may not illuminate de-pending on the size of the child andthe type of booster seat used. See“Front passenger air bag and statuslight” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)section contains important informationconcerning the driver and passenger frontimpact supplemental air bags (INFINITIAdvanced Air Bag System), front seatside-impact supplemental air bags, cur-tain side-impact air bags and front seatpre-tensioner seat belts.Supplemental front air bag system: TheINFINITI advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head andchest of the driver and front passenger incertain frontal collisions.Supplemental side-impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impactforce to the chest and pelvis area of thedriver and front passenger in certain sideimpact collisions. The front seat side-impact supplemental air bags are de-signed to inflate on the side where the ve-hicle is impacted.Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants infront and rear outboard seating positionsin certain side impact collisions. The cur-tain side-impact air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle isimpacted.

These supplemental restraint systems aredesigned to supplement the crash protec-tion provided by the driver and passengerseat belts and are not a substitute forthem. Seat belts should always be cor-rectly worn and the occupant seated asuitable distance away from the steeringwheel, instrument panel and door fin-ishers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in thissection for instructions and precautionson seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the systems areoperational.

SSS0676

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

O The front passenger air bag will not in-flate if the passenger air bag status lightis lit or if the front passenger seat is un-occupied. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

O The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the INFINITI ad-vanced air bag system, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplemental

SSS0131B

SSS0132B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

front air bag if you are up against it whenit inflates. Always sit back against theseatback and as far-away as practicalfrom the steering wheel or instrumentpanel. Always use the seat belts.

O The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat beltusage then inflates the air bags. Failureto properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent.

O The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pattern sensor) that turns the front pas-senger air bag OFF under some condi-tions. This sensor is only used in thisseat. Failure to be properly seated andwearing the seat belt can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.See “Front Passenger air bag and statuslight” later in this section.

O Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk of injury if the supplemental front airbag inflates.

SSS0007

SSS0006


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples of dan-gerous riding positions are shown in theillustrations.

O Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

O Even with the INFINITI Advanced Air BagSystem, never install a rear facing childrestraint in the front seat. An inflatingsupplemental front air bag could seri-ously injure or kill your child. See “Childrestraints” earlier in this section for de-tails.

SSS0008

SSS0009

SSS0099

SSS0100


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag:

O The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk or se-verity of injury in various kinds of acci-dents.

SSS0059A

SSS0188A

SSS0140

SSS0162

SSS0159


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O The seat belts, the supplemental side airbags and curtain side-impact air bagsare most effective when you are sittingwell back and upright in the seat. Theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag inflate with great force. Do not allowanyone to place their hand, leg or facenear the side air bag on the side of theseatback of the front seat or near theside roof rails. Do not allow anyone sit-ting in the front seats or rear outboardseats to extend their hand out of thewindow or lean against the door. Someexamples of dangerous riding positionsare shown in the previous illustrations.

O When sitting in the rear seat, do not holdonto the seatback of the front seat. If thesupplemental side air bag inflates, youmay be seriously injured. Be especiallycareful with children, who should alwaysbe properly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shown inthe illustrations.

O Do not use seat covers on the front seat-backs. They may interfere with supple-

mental side air bag inflation.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Crash zone sensor2. Supplemental front air bag modules

(INFINITI advanced air bags)3. Supplemental side air bag modules4. Occupant classification sensor (pat-

tern sensor)

5. Occupant classification system controlunit

6. Supplemental curtain side-impact airbags

7. Supplemental curtain side-impact airbag modules

8. Diagnosis sensor unit9. Satellite sensors10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor

INFINITI ADVANCED AIR BAGSYSTEM (front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the INFINITIadvanced air bag system for the driverand front passenger seats. This system isdesigned to meet certification require-ments under U.S. regulations. It is alsopermitted in Canada. However, all of theinformation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental air bag is locatedin the center of the steering wheel; thefront passenger supplemental air bag ismounted in the instrument panel abovethe glove box. The front air bags are de-signed to inflate in higher severity frontalcollisions, although they may inflate if theforces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severityfrontal impact. They may not inflate incertain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage(or lack of it) is not always an indicationof proper supplemental air bag operation.

The INFINITI advanced air bag system hasdual stage air bag inflators. The system

SSS0683


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

monitors information from the crash zonesensor, the diagnosis sensor unit, seatbelt buckle sensors and the occupantclassification sensor (pattern sensor). In-flator operation is based on the severityof a collision and seat belt usage for thedriver. For the front right passenger, theoccupant classification sensor is alsomonitored. Based on information from thesensors, only one front air bag may in-flate in a crash, depending on the crashseverity and whether the front occupantsare belted or unbelted. Additionally, thefront passenger air bag may be automati-cally turned OFF under some conditions,depending on the information provided bythe occupant classification sensor. If thefront passenger air bag is OFF, the pas-senger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the lightwill not be illuminated, but the air bagwill be off). See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section forfurther details. One front air bag inflatingdoes not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your airbag system, contact INFINITI or an INFINITIdealer. If you are considering modification

of your vehicle due to a disability, youmay also contact INFINITI. Contact infor-mation is contained in the front of thisOwner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag in-flates, a fairly loud noise may be heard,followed by release of smoke. This smokeis not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it,as it may cause irritation and choking.Those with a history of a breathing condi-tion should get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the head and chest of thefront occupants. They can help save livesand reduce serious injuries. However, aninflating front air bag may cause facialabrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lowerbody.

Even with INFINITI advanced air bags, seatbelts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright asfar as practical away from the steeringwheel or instrument panel. The supple-mental front air bags inflate quickly in or-der to help protect the front occupants.Because of this, the force of the front air

bag inflating can increase the risk of in-jury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, the air bag module during infla-tion.

The air bag will deflate quickly after a col-lision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the system is op-erational.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Front passenger air bag andstatus light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some condi-tions. Read this section carefully to learnhow it operates. Proper use of the seat, seatbelt and child restraints is necessary formost effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-cerning the use of seats, seat belts and childrestraints can increase the risk or severity ofinjury in an accident.

Status light:

The front passenger air bag status lightis located above the ashtray. The

light operates as follows:

O Unoccupied passenger seat: Theis OFF and the front passenger

air bag is OFF and will not inflate in acrash.

O Passenger seat occupied by a smalladult, child or child restraint as out-lined in this section: The illumi-nates to indicate that the front pas-senger air bag is OFF and will not in-flate in a crash.

O Occupied passenger seat and the pas-senger meets the conditions outlinedin this section: The light is OFF toindicate that the front passenger airbag is operational.

Front passenger air bag:

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF when the vehicle isoperated under some conditions as de-scribed below as permitted by U.S. regu-lations. If the front passenger air bag isOFF, it will not inflate in a crash. Thedriver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to helpreduce the risk of injury or death from aninflating air bag to certain front passengerseat occupants, such as children, by re-quiring the air bag to be automaticallyturned OFF.

The occupant classification sensor (pat-tern sensor) is in the front passenger seatcushion and is designed to detect an oc-cupant and objects on the seat. For ex-ample, if a child is in the front passengerseat, the advanced air bag system is de-signed to turn the passenger air bag OFFin accordance with the regulations. Also,if a child restraint of the type specified inthe regulations is on the seat, the occu-pant classification sensor can detect itand cause the air bag to turn OFF.

SSS0676Front passenger air bag status light


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Front passenger seat adult occupants whoare properly seated and using the seatbelt as outlined in this manual should notcause the passenger air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. For small adults itmay be turned OFF, however, if the occu-pant does not sit in the seat properly (forexample, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwisebeing out of position), this could causethe sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Alwaysbe sure to be seated and wearing the seatbelt properly for the most effective protec-tion by the seat belt and supplemental airbag.

INFINITI recommends that pre-teens andchildren be properly restrained in a rearseat. INFINITI also recommends that ap-propriate child restraints and boosterseats be properly installed in a rear seat.If this is not possible, the occupant clas-sification sensor is designed to operateas described above to turn the front pas-senger air bag OFF for specified child re-straints. Failing to properly secure childrestrains and to use the automatic lockingmode (child restraint mode) may allow therestraint to tip or move in an accident orsudden stop. This can also result in thepassenger air bag inflating in a crash in-stead of being OFF. See “Child restraints”

earlier in this section for proper use andinstallation.

If the front passenger seat is not occu-pied, the passenger air bag is designednot to inflate in a crash. However, heavyobjects placed on the seat could result inair bag inflation, because of the objectbeing detected by the occupant classifica-tion sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if achild is standing on the seat, or if twochildren are on the seat, contrary to theinstructions in this manual. Always besure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light,you can monitor when the front pas-senger air bag is automatically turned OFFwith the seat occupied. The light will notilluminate when the front passenger seatis unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but thepassenger air bag status light is illumi-nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),it could be that the person is a smalladult, or is not sitting on the seat prop-erly.

If a child restraint must be used in thefront seat, the passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-pending on the size of the child and thetype of child restraint being used. If theair bag status light is not illuminated (in-dicating that the air bag might inflate in acrash), it could be that the child restraintor seat belt is not being used properly.Make sure that the child restraint is in-stalled properly, the seat belt is usedproperly and the occupant is positionedproperly. If the air bag status light is stillnot illuminated, reposition the occupantor child restraint in a rear seat.

If the passenger air bag status light willnot illuminate even though you believethat the child restraint, the seat belts andthe occupant are properly positioned, thesystem may be sensing an unoccupiedseat (in which case the air bag is OFF).Your INFINITI dealer can check that thesystem is OFF by using a special tool.However, until you have confirmed withyour dealer that your air bag is workingproperly, reposition the occupant or childrestraint in a rear seat.

The INFINITI advanced air bag system andpassenger air bag status light will take afew seconds to register a change in thepassenger seat status. However, if theseat becomes unoccupied, the air bag


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

status light will remain off.

If a malfunction occurs in the front pas-senger air bag system, the supplementalair bag warning light , located in themeter and gauges area will blink. Havethe system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

Other supplemental front air bagprecautions

WARNING

O Do not place any objects on the steeringwheel pad or on the instrument panel.Also, do not place any objects betweenany occupant and the steering wheel orinstrument panel. Such objects may be-come dangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the supplemental front air baginflates.

O Do not place objects with sharp edgeson the seat. Also, do not place heavy ob-jects on the seat that will leave perma-nent impressions in the seat. Such ob-jects can damage the seat or occupantclassification sensor (pattern sensor).This can affect the operation of the air

bag system and result in serious per-sonal injury.

O Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hotsteam cleaners) on the seat. This candamage the seat or occupant classifica-tion sensor. This can also affect the op-eration of the air bag system and resultin serious personal injury.

O Immediately after inflation, several frontair bag system components will be hot.Do not touch them; you may severelyburn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of thesupplemental air bag system. This is toprevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-sion system or front end structure. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental air

bag system may result in serious per-sonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel pad andabove the instrument panel or by install-ing additional trim material around theair bag system.

O Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that is not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the proper op-eration of the occupant classificationsensor.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of theseat belt system. This may affect the


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

supplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the seat belt system may re-sult in serious personal injury.

O Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done byan INFINITI dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by anINFINITI dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment and prob-ing devices should not be used on the airbag system.

O A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified repairfacility. A cracked windshield could af-fect the function of the supplemental airbag system.

O The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identifica-tion.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about thesupplemental front air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sec-tions in this Owner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL SIDE-IMPACT AIRBAG AND CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACTAIR BAG SYSTEM

The supplemental side-impact air bagsare located in the outside of the seatbackof the front seats. The supplemental cur-tain side-impact air bags are located inthe side roof rails. These systems are de-signed to meet voluntary guidelines tohelp reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the in-formation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and cur-

SSS0521


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

tain side-impact air bags are designed toinflate in higher severity side collisions,although they may inflate if the forces inanother type of collision are similar tothose of a higher severity side impact.They are designed to inflate on the sidewhere the vehicle is impacted. They maynot inflate in certain side collisions on theside where the vehicle is impacted.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not al-ways an indication of proper supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag inflate, a fairlyloud noise may be heard, followed by re-lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmfuland does not indicate a fire. Care shouldbe taken not to inhale it, as it may causeirritation and choking. Those with a his-tory of a breathing condition should getfresh air promptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along withthe use of seat belts, help to cushion theimpact force on the chest and pelvis ofthe front occupants. Curtain side-impactair bags help to cushion the impact forceto the head of occupants in the front andrear outboard seating positions. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious inju-

ries. However, an inflating side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag maycause abrasions or other injuries. Supple-mental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags do not provide restraintto the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly wornand the driver and passenger seated up-right as far as practical away from thesupplemental side air bag. Rear seat pas-sengers should be seated as far away aspractical from the door finishers and sideroof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly inorder to help protect the out-of-positionoccupants. Because of this, the force ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflating can increase the risk ofinjury if the occupant is too close to, or isagainst, these air bag modules during in-flation. The side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag will deflate quickly afterthe collision is over.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ONposition, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7 sec-onds if the systems are operational.

WARNING

O Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisher andthe front seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injury ifthe supplemental side air bag inflates.

O Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthis side air bag and curtain air bagsystem. This is to prevent accidental in-flation of the side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag or damage to theside air bag and curtain side-impact airbag system.

O Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, suspen-sion system or side panel. This could af-fect proper operation of the supple-


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

O Tampering with the supplemental airbag system may result in serious per-sonal injury. For example, do not changethe front seat by placing material nearthe seatback or by installing additionaltrim material, such as seat covers,around the side air bag.

O Work around and on the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag systemshould be done by an INFINITI dealer. In-stallation of electrical equipment shouldalso be done by an INFINITI dealer. TheSRS wiring harnesses* should not bemodified or disconnected. Unauthorizedelectrical test equipment and probingdevices should not be used on the side-impact air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harnesses connectorsare yellow and orange for easy identifi-cation.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the side-impact air bag and curtain side-impact air

bag system and guide the buyer to theappropriate sections in this Owner’sManual.

PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELTSYSTEM (front seats)

WARNING

O The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be re-used after activation. It must be replacedtogether with the retractor and buckleas a unit.

O If the vehicle becomes involved in a fron-tal collision but the pre-tensioner is notactivated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if neces-sary, replaced by an INFINITI dealer.

O No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring of thepre-tensioner seat belt system. This is toprevent accidental activation of the pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the pre-tensioner seat belt operation. Tam-pering with the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

O Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by an INFINITIdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by an INFINITIdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

O If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contactan INFINITI dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate INFINITI Service Manual. In-correct disposal procedures could causepersonal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem activates in conjunction with thesupplemental air bag systems. Workingwith the seat belt retractor, it helpstighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-comes involved in certain types of colli-sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-pants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with theseat belt’s retractor. These seat belts areused the same as conventional seat belts.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When the pre-tensioner seat belt acti-vates, smoke is released and a loud noisemay be heard. The smoke is not harmful,and it does not indicate a fire. Careshould be taken not to inhale it as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with ahistory of a breathing condition shouldget fresh air promptly.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensioner system, the supplemental airbag warning light will not come on,will flash intermittently or will turn on for7 seconds and remain on after the igni-tion switch has been pushed to the ONposition. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. Theymust be checked and repaired. Take yourvehicle to the nearest INFINITI dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we requestthat you inform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat belt system and guide thebuyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLABELS

Warning labels about the supplementalfront air bag and supplemental side-impact air bag systems are placed in thevehicle as shown in the illustration.

q1 SRS air bag

The warning labels are located on the sur-face of the sun visors.

q2 SRS side-impact air bag

The warning label is located on the sideof the passenger’s side center pillar.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNINGLIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel,monitors the circuits of the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side-impactair bag and curtain side-impact air bagsystems, and pre-tensioner seat belt. Thecircuits monitored by the supplementalair bag warning light are the diagnosissensor unit, satellite sensors, crash zonesensor, front air bag modules, side airbag modules, curtain side-impact air bag

SSS0330 SPA1097


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

modules, and all related wiring, and pre-tensioner seat belt.

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light illuminates. The supplemen-tal air bag warning light will turn off afterabout 7 seconds if the system is opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems, and pre-tensionerseat belt need servicing:

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds after pushing the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplementalfront air bags, supplemental side airbags, curtain side-impact air bags and/orpre-tensioner seat belt may not operateproperly. They must be checked and re-paired. Take your vehicle to the nearestINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an ac-cident. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

The supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belt aredesigned to activate on a one-time-onlybasis. As a reminder, unless it is dam-aged, the supplemental air bag warninglight will remain illuminated after inflationhas occurred. Repair and replacement ofthese systems should be done only by anINFINITI dealer.

When maintenance work is required onthe vehicle, the supplemental front airbags, side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags, related parts and pre-tensioner

seat belt should be pointed out to theperson conducting the maintenance. Theignition switch should always be in theLOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

O Once a supplemental front air bag, sideair bag or curtain side-impact air bag hasinflated, the air bag module will notfunction again and must be replaced.Additionally, if any of the supplementalfront air bags inflate, the activated pre-tensioner seat belt must also be re-placed. The air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt system should be re-placed by an INFINITI dealer. The air bagmodules and pre-tensioner seat beltsystem cannot be repaired.

O The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems and pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be inspected by an INFINITIdealer if there is any damage to the frontend or side portion of the vehicle.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O If you need to dispose of the supplemen-tal air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact anINFINITI dealer.

Correct supplemental air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt system disposal pro-cedures are set forth in the appropriateINFINITI Service Manual. Incorrect dis-posal procedures could cause personalinjury.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ........................................................... 2-2Instrument panel .............................................. 2-4Meters and gauges........................................... 2-6

Speedometer and odometer ........................ 2-7Tachometer ................................................. 2-8Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-8Fuel gauge .................................................. 2-9

Compass (if so equipped)................................. 2-9Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders........................................................ 2-13

Checking bulbs .......................................... 2-13Warning lights ........................................... 2-14Indicator lights .......................................... 2-18Audible reminders..................................... 2-20

Dot matrix liquid crystal display...................... 2-21Indicators for operation............................. 2-23Indicators for maintenance ........................ 2-25Trip computer ............................................ 2-27

Security systems ............................................ 2-29Vehicle security system............................. 2-29INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System........... 2-31

Windshield wiper and washer switch.............. 2-32Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch............................................................. 2-33

Headlight and turn signal switch .................... 2-34Xenon headlights ...................................... 2-34Headlight switch........................................ 2-35Turn signal switch ..................................... 2-39Fog light switch......................................... 2-39

Hazard warning flasher switch........................ 2-40Horn ............................................................... 2-40Heated seats (if so equipped) ......................... 2-41SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)............... 2-42Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch ....... 2-42Clock .............................................................. 2-43

Adjusting the time..................................... 2-43Power outlet ................................................... 2-44Cigarette lighter and ashtrays......................... 2-45

Front.......................................................... 2-45Rear .......................................................... 2-45

Storage .......................................................... 2-46Cup holders .............................................. 2-46Sunglasses holder ................................... 2-48Glove box.................................................. 2-48Console box .............................................. 2-49Rear armrest pocket .................................. 2-50Card holder ............................................... 2-50Coat hooks ................................................ 2-51

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Cargo net ................................................... 2-51Trunk net for extra window washer fluid(Canada only)............................................. 2-51

Windows......................................................... 2-52Power windows ......................................... 2-52

Sunroof (if so equipped) ................................. 2-54Automatic sunroof ..................................... 2-54

Interior lights ................................................ 2-56Map lights................................................. 2-56Personal lights .......................................... 2-57Interior light control switch........................ 2-57

Vanity mirror lights......................................... 2-58

Trunk light ...................................................... 2-58HomeLink Universal Transceiver.................... 2-59

Programming HomeLink ........................... 2-59Programming HomeLink for Canadiancustomers.................................................. 2-61Operating the HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ................................................ 2-61Programming trouble-diagnosis ................. 2-61Clearing the programmed information ....... 2-62Reprogramming a single HomeLinkbutton ....................................................... 2-62If your vehicle is stolen............................. 2-62

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFFswitch (P.2-42)

2. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-18)

3. Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)switch (if so equipped) (P.2-37)

4. Instrument brightness control switch(P.2-38)

5. TRIP/RESET switch for twin trip odom-eter (P.2-7)

6. Headlight, fog light and turn signalswitch (P.2-34)

7. Paddle shifter (if so equipped) (P.5-13)

8. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (Leftside)— ENTER or tuning switch

(P.4-7, P.4-55)— BACK switch (P.4-55)— TALK switch (P.4-81)/Phone switch

(P.4-58)— Volume control switches (P.4-55)— Source select switch (P.4-55)

9. Trip computer switch (P.2-21)

10. Windshield wiper and washer switch(P.2-32)

11. Steering-wheel-mounted controls(Right side)— Cruise control switches (P.5-17)— Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P.5-19)

12. Hood release handle (P.3-17)

13. Intelligent Key port (P.5-8)

14. Electric tilting/telescopic steeringwheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)

15. Manual tilting/telescopic steeringwheel switch (if so equipped) (P.3-22)

SSI0262

COCKPIT

2-2 Instruments and controls

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

16. Steering wheel— Horn (P.2-40)— Driver supplemental air bag

(P.1-35)

Instruments and controls 2-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Side ventilator (P.4-25)


3. Center ventilator (P.4-25)

4. Audio system (P.4-32)

5. Clock (P.2-43)

6. Center multi-function control panel— Navigation system* (if so

equipped)— Vehicle information and setting

buttons (P.4-9)

— Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P.4-58)

— Audio system (P.4-32)

7. Center display (P.4-3)/Navigation sys-tem* (if so equipped)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch(P.2-40)

9. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P.1-35)

10. Fuse box cover (P.8-22)

11. Parking brake— Parking (P.5-44)

12. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-7)

13. Automatic climate control system(P.4-25)

14. Cigarette lighter and ashtrays(P.2-45)

15. Heated seat switch (if so equipped)(P.2-41)

16. SNOW mode switch (if so equipped)(P.2-42)

17. CompactFlash card slot (if soequipped) (P.4-44)

SSI0263

INSTRUMENT PANEL


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

18. Rear window and outside mirror (if soequipped) defogger switch (P.2-33)

19. Glove box lid release handle (P.2-48)20. Trunk release power cancel switch

(P.3-18)*: Refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Tachometer* (P.2-8)

2. Warning/Indicator lights (P.2-13)

3. Speedometer* (P.2-7)

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge*(P.2-8)

5. Dot matrix liquid crystal display/Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-21)

6. Fuel gauge* (P.2-9)

*: The needle indicators in the speedom-eter, tachometer, engine coolant tem-perature gauge and fuel gauge maymove slightly after the ignition switch ispushed to the LOCK position. This is nota malfunction.

SSI0264

METERS AND GAUGES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/twin trip odometer

The odometer q1 and twin trip odometerq2 are displayed on the dot matrix crystaldisplay when the ignition switch is in theON position.

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-tance of individual trips.

Changing the display:

Pushing the TRIP A/B RESET switch q3 atthe bottom left of the combination meter

panel changes the display as follows:

TRIP A → TRIP B → TRIP A

Resetting the trip odometer:

Push the TRIP A/B RESET switch q3 formore than 1 second to reset the currentlydisplayed trip odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance toempty information is also available. Referto “DOT MATRIX CRYSTAL DISPLAY” laterin this section and “How to use STATUSbutton” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems”section later in this manual.SIC3253

SpeedometerSIC3259

Odometer/twin trip odometer


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed inrevolutions per minute (RPM). Do not revthe engine into the red zone q1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause serious en-gine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature.

The engine coolant temperature is normalwhen the gauge needle points within thezone q1 shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature will varywith the outside air temperature and driv-ing conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates engine coolant tem-perature near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If gauge is over the normalrange, stop the vehicle as soon as safelypossible. If the engine is overheated, contin-ued operation of the vehicle may seriouslydamage the engine. See “If your vehicleoverheats” in the “6. In case of emergency”section for immediate action required.

SIC3254 SIC3255


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuellevel in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-ing, turning, acceleration, or going up ordown hill.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) af-ter the ignition switch is pushed to LOCK.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters “E” (Empty).

The low fuel warning appears on thedot matrix liquid crystal display when the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon asit is convenient, preferably before thegauge reaches “E”. There will be a smallreserve of fuel in the tank when the fuelgauge needle reaches “E”.

The indicates that the fuel-filler dooris located on the passenger’s side of thevehicle.

CAUTION

O If the vehicle runs out of fuel, themalfunction indicator light (MIL)

may come on. Refuel as soon as pos-sible. After a few driving trips, the

light should turn off. If the light re-mains on after a few driving trips, havethe vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer.

O For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section.

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the compass display qB willindicate the direction of the vehicle’sheading.

SIC3256 SIC3181

COMPASS (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

If the display reads “C”, calibrate thecompass by driving the vehicle in 3 com-plete circles at less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).You can also calibrate the compass bydriving your vehicle on your everydayroute. The compass will be calibratedonce it has tracked 3 complete circles.

To turn on and off the compass manually,push the switch qA while the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic northand geographical north is known as vari-ance. In some areas, this difference cansometimes be great enough to causefalse compass readings. Follow these in-structions to set the variance for your par-ticular location if this happens:

1. Push the switch for more than 3seconds. The current zone number willappear in the display.

2. Find your current location and vari-ance number on the zone map.

3. Push the switch repeatedly untilthe new zone number appears in thedisplay, then release the switch. Afteryou release the switch, the displaywill show a compass direction within afew seconds.

O If the compass deviates from the cor-rect indication soon after repeated ad-justment, have the compass checkedat an INFINITI dealer.

O The compass may not indicate the cor-rect compass point in tunnels or whiledriving up or down a steep hill.(The compass returns to the correctcompass point when the vehicleSIC0611B

Zone mapInstruments and controls 2-11

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

O Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

O When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampened withglass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter the mir-ror housing.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light (AWDmodels) Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (Blue)

Automatic transmission check warning light Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

or Brake warning light Preview Function warning light (Orange; if soequipped) Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Engine oil pressure warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicatorlight

Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) warning light(if so equipped)

Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS) indicatorlight (if so equipped)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system warninglight (Orange; if so equipped)

Automatic transmission position indicatorlight

CHECKING BULBS

Apply the parking brake and push the ig-nition switch to the ON position withoutstarting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , , ,, ,

The following lights come on briefly andthen go off (if so equipped):

, or , , , ,, ,

If any light does not come on, it may indi-cate a burned-out bulb or an open circuitin the electrical system. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

Some indicators and warnings are alsodisplayed on the dot matrix crystal dis-play between the speedometer and ta-chometer. See “Dot matrix crystal dis-play” later in this section.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING LIGHTS

All-Wheel Drive (AWD)warning light (AWD models)

The warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is pushed to ON. Itturns off soon after the engine is started.

If the AWD system malfunctions, or the di-ameter of the front and the rear wheelsare different, the warning light will eitherremain illuminated or blink. See “All-Wheel Drive (AWD)” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

CAUTION

O If the warning light comes on while driv-ing there may be a malfunction in theAWD system. Reduce the vehicle speedand have your vehicle checked by anINFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

O If the AWD warning light blinks on whenyou are driving:

- blinks rapidly (about twice a second):Pull off the road in a safe area, and

idle the engine. The driving mode willchange to 2WD to prevent the AWDsystem from malfunctioning. If thewarning light turns off, you can driveagain.

- blinks slowly (about once every 2 sec-onds):Pull off the road in a safe area, andidle the engine. Check that all tiresizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

O If the warning light is still on after theabove operations, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

or Anti-lock BrakingSystem (ABS)warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)warning light illuminates and then turnsoff. This indicates the ABS is operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates whilethe engine is running, or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioningproperly. Have the system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake sys-tem then operates normally, but withoutanti-lock assistance. See “Brake system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

Automatic transmissioncheck warning light

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the light comes on for 2 sec-onds. If the light comes on at any othertime, it may indicate the transmission isnot functioning properly. Have yourINFINITI dealer check and repair the trans-mission.

or Brake warninglight

This light functions for both the parkingbrake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the light comes on when the park-ing brake is applied.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Low brake fluid warning light:

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the light warns of a low brake fluidlevel. If the light comes on while the en-gine is running with the parking brake notapplied, stop the vehicle and perform thefollowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brakefluid as necessary. See “Brake fluid” inthe “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, havethe warning system checked by anINFINITI dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warningindicator:

When the parking brake is released andthe brake fluid level is sufficient, if boththe brake warning light and the Anti-lockBraking System (ABS) warning light illu-minate, it may indicate the ABS is notfunctioning properly. Have the brakesystem checked, and if necessary re-paired, by an INFINITI dealer promptly.Avoid high-speed driving and abruptbraking. (See “Anti-lock Braking System(ABS) warning light” earlier in this sec-tion.)

WARNING

O Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on.Driving could be dangerous. If you judgeit to be safe, drive carefully to thenearest service station for repairs. Oth-erwise, have your vehicle towed becausedriving it could be dangerous.

O Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

O If the brake fluid level is below theminimum or MIN mark on the brake fluidreservoir, do not drive until the brakesystem has been checked at an INFINITIdealer.

Charge warning light

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate the charging sys-tem is not functioning properly. Turn theengine off and check the alternator belt. Ifthe belt is loose, broken, missing or if the

light remains on, see an INFINITI dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the alternator beltis loose, broken or missing.

Four-Wheel Active Steer(4WAS) warning light (if soequipped)

If the light comes on while the engine isrunning, it may indicate that there is amalfunction with the Four-Wheel ActiveSteer (4WAS) portion of the steeringsystem. Push the ignition switch to theOFF position and then to the ON position.If the light does not turn off after cyclingthe engine, have the system checked byan INFINITI dealer.

For further information about the Four-Wheel Active Steer system, see “Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, theFour-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) functionwill cease but driving can be continued.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

However, the steering wheel is slightlyturned even when driving on a straightroad. Drive carefully to the nearestINFINITI dealer.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pres-sure. If the light flickers or comes on dur-ing normal driving, pull off the road in asafe area, stop the engine immediatelyand call an INFINITI dealer or other autho-rized repair shop.

The engine oil pressure warning light isnot designed to indicate a low oil level.Use the dipstick to check the oil level. See“Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oil pres-sure warning light on could cause seriousdamage to the engine almost immediately.Such damage is not covered by warranty.Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to doso.

Intelligent Cruise Control(ICC) system warning light(Orange; if so equipped)

This light comes on if there is a malfunc-tion in the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system.

Intelligent Key warninglight

After the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, this light comes on for about2 seconds and then turns off.

This light warns of a malfunction with theelectrical steering lock system or the In-telligent Key system.

If the light comes on while the engine isstopped, it may be impossible to free thesteering lock or to start the engine. If thelight comes on while the engine is run-ning, you can drive the vehicle. Howeverin these cases, contact an INFINITI dealerfor repair as soon as possible.

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warnsof low tire pressure or indicates that theTPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, thislight illuminates for about 1 second andturns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tirepressure, the warning light will illuminate.

When the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates, you should stop and adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The low tirepressure warning light does not automati-cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-ommended pressure, the vehicle must bedriven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)to activate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tirepressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section and in the“6. In case of emergency” section.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly,the low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute when theignition switch is pushed ON. The lightwill remain on after the 1 minute. Havethe system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pres-sure monitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

O If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch pushed ON, have the ve-hicle checked by an INFINITI dealer assoon as possible.

O If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible. Se-rious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could resultin serious personal injury. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire

pressure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If the lightstill comes on while driving after adjust-ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat. Ifyou have a flat tire, replace it with aspare tire as soon as possible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after the 1 minute.Contact your INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible for tire replacement and/orsystem resetting.

O Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by INFINITI could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

O The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

O If the vehicle is being driven at speeds ofless than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMSmay not operate correctly.

O Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the front and rear.

Master warning light

When the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition, the master warning light illumi-nates if any of the following are displayedon the dot matrix liquid crystal display:

O No key warning

O Low fuel warning

O Low washer fluid warning

O Parking brake release warning

O Door/trunk open warning

See “Dot matrix crystal liquid display”later in this section.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Preview Function warninglight (Orange; if soequipped)

The light comes on if there is a malfunc-tion in the Brake Assist (with PreviewFunction) system.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fastenseat belts. The light illuminates wheneverthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition, and will remain illuminated untilthe driver’s seat belt is fastened. At thesame time, the chime will sound for about6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt issecurely fastened.

The seat belt warning light for the frontpassenger will illuminate if the seat beltis not fastened when the front passen-ger’s seat is occupied. For 5 seconds afterthe ignition switch is in the ON position,the system does not activate the warninglight for the front passenger.

See “Seat belts” in the “1. Safety —Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section for precautions onseat belt usage.

Supplemental air bagwarning light

After pushing the ignition switch to theON position, the supplemental air bagwarning light will illuminate. The supple-mental air bag warning light will turn offafter about 7 seconds if the supplementalfront air bag and supplemental side airbag, curtain side-impact air bag systemsand/or pre-tensioner seat belt are opera-tional.

If any of the following conditions occur,the supplemental front air bag, supple-mental side air bag, supplemental curtainside-impact air bag and pre-tensionerseat belt needs servicing and your vehiclemust be taken to your nearest INFINITIdealer.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight remains on after approximately 7seconds.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight flashes intermittently.

O The supplemental air bag warninglight does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the Supple-mental Restraint Systems and/or the pre-

tensioner seat belt may not function prop-erly.

For additional information, see “Supple-mental restraint system” in the “1. Safety— Seats, seat belts and supplemental re-straint system” section.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light ison, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag, cur-tain side-impact air bag systems and/or pre-tensioner seat belt will not operate in an ac-cident. To help avoid injury to yourself orothers, have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Adaptive Front lightingSystem (AFS) indicator light(if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the Adaptive Front lightingSystem (AFS) indicator light will illumi-nate. The light will turn off in about 1 sec-ond if the AFS is operational.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

This light also comes on when the AFS isturned off by pushing the OFF side of theAFS switch.

If the AFS indicator light blinks, it may in-dicate the AFS is not functioning properly.Have the system checked by an INFINITIdealer.

See “Adaptive Front lighting System(AFS)” later in this section.

Automatic transmissionposition indicator light

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the indicator shows the au-tomatic selector shift position. See“Driving with automatic transmission” inthe “5. Starting and driving” section.

Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light( ) will be lit and the passenger frontair bag will be OFF depending on how thefront passenger seat is being used.

For front passenger air bag status lightoperation, see “INFINITI advanced air bagsystem” in the “1. Safety — Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system”section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This light comes on when the headlighthigh beam is on and goes out when thelow beam is selected.

Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comeson steady or blinks while the engine isrunning, it may indicate a potential emis-sion control malfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may alsocome on steady if the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, or if the vehicle runs outof fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-fillercap is installed and closed tightly, andthat the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons(14 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the lightshould turn off if no other potential emis-sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 secondswhen the engine is not running, it indi-cates that the vehicle is not ready for anemission control system inspection/maintenance test. See “Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“9. Technical and consumer information”section of this manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will comeon in one of two ways:

O Malfunction indicator light on steady— An emission control system mal-function has been detected. Check thefuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap isloose or missing, tighten or install thecap and continue to drive the vehicle.The light should turn off after afew driving trips. If the light doesnot turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

O Malfunction indicator light blinking —An engine misfire has been detectedwhich may damage the emission con-trol system.

To reduce or avoid emission controlsystem damage:

a) Do not drive at speeds above 45MPH (72 km/h).

b) Avoid hard acceleration or decel-eration.


w 06.9.20/V36-D X

c) Avoid steep uphill grades.d) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light maystop blinking and remain on.

Have the vehicle inspected by anINFINITI dealer. You do not need tohave your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without havingthe emission control system checked and re-paired as necessary could lead to poor drive-ability, reduced fuel economy, and possibledamage to the emission control system.

Security indicator light

The light blinks when the ignition switchis in the LOCK position. This function indi-cates the security system equipped onthe vehicle is operational.

If the security system is malfunctioning,this light will remain on while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position. For addi-tional information, see “Security system”later in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDCsystem or the traction control system isoperating, thus alerting the driver to thefact that the road surface is slippery andthe vehicle is nearing its traction limits.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The light flashes when the turn signalswitch lever or hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) off indicator light

The light comes on when the vehicle dy-namic control off switch is pushed to OFF.This indicates that the vehicle dynamiccontrol system and traction controlsystem are not operating. When the ve-hicle dynamic control off indicator lightand slip indicator light come on with thevehicle dynamic control system turned on,this light alerts the driver to the fact thatthe vehicle dynamic control system’s fail-safe mode is operating, for example thevehicle dynamic control system may notbe functioning properly. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer. If an abnor-

mality occurs in the system, the vehicledynamic control system function will becanceled but the vehicle is still driveable.For additional information, see “VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system” in the “5.Starting and driving” section of thismanual.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Key reminder chime

A chime will sound if the driver side dooris opened while the ignition switch ispushed to the ACC position or pushed tothe OFF or LOCK position with the Intelli-gent Key left in the Intelligent Key port.Make sure the ignition switch is pushedto the OFF position, and take the Intelli-gent Key with you when leaving the ve-hicle.

Light reminder chime

A chime will sound when the driver sidedoor is opened with the light switch inthe or position, and the igni-tion switch is pushed to the ACC position.

Turn the light switch off when you leavethe vehicle.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Parking brake reminder chime

The chime will sound if the vehicle isdriven with the parking brake applied.Stop the vehicle and release the parkingbrake.

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wearwarnings. When a brake pad requires re-placement, it will make a high pitchedscraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-tion whether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked as soonas possible if the warning sound is heard.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display q1 islocated between the tachometer and thespeedometer, and it displays the auto-matic transmission position indicator, theIntelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system (ifso equipped) information, the IntelligentKey operation information and otherwarnings and information.

For details about the automatic transmis-sion position indicator, see “Indicatorlights” earlier in this section. For detailsabout the ICC system, see “Intelligentcruise control system” in the “5. Startingand driving” section. For the details aboutthe Intelligent Key system, see “Intelli-

gent Key system” in the “3. Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

SIC3252

DOT MATRIX LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

SIC3280


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

INDICATORS FOR OPERATION

1. Engine start operation indicator(Automatic Transmission models)

This indicator appears when the selectorlever is in the P position.

This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe brake pedal depressed.

2. Steering lock releasemalfunction indicator

This indicator appears when the steeringwheel cannot be released from the LOCKposition.

If this indicator appears, push the push-button ignition switch while lightlyturning the steering wheel right and left.

3. Intelligent Key insertionindicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-gent Key needs to be inserted into the In-telligent Key port. (For example, the Intel-ligent Key battery is discharged.)

If this indicator appears, insert the Intelli-gent Key into the Intelligent Key port inthe correct direction. See “Push-button ig-

nition switch” in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section.

4. Intelligent Key removalindicator

This indicator appears when the driver’sdoor is opened with the ignition switch inthe LOCK position and the Intelligent Keyplaced in the Intelligent Key port. A keyreminder chime also sounds.

If this indicator appears, remove the Intel-ligent Key from the Intelligent Key portand take it with you when leaving the ve-hicle.

5. NO KEY warning

This warning appears in either of the fol-lowing conditions.

No key inside the vehicle:

The warning appears when the door isclosed with the Intelligent Key left outsidethe vehicle and the ignition switch in theACC or ON position. Make sure that theIntelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key:

The warning appears when the ignitionswitch is pushed from the LOCK positionand the Intelligent Key cannot be recog-

nized by the system. You cannot start theengine with an unregistered key. Use theregistered Intelligent Key.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “3.Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-tion for more details.

6. SHIFT “P” warning (AutomaticTransmission models)

This warning appears when the ignitionswitch is pushed to stop the engine withthe selector lever in any position exceptthe P position.

If this warning appears, move the selectorlever to the P position or push the igni-tion switch to the ON position.

An inside warning chime will also sound.See “Intelligent Key system” in the“3. Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section.

7. “PUSH” warning (AutomaticTransmission models)

This warning appears when the selectorlever is moved to the P position with theignition switch in the ACC position afterthe SHIFT “P” warning appears.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

To push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition, perform the following procedure:

SHIFT “P” warning → (Move the selec-tor lever to “P”) → PUSH warning →(Push the ignition switch → ignitionswitch position is turned to ON) →PUSH warning → (Push the ignitionswitch → ignition switch position isturned to OFF)

8. Intelligent Key batterydischarge indicator

This indicator appears when the Intelli-gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator appears, replace the bat-tery with a new one. See “Intelligent Keybattery replacement” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

9. Engine start operation indicator(Manual Transmission models)

This indicator appears when the shiftlever is in the N position.

This indicator means that the engine willstart by pushing the ignition switch withthe clutch pedal depressed.

10. Parking brake release warning

This warning appears when the vehiclespeed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) and theparking brake is applied.

11. Low fuel warning

This warning appears when the fuel levelin the tank is getting low. Refuel as soonas it is convenient, preferably before thefuel gauge reaches the empty (E) position.

There is a small reserve of fuel remainingin the tank when the fuel gauge reachesthe empty (E) position.

12. Low washer fluid warning

This warning appears when the washertank fluid is at a low level. Add washerfluid as necessary. See “Window washerfluid” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

13. Door/trunk open warning(ignition switch is in the ONposition)

This warning appears if any of the doorsand/or the trunk lid are open or notclosed securely. The vehicle icon indi-cates which door or the trunk lid is openon the display.

14. “Time to rest” indicator

This indicator appears when the set “timeto rest” indicator activates. You can setthe time for up to 6 hours. (See “TripComputer” later in this section.)

15. Low outside temperaturewarning

This warning appears if the outside tem-perature is below 37°F (3°C). The warningcan be set not to be displayed. (See “TripComputer” later in this section.)

16. Cruise indicator

Cruise main switch indicator:

The indicator is displayed when the cruisecontrol main switch is pushed. When themain switch is pushed again, the indi-cator disappears. When the cruise controlmain switch indicator is displayed, thecruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator:

The indicator is displayed while the ve-hicle speed is controlled by the cruisecontrol system. If the indicator blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indi-cate that the cruise control system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

checked by an INFINITI dealer.

See “CRUISE CONTROL” in the “5. Startingand driving” section for details.

17. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system indicator (if so equipped)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) systemMAIN switch indicator:

The indicator is displayed when the Intel-ligent Cruise Control (ICC) system mainswitch is pushed. When the main switchis pushed again, the indicator disappears.While the main switch indicator is dis-played, the ICC system is operational.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system setswitch indicator:

The indicator is displayed on while the ve-hicle speed is controlled by the IntelligentCruise Control (ICC) system. If the indi-cator blinks while the engine is running, itmay indicate that the ICC system is notfunctioning properly. Have the systemchecked by an INFINITI dealer.

See “INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)SYSTEM” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for details.

INDICATORS FOR MAINTENANCE

1. Engine oil replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set timecomes for changing the engine oil. Youcan set or reset the distance for changingthe engine oil. (See “Trip Computer” laterin this section.)

2. Oil filter replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set timecomes for replacing the oil filter. You canset or reset the distance for replacing theoil filter. (See “Trip Computer” later inthis section.)

3. Tire replacement indicator

This indicator appears when the set timecomes for replacing tires. You can set orreset the distance for replacing tires. (See“Trip Computer” later in this section.)

4. “OTHER” indicator

This indicator appears when the set timecomes for replacing items other than theengine oil, oil filter and tires. You can setor reset the distance for replacing theitems. (See “Trip Computer” later in thissection.)SIC3281


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

More maintenance reminders are alsoavailable on the center display. See “Howto use INFO button” in the “4. Monitor,climate, audio, phone and voice recogni-tion systems” section.

SIC3282


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TRIP COMPUTER

Switches for the trip computer are locatedon the right side of the combinationmeter panel. To operate the trip com-puter, push the side or front of theswitches as shown above.

qA switch

qB switch

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, modes of the trip computercan be selected by pushing the

switch qA .

Each time the switch qA is pushed,the display will change as follows:

Current fuel consumption → Average fuelconsumption and speed → Elapsed timeand trip odometer → Distance to empty(dte) → Outside air temperature (ICY) →Setting → Warning check

1. Current fuel consumption

The current fuel consumption modeshows the current fuel consumption.

2. Average fuel consumption (MPGor l (liter)/100 km) and speed(MPH or km/h)

Fuel consumption:

The average fuel consumption modeshows the average fuel consumptionsince the last reset. Resetting is done bypushing the switch qB for longerthan 1 second. (The average speed is alsoreset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after areset, the display shows “——”.

Speed:

The average speed mode shows the aver-

age vehicle speed since the last reset. Re-setting is done by pushing the

switch qB for longer than 1 second.(The average fuel consumption is alsoreset at the same time.)

The display is updated every 30 seconds.The first 30 seconds after a reset, the dis-play shows “——”.

3. Elapsed time and trip odometer(mls or km)

Elapsed time:

The elapsed time mode shows the timesince the last reset. The displayed timecan be reset by pushing the switchqB for longer than 1 second. (The tripodometer is also reset at the same time.)

Trip odometer:

The trip odometer mode shows the totaldistance the vehicle has been drivensince the last reset. Resetting is done bypushing the switch qB for longerthan 1 second. (The elapsed time is alsoreset at the same time.)

4. Distance to empty (dte — mlsor km)

The distance to empty (dte) mode pro-

SIC3264


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

vides you with an estimation of the dis-tance that can be driven before refueling.The dte is constantly being calculated,based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption.

The display is updated every 30 seconds.

The dte mode includes a low range warn-ing feature. If the fuel level is low, thewarning is displayed on the screen.

When the fuel level drops even lower, thedte display will change to “——”.

O If the amount of fuel added is small,the display just before the ignitionswitch is pushed to the OFF positionmay continue to be displayed.

O When driving uphill or roundingcurves, the fuel in the tank shifts,which may momentarily change thedisplay.

5. Outside air temperature (ICY —°F or °C)

The outside air temperature is displayedin °F or °C in the range of −22 to 131°F(−30 to 55°C).

The outside air temperature mode in-cludes a low temperature warning feature.

If the outside air temperature is below37°F (3°C), the warning is displayed onthe screen.

The outside temperature sensor is locatedin front of the radiator. The sensor may beaffected by road or engine heat, wind di-rections and other driving conditions. Thedisplay may differ from the actual outsidetemperature or the temperature displayedon various signs or billboards.

6. Setting

Setting cannot be made while driving. Amessage “Setting can only be operatedwhen stopped” is also displayed on thedot matrix crystal display.

The switch qA and switch qB

are used in the setting mode to select anddecide a menu.

SKIP:

Push the switch qA to move to thewarning check mode.

Push the switch qB to select othermenus.

ALERT:

There are 3 submenus under the alertmenu.

O BACKSelect this submenu to return to thetop page of the setting mode.

O TIME TO RESTSelect this submenu to specify whenthe “time to rest” indicator activates.

O ICYSelect this submenu to display the lowoutside temperature warning.

MAINTENANCE:

There are 5 submenus under the mainte-nance menu.


O ENGINE OILSelect this submenu to set or resetthe distance for changing the engineoil.

O OIL FILTERSelect this submenu to set or resetthe distance for replacing the oil filter.

O TIRESelect this submenu to set or resetthe distance for replacing tires.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O OTHERSelect this submenu and set or resetthe distance for replacing items otherthan the engine oil, oil filter and tires.

DISPLAY:

There are 3 submenus under the displaymenu.


O LANGUAGESelect this submenu to choose Englishor French for display.

O UNITSelect this submenu to choose themetric unit from MPG or l/100 km.

7. Warning check

SKIP:

Push the switch qA to move to thewarning check mode.

Push the switch qB to select othermenus.

DETAIL:

This item is available only when awarning is displayed.

Select this menu to see the details ofwarnings.

Your vehicle has two types of securitysystems, as follows:

O Vehicle security

O INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System

The security condition will be shown bythe security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides vi-sual and audio alarm signals if someoneopens the doors, hood, or trunk lid whenthe system is armed. It is not, however, amotion detection type system that acti-

SIC2132

SECURITY SYSTEMS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

vates when a vehicle is moved or when avibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft butcannot prevent it, nor can it prevent thetheft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-nents in all situations. Always secure yourvehicle even if parking for a brief period.Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in thevehicle, and always lock it when unat-tended. Be aware of your surroundings,and park in secure, well-lit areas when-ever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-tion, such as component locks, identifica-tion markers, and tracking systems, areavailable at auto supply stores and spe-cialty shops. Your INFINITI dealer mayalso offer such equipment. Check withyour insurance company to see if you maybe eligible for discounts for various theftprotection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the win-dows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from thevehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lockall doors. The doors can be lockedwith the Intelligent Key, door handle

request switch, power door lockswitch or mechanical key.

5. Confirm that the security indicatorlight comes on. The security indicatorlight glows for about 30 seconds andthen blinks. The system is now armed.If, during this 30 second time period,the door is unlocked, or the ignitionswitch is pushed to ACC or ON, thesystem will not be armed.

Even when the driver and/or passengersare in the vehicle, the system will activatewith all doors, hood, and trunk lid lockedwith the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-tion. When pushing the ignition switch tothe ACC or ON position, the system will bereleased.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give thefollowing alarm:

O The headlights blink and the hornsounds intermittently.

O The alarm automatically turns off afterapproximately 1 minute. However, thealarm reactivates if the vehicle is tam-pered with again.

SIC2045


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The alarm is activated by:

O Unlocking the door or opening thetrunk lid without using the button onthe Intelligent Key, the door handle re-quest switch or the mechanical key.(Even if the door is opened by re-leasing the door inside lock knob, thealarm will activate.)

O Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm will stop by unlocking a door bypushing the unlock button on the Intelli-gent Key, the door handle request switch orusing the mechanical key. The alarm willnot stop if the ignition switch is pushed tothe ACC or ON position.

If the system does not operate as de-scribed above, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemwill not allow the engine to start withoutthe use of the registered Intelligent Key.

Statement related to section 15 of FCCrules for INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer

System (CONT ASSY - CARD SLOT)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD VOIDTHE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THEEQUIPMENT. Security indicator light

The security indicator light is located onthe meter panel. It indicates the status ofthe INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System.

The light blinks after the ignition switchwas in the LOCK position. This functionindicates the security systems equippedon the vehicle are operational.

If the INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemis malfunctioning, this light will remain onwhile the ignition switch is in the ON po-sition.

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

SIC2045


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

gine will not start, see an INFINITI dealerfor INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer Systemservice as soon as possible. Please bringall Intelligent Keys that you have when vis-iting an INFINITI dealer for service.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield and ob-scure your vision which may lead to an acci-dent. Warm windshield with the defrosterbefore you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

O Do not operate the washer continuouslyfor more than 30 seconds.

O Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

O Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concentrateand water.

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The windshield wiper and washer oper-ates when the ignition switch is in the ONposition.

Push the lever down to operate the wiperat the following speed:

q1 Intermittent — intermittent operationcan be adjusted by turning the knobtoward qA (Slower) or qB (Faster).When the speed sensing wiper intervalfunction is turned on, the intermittentoperation speed varies in accordancewith the vehicle speed. (For example,when the vehicle speed is high, the in-termittent operation speed will be

faster.) To turn this function on andoff, see “How to use SETTING button”in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems”section.

q2 Low — continuous low speed opera-tion

q3 High — continuous high speed opera-tion

Push the lever up q4 to have one sweepoperation of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you q5 to operatethe washer. Then the wiper will also oper-ate several times.

To defog/defrost the rear window glassand outside mirrors (if so equipped), startthe engine and push the switch q1 on.The indicator light q2 will come on. Pushthe switch again to turn the defroster off.

It will automatically turn off in approxi-mately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear win-dow, be careful not to scratch or damage therear window defroster.

SIC3238 SIC3239Type A

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE MIRRORDEFROSTER SWITCH


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

XENON HEADLIGHTS

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

O When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an elec-tric shock, never attempt to modify ordisassemble. Always have your xenonheadlights replaced at an INFINITIdealer.

O Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an on-coming driver or the driver ahead of youand cause a serious accident. If head-lights are not aimed correctly, immedi-ately take your vehicle to an INFINITIdealer and have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initiallyturned on, its brightness or color variesslightly. However, the color and bright-ness will soon stabilize.

O The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not toturn off the headlights for short inter-vals (for example, when the vehiclestops at a traffic signal). Even when thedaytime running lights are active(Canada only), the xenon headlights donot turn on. This way the life of thexenon headlights is not reduced.

O If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will startblinking, or the color of the light willbecome reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact an INFINITIdealer.

SIC3278Type B

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting

q1 Turn the switch to the position:

The front park, side marker, tail, li-cense plate and instrument lights willcome on.

q2 Turn the switch to the position:

Headlights will come on and all theother lights remain on.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the head-lights to be set so they turn on and offautomatically.

To set the autolight system:

1. Make sure the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position q1 .

2. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition.

3. The autolight system automaticallyturns the headlights on and off.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, , or position.

The autolight system can turn on theheadlights automatically when it is darkand turn off the headlights when it islight.

If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFFposition and one of the doors is openedand this condition is continued, the head-lights remain on for 5 minutes.

Automatic headlights off delay

You can keep the headlights on for up to180 seconds after you push the ignitionswitch to OFF and open any door thenclose all the doors.

You can adjust the period of the auto-matic headlights off delay from 0 seconds(OFF) to 180 seconds.

For automatic headlights off delay setting,see “Automatic headlights off delay” inthe “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phoneand voice recognition systems” section.

SIC3267 SIC3268


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Be sure not to put anything on top of thephoto sensor qA located on the top of theinstrument panel. The photo sensor con-trols the autolight; if it is covered, thephoto sensor reacts as if it is dark and theheadlights will illuminate.

Headlight beam select

q1 To select the low beam, put the leverin the neutral position as shown.

q2 To select the high beam, push thelever forward while the switch is in the

position. Pull it back to selectthe low beam.

q3 Pulling the lever toward you will flashthe headlight high beam even whenthe headlight switch is in the OFF po-sition.

Battery saver system

O When the headlight switch is in theor position while the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position, thelights will automatically turn off 5 min-utes after the ignition switch has beenpushed to the OFF position.

O When the headlight switch remains inthe or position after thelights automatically turn off, the lightswill turn on when the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position.

CAUTION

O When you turn on the headlight switchagain after the lights automatically turnoff, the lights will not turn off automati-cally. Be sure to turn the light switch tothe OFF position when you leave the ve-hicle for extended periods of time, other-wise the battery will be discharged.

O Never leave the light switch on when theengine is not running for extended pe-riods of time even if the headlights turnoff automatically.

SAA0642A SIC3269


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Daytime running light system(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automaticallyilluminate when the engine is started withthe parking brake released. The daytimerunning lights operate with the headlightswitch in the OFF position or in the

position. Turn the headlight switchto the position for full illuminationwhen driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before theengine is started, the daytime runninglights do not illuminate. The daytime run-ning lights illuminate once the parkingbrake is released. The daytime runninglights will remain on until the ignitionswitch is pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are not on.It is necessary at dusk to turn on your head-lights. Failure to do so could cause an acci-dent injuring yourself and others.

Adaptive Front lighting System(AFS) (if so equipped)

The Adaptive Front lighting System (AFS)will automatically adjust the headlights(low beam) toward the turning direction toimprove the driver’s view. When the head-light switch is ON and the driver operatesthe steering wheel in a turn, the AFS sys-tem will be activated.

The AFS will operate:

O when the headlight switch is ON.

O when the selector lever is in any posi-tion other than P (Park) or R (Reverse).

O when the vehicle is driven at above 16MPH (25 km/h) for the left-side head-light. Note that the right-side lowbeam headlight will swivel but the leftside will not swivel when the vehicleis at a stop and the steering wheel isturned. The vehicle must attain aspeed above 16 MPH (25 km/h) beforeAFS activates the left-side headlight.

To turn the AFS off, push the OFF side ofthe AFS switch. (The AFS OFF indicatorlight will illuminate.) Push the ON side ofthe switch to turn the system on again.

AFS will also adjust the headlight to aproper axis automatically, depending onthe number of occupants in the vehicle,the load the vehicle is carrying and theroad conditions.

If the AFS OFF indicator light blinks afterthe ignition switch has been pushed tothe ON position, this may indicate thatthe AFS is not functioning properly. Havethe system checked by an INFINITI dealer.

SIC2645


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When the engine is started, the head-lights will vibrate to check the systemcondition. This is not a malfunction.

SIC3257

SIC3270


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Instrument brightness control

The instrument brightness control switchcan be operated when the ignition switchis in the ON position. When the switch isoperated, the dot matrix liquid crystal dis-play switches to the brightness adjust-ment mode.

Push the upper switch qA to brighten theinstrument panel lights. The bar q1 movesto the + side. When reaching themaximum brightness, “MAX” appears onthe display q2 .

Push the lower switch qB to dim the in-strument panel lights. The bar q1 movesto the − side. When reaching theminimum brightness, “MIN” appears onthe display q3 . However, “MIN” does notappear during the nighttime.

The dot matrix liquid crystal display re-turns to the normal display under the fol-lowing conditions:

O when the instrument brightness con-trol switch is not operated for morethan 5 seconds.

O when the side or front of theswitch or switch on the

right side of the combination meterpanel is pushed.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

q1 Turn signal

Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automati-cally.

q2 Lane change signal

To indicate a lane change, move the leverup or down to the point where lightsbegin flashing.

FOG LIGHT SWITCH

To turn the fog lights on, turn the head-light switch to the position, thenturn the switch to the position. Toturn them off, turn the switch to the OFFposition.

The headlights must be on for the foglights to operate.

SIC3271 SIC3272


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Push the switch on to warn other driverswhen you must stop or park under emer-gency conditions. All turn signal lights willflash.

WARNING

O If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

O Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unless un-usual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

O Turn signals do not work when thehazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flasher can be actuated with the igni-tion switch in any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center padarea of the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so couldaffect proper operation of the supplementalfront air bag system. Tampering with thesupplemental front air bag system may re-sult in serious personal injury.

SIC2574 SIC3312

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH HORN


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CAUTION

O The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

O Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using the seat.

O Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket,cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, theseat may become overheated.

O Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

O Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

O When cleaning the seat, never use gaso-line, thinner, or any similar materials.

O If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby an INFINITI dealer.

The front seats are warmed by built-inheaters. The switches located on the cen-ter console can be operated indepen-dently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Select heat range.

q1 For high heat, push the HI (High)side of the switch.

q2 For low heat, push the LO (Low)side of the switch.

The indicator light in the switch q3 will

SIC2770

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

illuminate when low or high is se-lected.

3. To turn off the heater, return theswitch to the level position. Make surethe indicator light goes off.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-stat, automatically turning the heateron and off. The indicator light will re-main on as long as the switch is on.

When the vehicle’s interior is warmed,or before you leave the vehicle, besure to turn off the switch.

For driving or starting the vehicle onsnowy roads or slippery areas, turn onthe SNOW mode switch. The indicatorlight on the switch will illuminate. Whenthe SNOW mode is activated, engineoutput is controlled to avoid wheel spin.

The vehicle should be driven with the Ve-hicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system on formost driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, theVDC system reduces the engine output toreduce wheel spin. The engine speed willbe reduced even if the accelerator is de-pressed to the floor. If maximum enginepower is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDCOFF switch. The indicator will illumi-nate.

SSD0351 SIC1881

SNOW MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFSWITCH


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restartthe engine to turn on the system. See“Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”in the “5. Starting and driving” section.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time. Re-adjust the time.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

1. To set the clock forward, push thebutton q1 .

2. To set the clock backward, push thebutton q2 .

3. To move forward or backward faster,push and hold the button more than 5seconds.

For details about display clock adjustment

(if so equipped), see “How to use SETTINGbutton” in the “4. Monitor, climate, audio,phone and voice recognition systems”section.

SIC3325

CLOCK


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The power outlet is located in the centerconsole.

CAUTION

O The outlet and plug may be hot during orimmediately after use.

O Do not use with accessories that exceeda 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do notuse double adapters or more than oneelectrical accessory.

O Use power outlet with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

O Avoid using power outlet when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

O This power outlet is not designed for usewith a cigarette lighter unit.

O Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may blow.

O Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,be sure the electrical accessory beingused is turned OFF.

O When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

SIC3247Automatic transmission models

SIC3273Manual transmission models

POWER OUTLET


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

FRONT

To open the ashtray lid, push the liddown and release it q1 .

To empty the ashtray, pull out q2 .

The cigarette lighter operates when theignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lighter in all the way q3 , thenrelease it. When the lighter is heated, itwill spring out. Return the lighter to itsoriginal position after use.

CAUTION

O The cigarette lighter socket is a powersource for the cigarette lighter elementonly. The use of the cigarette lightersocket as a power source for any otheraccessory is not recommended.

O Do not use any other power outlet for anaccessory lighter.

REAR

To open the ashtray lid, pull q1 .

To empty the ashtray, push down q2 , andpull out.

SIC3219 SIC2570

CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND ASHTRAYS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

O Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

O Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in an acci-dent.

To open the cup holder, push the lid q1 .

The flap qA will be folded down when in-serting a large container.

To remove the inner tray for cleaning, pullit up as illustrated q2 .

To open the cup holder, slide the lid q1 .

Install the partition plate into the slit q2 .

SIC3313Automatic transmission models — Front

SIC3274Manual transmission models — Front

STORAGE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

To open the console boxes, push theknob qA and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until the locklatches.

To open the cup holder, pull the lid. Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

O Do not use bottle holder for any otherobjects that could be thrown about inthe vehicle and possibly injure peopleduring sudden braking or an accident.

O Do not use bottle holder for open liquidcontainers.

SIC3275Manual transmission models — Console box

SIC1846BRear

SIC3276


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

To open the sunglasses holder, push q1 .

CAUTION

O Do not use for anything other thanglasses.

O Do not leave glasses in the sunglassesholder while parking in direct sunlight.The heat may damage the glasses.

GLOVE BOX

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

To open the glove box, pull the handle q1 .

To close, push the lid in until the locklatches.

To lock q2 /unlock q3 the glove box, use

SIC3246 SIC3244


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

the mechanical key. For the mechanicalkey usage, see “Keys (Intelligent Key)” inthe “3. Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console boxes, push up theknob qA and pull up the lid.

To close, push the lid down until latched.

SIC3245Automatic transmission models

SIC3277Manual transmission models


w 06.9.20/V36-D X

REAR ARMREST POCKET

The pocket can store a first aid kit orother small items.

CARD HOLDER

Type A

Insert a card qA in the holder.

Type B

Pull the sun visor down q1 and slide acard qA in the card holder.


SIC2154AType B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

COAT HOOKS

The coat hooks are equipped beside therear personal lights.

CAUTION

Do not place items which are more than 2 lb(1 kg) on the hook.

CARGO NET

The cargo net helps keep packages in thecargo area from moving around while yourvehicle is driven.

To install the cargo net, attach the hooksto the retainers qA .

CAUTION

Avoid keeping heavy objects in the net.

TRUNK NET FOR EXTRA WINDOWWASHER FLUID (Canada only)

The trunk net is provided for holding atank of extra window washer fluid.

To install the net, place a commerciallyavailable tank in the right corner of thetrunk and then attach the hooks to the re-strainers qA .

SIC3248 SIC3320 SIC3317


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

O Make sure that all passengers have theirhands, etc. inside the vehicle while it isin motion and before closing the win-dows. Use the window lock switch toprevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in the window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ig-nition switch is in the ON position or forabout 45 seconds after the ignition switchis pushed to the OFF position. If the driv-er’s or front passenger’s door is openedduring this period of about 45 seconds,power to the windows is canceled.

Main power window switch(driver’s side)

1. Driver side window2. Front passenger side window3. Rear left passenger side window4. Rear right passenger side window5. Window lock button

To open or close the window, push downqA or pull up qB the switch and hold it.The main switch (driver side switches) willopen or close all the windows.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the lock button qC is pushed in,only the driver side window can beopened or closed. Push it in again to can-cel.

SIC3279

WINDOWS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Passenger side power windowswitch

The passenger side switch will open orclose only the corresponding window. Toopen or close the window, push down orpull up the switch and hold it.

Automatic operation (for frontdoor windows or all doorwindows)

To fully open or close the window, com-pletely push down or pull up the switchand release it; it need not be held. Thewindow will automatically open or closeall the way. To stop the window, just pushor lift the switch in the opposite direction.

A light push or pull on the switch willcause the window to open or close untilthe switch is released.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediatelybefore the closed position which cannot bedetected. Make sure that all passengershave their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the window.

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the window as it is closing, thewindow will be immediately lowered.

The auto reverse function can be acti-


SIC3242Type B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

vated when the window is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position or for 45 seconds af-ter the ignition switch is pushed to theOFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

If the windows do not closeautomatically

If the power window automatic function(closing only) does not operate properly,perform the following procedure to initial-ize the power window system.


2. Open the window more than halfwayby operating the power windowswitch.

3. Pull the power window switch andhold it to close the window, and thenhold the switch more than 3 secondsafter the window is closed completely.

4. Release the power window switch. Op-erate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization iscomplete.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above forother windows.

If the power window automatic functiondoes not operate properly after per-forming the procedure above, have yourvehicle checked by an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof. Al-ways use seat belts and child restraints.

O Do not allow anyone to stand up or ex-tend any portion of their body out of thesunroof opening while the vehicle is inmotion or while the sunroof is closing.

CAUTION

O Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

O Do not place any heavy object on thesunroof or surrounding area.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof only operates when the igni-tion switch is in the ON position.

The automatic sunroof is operational forabout 45 seconds, even if the ignitionswitch is pushed to the OFF position. Ifthe driver’s door or the passenger’s door

SUNROOF (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

is opened during this period of about 45seconds, power to the sunroof is can-celed.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automaticallywhen the sunroof is opened. However, itmust be closed manually.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt up, first close the sunroof, thenpush the UP q1 side of the sunroof switchand release it; it need not be held. To tiltdown the sunroof, push the DOWN q2side.

Sliding the sunroof

To fully open or close the sunroof, pushthe CLOSE q1 or OPEN q2 side of the sun-roof switch for less than 1 second and re-lease it; it need not be held. The roof willautomatically open or close all the way.To stop the roof, push the switch oncemore while it is opening or closing.

To open or close the sunroof and stop onthe way, push the CLOSE q1 or OPEN q2side of the sunroof switch for more than 1second. The roof will stop when releasingthe switch.

Auto reverse function

WARNING

There are some small distances immediatelybefore the closed position which cannot bedetected. Make sure that all passengershave their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-fore closing the sunroof.

If the control unit detects somethingcaught in the sunroof when it is closing,the sunroof will be immediately opened.

The auto reverse function can be acti-

SIC3243


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

vated when the sunroof is closed by auto-matic operation when the ignition switchis in the ON position or for about 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is pushedto the OFF position.

If the sunroof cannot be closed automati-cally when the auto reverse function acti-vates due to a malfunction, push and holdthe CLOSE q1 side of the sunroof switch.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

If the sunroof does not operate

If the sunroof does not operate properly,perform the following procedure to initial-ize the sunroof operation system.

1. If the sunroof is open, close it fully byrepeatedly pushing the CLOSE q1 sideof the sunroof switch.

2. Push and hold the CLOSE q1 side ofthe sunroof switch to tilt the sunroofup.

3. Release the sunroof switch after thesunroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the OPEN q2 side of

the sunroof switch to fully tilt the sun-roof down.

5. Check if the sunroof switch operatesnormally.

If the sunroof does not operate properlyafter performing the procedure above,have your vehicle checked by an INFINITIdealer.

MAP LIGHTS

Push the button as illustrated to turn thelight on or off.

SIC3249

INTERIOR LIGHTS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PERSONAL LIGHTS

Rear

Push the button as illustrated to turn thelight on or off.

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

The interior light control switch has threepositions: ON, DOOR and OFF.

ON position

When the switch is in the ON position q1the map lights and rear personal lightswill illuminate.

DOOR position

When the switch is in the DOOR positionq2 , the map lights and rear personallights will illuminate under the followingconditions:

O ignition switch is in the LOCK position

—remain on for about 15 seconds.

O doors are unlocked by pushing theUNLOCK button on the Intelligent Keyor door handle request switch with theignition switch in the LOCK position


O any door is opened and then closedwith the ignition switch in the LOCKposition


O any door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the ACC or ON position

—remain on while the door is opened.When the door is closed, the lightsgo off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 min-utes when the lights remain illuminated toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

When the auto interior illumination is setto the OFF position (see “Vehicle informa-tion and settings” in the “4. Monitor, cli-mate, audio, phone and voice recognitionsystems” section), the lights will illumi-nate under the following condition:

SIC3250 SIC3251


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O any door is opened with the ignitionswitch in any position

—remain on while the door is opened.When the door is closed, the lightsgo off.

OFF position

When the switch is in the OFF position q3 ,the lights will not illuminate, regardlessof the condition.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time withthe engine stopped. This could result in adischarged battery.

The light on the vanity mirror will turn onwhen the cover on the vanity mirror isopened.

When the cover is closed, the light willturn off.

The lights will also turn off after 30 min-utes when the lights remain illuminated toprevent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid isopened. When the trunk lid is closed, thelight will turn off.

The light will also turn off after 30 minuteswhen the light remains illuminated to pre-vent the battery from becoming dis-charged.

SIC2064

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS TRUNK LIGHT


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

HomeLink Universal Transceiver providesa convenient way to consolidate the func-tions of up to three individual hand-heldtransmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver:

O Will operate most Radio Frequency(RF) devices such as garage doors,gates, home and office lighting, entrydoor locks and security systems.

O Is powered by your vehicle’s battery.No separate batteries are required. Ifthe vehicle’s battery is discharged oris disconnected, HomeLink will retainall programming.

Once HomeLink Universal Transceiver isprogrammed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes.For additional information, refer to “Pro-gramming HomeLink ” later in this sec-tion.

WARNING

O Do not use HomeLink Universal Trans-ceiver with any garage door opener thatlacks safety stop and reverse features asrequired by federal safety standards.(These standards became effective foropener models manufactured after April1, 1982). A garage door opener whichcannot detect an object in the path of aclosing garage door and then automati-cally stop and reverse, does not meetcurrent federal safety standards. Using agarage door opener without these fea-tures increases the risk of serious injuryor death.

O During programming procedure, yourgarage door or security gate may openor close. Make sure that people and ob-jects are clear of the garage door, gate,etc. that you are programming.

O Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink

To program your HomeLink Transceiverto operate a garage door, gate, or entrydoor opener, home or office lighting, youneed to be at the same location as thedevice. Note: Garage door openers (manu-factured after 1996) have “rolling codeprotection”. To program a garage dooropener equipped with “rolling code pro-tection”; you will need to use a ladder toget up to the garage door opener motor tobe able to access the “smart or learn”program button.

HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. To begin, push and hold the 2 outerHomeLink buttons (to clear thememory) until the indicator light qA

blinks (after 20 seconds). Releaseboth buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-heldtransmitter 1-3 inches away from theHomeLink surface.

3. Using both hands, simultaneouslypush and hold both the HomeLinkbutton you want to program and thehand-held transmitter button.DO NOT release the buttons until step4 has been completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indi-cator light on HomeLink flashes,changing from a “slow blink” to a“rapid blink”. This could take up to 90seconds. When the indicator lightblinks rapidly, both buttons may bereleased. The rapidly flashing light in-dicates successful programming. Toactivate the garage door or other pro-

grammed device, push and hold theprogrammed HomeLink button - re-leasing when the device begins to ac-tivate.

5. If the indicator light on HomeLinkblinks rapidly for two seconds andthen turns solid, HomeLink haspicked up a “rolling code” garagedoor opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to trainHomeLink , completing the program-ming may require a ladder and an-other person for convenience.

6. Push and release the program buttonlocated on the garage door opener’smotor to activate the “training mode”.This button is usually located near theantenna wire that hangs down fromthe motor. If the wire originates fromunder a light lens, you will need to re-move the lens to access the trainingbutton.

NOTE:

Once you have pushed and released thetraining button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit,you have 30 seconds in which to performstep 7. For convenience, use the help of a

SIC3182 SIC3183


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

second person to assist when performingthis step.

7. Quickly (within 30 seconds of pushingand releasing the garage door openertraining button) and firmly push andrelease the HomeLink button you’vejust programmed. Push and releasethe HomeLink button up to threetimes to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLink button should now beprogrammed. To program the re-maining HomeLink buttons for addi-tional door or gate openers, followsteps 2 through 8 only.

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLink buttons.

If you have any questions or are havingdifficulty programming your HomeLinkbuttons, please refer to the HomeLinkweb site at: www.homelink.com or call1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERS

Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations requiredhand-held transmitters to stop transmit-ting after 2 seconds. To program yourhand-held transmitter to HomeLink , con-tinue to push and hold the HomeLinkbutton (note steps 2 through 4 under“Programming HomeLink ”) while youpush and re-push (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds until theindicator light flashes rapidly (indicatingsuccessful programming).

NOTE:

If programming a garage door opener, etc.,it is advised to unplug the device duringthe “cycling” process to prevent possibledamage to the garage door opener compo-nents.

OPERATING THE HomeLinkUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

HomeLink Universal Transceiver (onceprogrammed) may now be used to acti-vate the garage door, etc. To operate,simply push the appropriate programmedHomeLink Universal Transceiver button.The red indicator light will illuminate

while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSIS

If HomeLink does not quickly learn thehand-held transmitter information:

O replace the hand-held transmitter bat-teries with new batteries.

O position the hand-held transmitterwith its battery area facing away fromthe HomeLink surface.

O push and hold both the HomeLinkand hand-held transmitter buttonswithout interruption.

O position the hand-held transmitter 2to 5 in (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface. Hold the transmit-ter in that position for up to 15 sec-onds. If HomeLink is not pro-grammed within that time, try holdingthe transmitter in another position -keeping the indicator light in view atall times.

If you continue to have programming diffi-culties, please contact the INFINITI Con-sumer Affairs Department. The phonenumbers are located in the Foreword ofthis Owner’s Manual.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATION

Individual buttons cannot be cleared,however to clear all programming, pushand hold the two outside buttons and re-lease when the indicator light begins toflash (in approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHomeLink BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink UniversalTransceiver button, complete the fol-lowing.

1. Push and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. Do not release the button untilstep 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins toflash slowly (after 20 seconds), posi-tion the hand-held transmitter 2 to 5in (50 to 127 mm) away from theHomeLink surface.

3. Push and hold the hand-held trans-mitter button.

4. The HomeLink indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.When the indicator light begins toflash rapidly, release both buttons.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver but-ton has now been reprogrammed. Thenew device can be activated by pushingthe HomeLink button that was just pro-grammed. This procedure will not affectany other programmed HomeLink but-tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you shouldchange the codes of any non-rolling codedevice that has been programmed intoHomeLink . Consult the Owner’s Manualof each device or call the manufacturer ordealer of those devices for additional in-formation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLink Uni-versal Transceiver with your new transmit-ter information.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

The transmitter has been tested and com-

plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the device.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D.: CB2V67690


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys (Intelligent Key)........................................ 3-2Removing the mechanical key .................... 3-4How to use the mechanical key ................. 3-4Valet hand-off ............................................. 3-4

Doors................................................................ 3-5Locking with metal key................................ 3-5Opening and closing windows with themetal key .................................................... 3-6Locking with inside lock knob..................... 3-6Locking with power door lock switch........... 3-7Child safety rear door lock .......................... 3-7

Intelligent Key system ...................................... 3-8Intelligent Key operating range .................. 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution ................... 3-9Intelligent Key operation............................ 3-10Battery saver system .................................. 3-11Warning signals ......................................... 3-12Troubleshooting guide ............................... 3-13

Remote keyless entry system .......................... 3-14How to use remote keyless entry system ... 3-15

Hood ............................................................... 3-17Trunk lid ......................................................... 3-18

Trunk lid release switch............................. 3-18Trunk open request switch......................... 3-18Trunk release power cancel switch ............ 3-19Interior trunk lid release ............................ 3-19Secondary trunk lid release....................... 3-20

Fuel-filler door ................................................ 3-20Opening the fuel-filler door ....................... 3-20Fuel-filler cap ............................................. 3-21

Tilting telescopic steering column................... 3-22Manual operation ...................................... 3-22Electric operation ...................................... 3-23

Sun visors ...................................................... 3-23Mirrors .......................................................... 3-24

Inside mirror ............................................. 3-24Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-25

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) .... 3-26Entry/exit function (AutomaticTransmission models)................................ 3-26Seat synchronization function .................. 3-27Memory storage ........................................ 3-28System operation ...................................... 3-29

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The Intelligent Key uses coded radio sig-nals to communicate with the vehicle.When the Intelligent Key is near the ve-hicle, such as in your pocket or bag, it al-lows the vehicle to be locked, unlocked,or started. It is also possible to use theremote control entry function.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou.

O Do not leave the vehicle with the Intelli-gent Key inside.

O The Intelligent Key may not functioncorrectly depending on the environ-ment or operating conditions. It couldalso malfunction if you do not use itcorrectly.

O The Intelligent Key transmits faintradio waves.

In the following situations, the Intelli-gent Key and remote control entry func-tions may not operate correctly, andyou may have to use the mechanicalkey or:

— when there are strong signalscoming from a television tower,power station or broadcasting sta-tion.

— when you have wireless equipmentor a cellular phone with you.

— when the Intelligent Key is in con-tact with or covered by a metallicmaterial.

— when radio wave-type remote con-trol entry is used nearby.

— when the Intelligent Key is placednear an electric appliance such as apersonal computer.

O The Intelligent Key continually con-sumes battery power as the key re-ceives a signal to communicate withthe vehicle. Battery life is about 2years, although it varies depending onthe operating conditions.

O If the Intelligent Key receives strongsignal over an extended period of time,the battery could quickly run down. Donot place the Intelligent Key near anelectric appliance such as a televisionset or personal computer.

O When the Intelligent Key battery is al-most discharged, insert the IntelligentKey into the Intelligent Key port andstart the engine. Replace the dis-charged battery with a new one as soonas possible. For more details, see“Push- button ignition switch” in the“5. Starting and driving” section.

O Because the steering wheel is lockedelectrically, unlocking the steeringwheel with the ignition switch in theLOCK position is impossible when thevehicle battery is completely dis-charged. In this case, unlocking thesteering wheel is also impossible if theIntelligent Key is inserted into the In-telligent Key port. Pay special atten-tion that the vehicle battery is not com-pletely discharged.

O If the vehicle battery is completely dis-charged, make sure to recharge thebattery immediately.

KEYS (INTELLIGENT KEY)

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

1. Intelligent Key 2 sets2. Mechanical key (metal key) 2 sets3. Key number plate 1 set

WARNING

O The Intelligent Key transmits radiowaves that can adversely affect medicalelectric equipment.

O If you have a pacemaker, you shouldcontact the medical equipment manufac-turer to ask if it will be affected by the In-telligent Key signal.

Record the key number on the keynumber plate/metal tag and keep it in asafe place (such as your wallet), NOT INTHE VEHICLE. A key number plate is sup-plied with your key. Keep the plate in asafe place. INFINITI does not record keynumbers so it is very important to keeptrack of your key number plate.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional In-telligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.

It is possible that the Intelligent Key func-tions become canceled. Contact anINFINITI dealer.

CAUTION

O Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when driving. The Intelligent Key is aprecision device with a built-in transmit-ter. To avoid damaging it, please notethe following.

— The Intelligent Key is water resistant;however, wetting may damage the In-telligent Key. If the Intelligent Keygets wet, immediately wipe until it iscompletely dry.

— Do not bend, drop or strike it againstanother object.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in a place wheretemperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

— Do not change or modify the Intelli-gent Key.

— Do not use a magnet key holder.

— Do not place the Intelligent Key nearan electric appliance such as a televi-sion set or personal computer.

SPA2315

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

— Do not allow the Intelligent Key tocome into contact with water or saltwater, and do not wash it in awashing machine. This could affectthe system function.

O If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,INFINITI recommends erasing the IDcode of that Intelligent Key. This willprevent the Intelligent Key from unau-thorized use to unlock the vehicle. Forinformation regarding the erasing pro-cedure, please contact an INFINITIdealer.

REMOVING THE MECHANICAL KEY

O Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove the me-chanical key as illustrated.

O Reinsert the mechanical key into theIntelligent Key by pressing it firmlyback into place. Make sure the lockknob has properly latched, and themechanical key cannot move.

HOW TO USE THE MECHANICALKEY

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors, trunk lid, glove box and trunkpass-through lid.

See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” later in thissection, “Storage” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section and “Seats” in the“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

VALET HAND-OFF

When you have to leave a key with avalet, give them the Intelligent Key itselfand keep the mechanical key with you toprotect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunkfrom being opened during valet hand-off,follow the procedures below.

1. Push the trunk release power cancelswitch to the CANCEL side.

2. Remove the mechanical key from theIntelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet,keeping the mechanical key in yourpocket or bag for insertion into the In-telligent Key when you retrieve yourvehicle.

SPA2033


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

See “Trunk lid” later in this section,“Storage” in the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section and “Seats” in the “1.Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

O Always have the doors locked while driv-ing. Along with the use of seat belts, thisprovides greater safety in the event of anaccident by helping to prevent personsfrom being thrown from the vehicle. Thisalso helps keep children and others fromunintentionally opening the doors, andwill help keep out intruders.

O Before opening any door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

O Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in se-rious accidents.

LOCKING WITH METAL KEY

The power door lock system allows you tolock or unlock all doors simultaneouslyusing the mechanical key.

O Turning the driver’s door key cylinderto the front of the vehicle q1 will lockall doors.

O Turning the driver’s door key cylinderonce to the rear of the vehicle q2 willunlock the driver’s door. After re-turning the key to the neutral positionq3 , turning it to the rear again within5 seconds will unlock all doors.

SPA2321

DOORS


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O You can switch the lock system to themode that allows you to open all thedoors when the key is turned once.See “How to use SETTING button” inthe “4. Monitor, climate, audio, phoneand voice recognition systems” sec-tion.

OPENING AND CLOSING WINDOWSWITH THE METAL KEY

The driver’s door key operation also al-lows you to open and close all door win-dows.

To open the windows, turn the driver’sdoor key cylinder to the rear of the ve-hicle for longer than 1 second. The door isunlocked and the window keeps openingwhile turning the key.

This function can also be performed bypushing and holding the door UNLOCKbutton of the Intelligent Key. Refer to “In-telligent remote keyless entry system”later in this section.

To close the windows, turn the driver’sdoor key cylinder to the front of the ve-hicle for longer than 1 second. The door islocked and the window keeps closingwhile turning the key.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door individually, move the in-side lock knob to the lock position q1then close the door.

To unlock, move the inside lock knob tothe unlock position q2 .

When locking the door without an Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelli-gent Key inside the vehicle.

SPA1814


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHOperating the power door lock switch willlock or unlock all the doors. The switchesare located on the driver’s and front pas-senger’s door armrests.

To lock the doors, push the power doorlock switch to the lock position q1 withthe driver’s or front passenger’s dooropen, then close the door.

When locking the door this way, be certainnot to leave the Intelligent Key inside thevehicle.

To unlock the doors including the fuel-filler door, push the power door lockswitch to the unlock position q2 .

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch (driveror front passenger) is moved to the lockposition with the Intelligent Key in theport and any door open, all doors willlock and unlock automatically. With theIntelligent Key left in the vehicle (not inthe Intelligent Key port) and any dooropen, all doors will unlock automaticallyand a chime will sound after the door isclosed.

These functions help to prevent the Intel-ligent Key from being accidentally lockedinside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

The child safety rear door lock helps pre-vent doors from being opened acciden-tally, especially when small children arein the vehicle.

When the levers are in the lock positionq1 , the rear doors can be opened only fromthe outside.

To disengage, move the levers to the un-lock position q2 .

SPA2300 SPA2301


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATINGRANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can be usedonly when you carry the key with you andoperate it as specified within the inside oroutside operating ranges described as fol-lows.

When the Intelligent Key battery runsdown or where there are strong radiowaves or noise, the operating range maybe narrower or the key may be inopera-tive.

Operating range of the door ortrunk lock/unlock function

The outside sensors are located in thefront outside door handles and the trunk.

The operating ranges of the door or trunk

lock/unlock functions are shown in the il-lustration.

Front door:

q1 31.5 in (80 cm) from the door handlerequest switch

Trunk:

q2 31.5 in (80 cm) from the trunk open re-quest switch

O If you are too close to the outsidedoor handles or rear bumper, the In-telligent Key may not operate.

O If the Intelligent Key is in the oper-ating range, it is possible for anyonewho does not carry the Intelligent Keyto lock/unlock the doors by pushingthe door handle request switch.

SPA2341

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Operating range for engine startfunction

The operating range for starting the en-gine inside the vehicle is shown in the il-lustration.

O If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-ment panel, rear parcel shelf, insidethe glove box or door pocket, or thecorner of interior compartment, it maynot be possible to start the engine.

O If the Intelligent Key is near the dooror door glass outside the vehicle, itmay be possible to start the engine.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

O Do not push the door handle requestswitch with the Intelligent Key held inyour hand as illustrated. The close dis-tance to the door handle will causethe Intelligent Key system to have dif-ficulty recognizing that the IntelligentKey is outside the vehicle.

O After locking with the door handle re-quest switch, verify the doors are se-curely locked by testing them.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenlock the doors.

O To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-ing left inside the trunk, make sureyou carry the key with you and thenclose the trunk.

O Do not pull the door handle beforepushing the door handle requestswitch. The door will be unlocked butwill not open. Release the door handleonce and pull it again to open thedoor.

O The Intelligent Key system (opening/closing doors with the door handle re-quest switch) can be set to remain in-active. See “Vehicle information andsettings” in the “4. Monitor, climate,audio, phone and voice recognitionsystems” section.

SSD0603 SPA2326


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors withouttaking the key out from your pocket orbag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key withyou, you can lock or unlock all doors bypushing the door handle request switchqA within the range of operation.

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

When you lock or unlock the doors or thetrunk lid, the hazard indicator will flashand the horn (or the outside chime) willsound as a confirmation. For details, see“Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”later in this section.

1. Move the selector lever to the P posi-tion, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and make sure you carrythe Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor handle request switch while car-rying the Intelligent Key with you.*3

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe outside chime sounds twice.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the ignition switch is in the ACCor ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the IntelligentKey while any door is open.

*3: Doors will not lock by pushing thedoor handle request switch with theIntelligent Key inside the vehicle.However, when an Intelligent Key isinside the vehicle, doors can belocked with another registered Intelli-gent Key.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the driver’s or front passenger’sdoor handle request switch once whilecarrying the Intelligent Key with you.

SPA2316 SPA2303


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

2. The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside chime sounds once. The corre-sponding door and the fuel-filler doorwill unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switchagain within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once andoutside chime sounds once again. Allthe doors will unlock.

Any door should be opened within 1minute after the door is unlocked. Other-wise, all the doors will be locked againautomatically.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the trunk open request switch qA

for more than 1 second.

2. The trunk will unlatch. An outsidechime will sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection:

To prevent the Intelligent Key from beingaccidentally locked in the trunk, lockoutprotection is equipped with the IntelligentKey system.When the trunk lid is closed with the In-telligent Key inside the trunk, the outsidebuzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM

When all the following conditions are metfor 60 minutes, the battery saver systemwill cut off the power supply to preventbattery discharge.

O The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-tion, and

O All doors are closed, and

O The selector lever is in the P (Park) po-sition.

SPA2317

SPA2304


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from movingunexpectedly by erroneous operation ofthe Intelligent Key or to help prevent thevehicle from being stolen, chime or beepsounds inside and outside the vehicleand a warning displays in the dot matrixliquid crystal display.

When a chime or beep sounds or thewarning displays, be sure to check the ve-hicle and Intelligent Key.

See the troubleshooting guide on the nextpage and “Dot matrix liquid crystal dis-play” in the “2. Instruments and controls”section.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDESymptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch tostop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on thedisplay and the inside warning chimesounds continuously.

The selector lever is not in the P posi-tion.

Shift the selector lever to the P posi-tion.

When opening the driver’s door to getout of the vehicle

The inside warning chime sounds con-tinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-tion.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition.

The Intelligent Key is in the IntelligentKey port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from theIntelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting outof the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on thedisplay, the outside chime sounds 3times and the inside warning chimesounds for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition.

The SHIFT P warning appears on thedisplay and the outside chime soundscontinuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFFposition and the selector lever is not inthe P position.

Move the selector lever to the P posi-tion and push the ignition switch to theOFF position.

When closing the door with the insidelock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all the doorsunlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle requestswitch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicleor trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch ispushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switchafter the door is closed.

When closing the trunk lidThe outside chime sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds and the trunk lidopens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

It is possible to lock/unlock all doors,fuel-filler door, activate the panic alarmand open the windows by pushing thebuttons on the Intelligent Key from out-side the vehicle.

Before locking the doors, make sure the In-telligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli-gent Key can operate at a distance of ap-proximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle.(The effective distance depends upon theconditions around the vehicle.)As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be usedwith one vehicle. For information concern-ing the purchase and use of additional In-telligent Keys, contact an INFINITI dealer.

The lock and unlock buttons on the Intel-ligent Key will not operate when:

O the distance between the IntelligentKey and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10m).

O the Intelligent Key battery runs down.

After locking with the remote keylessentry function, pull the door handle tomake sure the doors are securely locked.

The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range variesdepending on the environment. To se-

curely operate the lock and unlock but-tons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1m) from the door.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESSENTRY SYSTEM

Locking doors and fuel-filler door

When you lock or unlock the doors or thetrunk lid, the hazard indicator will flashand the horn (or the outside chime) willsound as a confirmation. For details, see“Setting hazard indicator and horn mode”later in this section.

1. Move the selector lever to the P posi-tion, push the ignition switch to theOFF position and make sure you carrythe Intelligent Key with you.*1

2. Close all the doors.*2

3. Push the LOCK button q1 on theIntelligent Key.

4. All the doors and fuel-filler door willlock.

5. The hazard indicator flashes twice andthe horn chirps once.

*1: Doors will lock with the Intelligent Keywhile the ignition switch is in the ACCor ON position.

*2: Doors will not lock with the IntelligentKey while any door is open.

Unlocking doors and fuel-fillerdoor

1. Push the UNLOCK button q2 onthe Intelligent Key once.

2. The hazard indicator flashes once. Thedriver’s door and fuel-filler door willunlock.

3. Push the UNLOCK button on theIntelligent Key again within 5 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes onceagain. All the doors will unlock.

Any door should be opened within 1minute after the door is unlocked. Other-

wise all the doors will be locked again au-tomatically.

Opening windows

To open the windows, push the door UN-LOCK button on the Intelligent Keyfor about 3 seconds after the door is un-locked.

To stop opening, release the UNLOCKbutton.

Window cannot be closed using the Intel-ligent Key.

The door windows can be opened orclosed by turning the metal key in a doorlock. See “Doors” earlier in this section.

Opening trunk lid

1. Push the TRUNK button q3 onthe Intelligent Key for more than 1second.

2. The trunk will unlatch.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Using panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feelthreatened, you may activate the alarm tocall attention as follows:

SPA2010


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Push the PANIC button q4 on theIntelligent Key for more than 1 second.

2. The theft warning alarm and head-lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when:

O It has run for 25 seconds, or

O Any of the buttons on the IntelligentKey are pushed. (Note: Panic buttonshould be pushed for more than 1second.)

Setting hazard indicator and hornmodeThis vehicle is set in hazard indicator andhorn mode when you first receive the ve-hicle.

In hazard indicator and horn mode, whenthe LOCK button q1 is pushed, thehazard indicator flashes twice and thehorn chirps once. When the UNLOCK

button q2 is pushed, the hazard in-dicator flashes once.

If horns are not necessary, the systemcan be switched to the hazard indicatormode.

In hazard indicator mode, when the LOCKbutton is pushed, the hazard indica-

tor flashes twice. When the UNLOCKbutton is pushed, neither the hazard

indicator nor the horn operates.

Hazard indicator and horn mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system(Using door handle request switch

or trunk open request switch)

HAZARD - twiceOUTSIDE CHIME -twice

HAZARD - onceOUTSIDE CHIME -once

HAZARD - noneOUTSIDE CHIME - 4times

Remote keyless entry system(Using , or button)

HAZARD - twiceHORN - once

HAZARD - onceHORN - none

HAZARD - noneHORN - none

Hazard indicator mode:

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system(Using door handle request switch

or trunk open request switch)HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry system(Using , or button)

HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none


w 06.9.20/V36-D X

Switching procedure:

Push the LOCK q1 and UNLOCKq2 buttons on the Intelligent Key si-

multaneously for more than 2 seconds toswitch the mode from one to the other.

When pushing the buttons to set the haz-ard indicator mode, the hazard indicatorflashes 3 times.

When pushing the buttons to set the haz-ard indicator and horn mode, the hazardindicator flashes once and the horn chirpsonce.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle q1located below the instrument panel;the hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever q2 up at the front of thehood with your fingertips and raisethe hood.

3. When closing the hood, slowly closethe hood down to latch both the rightand left locks. Push the hood down tolock the hood securely into place.

WARNING

O Make sure the hood is completely closedand latched before driving. Failure to doso could cause the hood to fly open andresult in an accident.

O If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

SPA2318

HOOD


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle. See “Exhaustgas” in the “5. Starting and driving” sec-tion of this manual.

O Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with thetrunk closed, when not in use, and pre-vent children’s access to IntelligentKeys.

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH

The trunk lid release switch qA is locatedon the instrument panel.

To open the trunk lid, push the releaseswitch down as illustrated. To close, pushthe trunk lid down.

You can open the trunk lid with IntelligentKey. Refer to “Intelligent Key system” or“Intelligent remote control system” earlierin this section.

TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushingthe trunk open request switch when theIntelligent Key is within the operatingrange of the trunk lock/unlock functionregardless of the inside lock knob posi-tion. See “Intelligent Key system” earlierin this section.

SPA2307 SPA2304

TRUNK LID


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCELSWITCH

When the switch located inside the glovebox is in the OFF position qA , the powerto the trunk lid will be canceled and thetrunk lid cannot be opened by the trunklid release switch, the trunk open requestswitch with the Intelligent Key carriedwith you or the TRUNK button on the Intel-ligent Key.

When you have to leave the vehicle with avalet and want to keep your belongingssafe in the glove box and the trunk, pushthis switch to OFF and lock the glove box

with the mechanical key. Then leave thevehicle and the Intelligent Key with thevalet and keep the mechanical key withyou.

See “Keys (Intelligent Key)” earlier in thissection.

To connect the power to the trunk lid,push the switch to the ON qB position.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk where theycould be seriously injured. Keep the carlocked, with the trunk lid securely latched,when not in use, and prevent children’s ac-cess to Intelligent Keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

SPA2308 SPA2327


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

provides a means of escape for childrenand adults in the event they becomelocked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk lid from the inside, pullthe release handle q1 until the lock re-leases and push up on the trunk lid. Therelease lever is made of a material thatglows in the dark after a brief exposure toambient light.

The handle is located on the back of thetrunk lid as illustrated.

You can also access the handle throughthe trunk pass-through (rear seat arm-rest).

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards front of ve-hicle until the lock releases.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE

The secondary trunk lid release mecha-nism allows opening of the trunk lid inthe event of the loss of electrical powersuch as a discharged battery.

The handle q1 is located on the back sideof the trunk lid inside the trunk compart-ment.

Access the handle through the trunkpass-through (rear seat armrest).

To open the trunk lid from the rear seat,pull the release handle towards front of ve-hicle until the lock releases.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

To open the fuel-filler door, unlock thefuel-filler door by using one of the follow-ing operations, then push the right sideof the door.

O Push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key carried withyou.

O Push the UNLOCK button on the Intel-ligent Key.

O Insert the mechanical key into thedoor lock cylinder and turn it to therear of the vehicle.

SPA2327 SPA2340

FUEL-FILLER DOOR


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O Push the power door lock switch tothe UNLOCK position.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securelyand lock all doors by operating the doorhandle request switch, the LOCK buttonon the Intelligent Key or the mechanicalkey.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

O Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled. Al-ways stop engine and do not smoke orallow open flames or sparks near the ve-hicle when refueling.

O Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

O Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank af-ter the fuel pump nozzle shuts off auto-

matically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

O Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

O Do not fill a portable fuel container in thevehicle or trailer. Static electricity cancause an explosion of flammable liquid,vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. Toreduce the risk of serious injury or deathwhen filling portable fuel containers:

— Always place the container on theground when filling.

— Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

— Keep the pump nozzle in contact withthe container while you are filling it.

— Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

O If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

O Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap prop-erly may cause the malfunction in-dicator light (MIL) to illuminate. If the

light illuminates because the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten orinstall the cap and continue to drive thevehicle. The light should turn offafter a few driving trips. If the lightdoes not turn off after a few driving trips,have the vehicle inspected by an INFINITIdealer.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.Turn the cap counterclockwise to remove.To tighten, turn the cap clockwise untilratcheting clicks are heard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holderqA while refueling.

WARNING

O Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

O Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary forproper steering operation and comfort.The driver’s air bag inflates with greatforce. If you are unrestrained, leaningforward, sitting sideways or out of posi-tion in any way, you are at greater risk ofinjury or death in a crash. You may alsoreceive serious or fatal injuries from theair bag if you are up against it when it in-flates. Always sit back against the seat-back and as far away as practical fromthe steering wheel. Always use the seatbelts.

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever q1 down and adjust thesteering wheel up, down, forward or rear-ward to the desired position.

Push the lock lever up securely to lockthe steering wheel in place.

SPA2338 SPA2328

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERING COLUMN


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ELECTRIC OPERATION

Tilt or telescopic operation

Move the lever to adjust the steeringwheel up or down, forward or rearward tothe desired position.

Entry/Exit function operation (if soequipped):

The automatic drive positioner system willmake the steering wheel move upautomatically when the driver’s door isopened with the ignition switch in theLOCK position. This lets the driver get intoand out of the seat more easily.

For more information, see “Automaticdrive positioner” later in this section.

SPA2312

SPA2176

SUN VISORS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CAUTION

O Do not store the main sun visor beforestoring the extension sun visor.

O Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward.

1. To block out glare from the front,swing down the main sun visor q1 .

2. To block glare from the side, removethe main sun visor from the centermount and swing it to the side q2 .

3. Draw out the extension sun visor q3from the main sun visor to block fromfurther glare.

INSIDE MIRROR

Adjust the height and the angle of the in-side mirror to the desired position.

Manual anti-glare type

The night position q1 will reduce glarefrom the headlights of vehicles behindyou at night.

Use the day position q2 when driving indaylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when necessary,because it reduces rear view clarity.

SPA1792 SPA2143

MIRRORS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Automatic anti-glare type

The inside mirror is designed so that itautomatically changes reflection ac-cording to the intensity of the headlightsof the following vehicle.

The anti-glare system will be automati-cally turned on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON position.

When the system is turned on, the indica-tor light qB will illuminate and excessiveglare from the headlights of the vehiclebehind you will be reduced.

Push the switch qA to make the in-

side rearview mirror operate normally andthe indicator light will turn off. Push the

switch again to turn the system on.

Do not allow any object to cover the sensorqC or apply glass cleaner on it. Doing sowill reduce the sensitivity of the sensor,resulting in improper operation.

For HomeLink Universal Transceiver (if soequipped), see “HomeLink UniversalTransceiver” in the “2. Instruments andcontrols” section.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

Objects viewed in the outside mirror on thepassenger side are closer than they appear.Be careful when moving to the right. Usingonly this mirror could cause an accident. Usethe inside mirror or glance over yourshoulder to properly judge distances toother objects.

SPA2253 SPA2319


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Adjusting outside mirrors

The outside mirror control switch is lo-cated on the armrest.

The outside mirror will operate only whenthe ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-sition.

Turn the switch right or left to select theright or left side mirror q1 , then adjustusing the control switch q2 .

Defrosting outside mirrors (if soequipped)

The outside mirrors will be heated whenthe rear window defroster switch is oper-ated.

Foldable outside mirrors

Fold the outside mirror by pushing it to-ward the rear of the vehicle.

The automatic drive positioner systemhas three features:

O Entry/exit function (Automatic Trans-mission models)

O Seat synchonization function

O Memory storage

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION (AutomaticTransmission models)

This system is designed so that the driv-er’s seat and steering column will auto-matically move when the automatic trans-mission selector lever is in the P (Park)position. This allows the driver to get intoand out of the driver’s seat more easily.Note that the function is set to disabledas the factory default setting.

The driver’s seat will slide backward andthe steering wheel will move up when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionswitch in the LOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel willreturn to the previous positions when oneof the following is operated:

O When the ignition switch is pushed tothe ACC position after the driver’sdoor is closed.

SPA1829

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if soequipped)


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

O When the ignition switch is pushed tothe ON position.

The driver’s seat will not return to the pre-vious positions if the seat or steering ad-justing switch is operated when the seatis at the exit position.

Cancel or activate entry/exitfunction

The selector lever must be in the P (Park)position with the ignition switch in theOFF position.

The entry/exit function can be activatedor canceled by pressing and holding theSET switch for more than 10 seconds.

Activating or canceling the entry/exitfunction using the SET switch also acti-vates or cancels the seat synchronizationfunction.

The indicator lights on the memoryswitches (1 and 2) will blink once whenthe function is canceled, and the indicatorlights will blink twice when the function isactivated. Note that the indicator lightsmay illuminate after 5 seconds whileholding the SET switch. This indicatesreadiness for linking the Intelligent Key toa stored memory position. Keep the SET

switch pressed for more than 10 secondsto turn on or off the entry/exit function.

The entry/exit function can also be acti-vated or canceled if the 0Lift SteeringWheel on Exit0 key or 0Slide Driver SeatBack on Exit0 key is turned to ON or OFFin the 0Comfort & Conv.0 settings. See“Vehicle information and settings” in the“4. Monitor, climate, audio, phone andvoice recognition systems” section.

Initialize entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse opens, the entry/exit functionwill not work though this function was seton before. In such a case, after con-necting the battery or replacing with anew fuse, open and close the driver’sdoor more than two times after the igni-tion switch is turned from the ON positionto the LOCK position. The entry/exit func-tion will be activated.

SEAT SYNCHRONIZATION FUNCTION

The seat synchronization function automati-cally adjusts the positions of the steeringwheel and outside mirrors when the seat isadjusted using the power seat switches.

However, the steering wheel and outsidemirrors will not move if the seat is ad-justed over the maximum thresholds. Thesystem considers that the steering wheeland outside mirror adjustments are notnecessary because the seat may not beadjusted for the driving position. Notethat the function is set to disabled as thefactory default setting.

SPA2322


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

The seat synchronization function oper-ates under the following conditions:

O The ignition switch is in the ON posi-tion.

O The selector lever is in the P (Park) po-sition (Automatic Transmissionmodels) or the parking brake is ap-plied (Manual Transmission models).

If the outside mirrors or the steeringwheel reaches its maximum adjustment,the function is automatically disabled. Re-start the function by selecting a previ-ously stored seat memory position usingthe memory switches (1 or 2). An Intelli-gent Key that was previously linked to thestored seat memory can also be used torestart the function.

If a seat position was not previouslystored in the seat memory, restart thefunction by adjusting the steering wheeland outside mirrors manually for yourbest driving position and then drive thevehicle above 4 MPH (7 km/h).

Cancel or activate seatsynchronization function

For Automatic Transmission models:

The selector lever must be in the P (park)position with the ignition switch in theOFF position.

For Manual Transmission models:

The parking brake must be applied withthe ignition switch in the OFF position.

The seat synchronization function can beactivated or canceled by pressing andholding the SET switch for more than 10seconds while the ignition switch is in theOFF position.

Activating or canceling the seat synchro-nization function using the SET switchalso activates or cancels the entry/exitfunction.

The indicator lights on the memoryswitches (1 and 2) will blink once when thefunction is canceled, and the indicatorlights will blink twice when the function isactivated. Note that the indicator lights mayilluminate after 5 seconds while holding theSET switch. This indicates readiness forlinking the Intelligent Key to a storedmemory position. Keep the SET switch

pressed for more than 10 seconds to turnon or off the seat synchronization function.

For Automatic Transmission models, theseat synchronization function can also beactivated if both the 0Lift Steering Wheelon Exit0 key and 0Slide Driver Seat Backon Exit0 key are turned to ON or canceledif either the “Lift Steering Wheel on Exit”key or “Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit” keyor both are turned to OFF in the “Comfort& Conv.” settings. See “VEHICLE INFOR-MATION AND SETTINGS” in the “4.Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems.

MEMORY STORAGE

Two positions for the driver’s seat,steering column and outside mirrors canbe stored in the automatic drive posi-tioner memory. Follow these proceduresto use the memory system.

1. Automatic transmission models:

Move the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

Manual transmission models:

Move the shift lever to the 1st or R (Re-verse) position and the parking brakeis applied.


w 07.2.6/V36-D X


3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steeringcolumn and outside mirrors to the de-sired positions by manually operatingeach adjusting switch. For additionalinformation, see “Seats” in the“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” sec-tion and “Tilting telescopic steeringcolumn” and “Outside mirrors” earlierin this section.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 sec-onds, push the memory switch (1 or 2)fully for at least 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushedmemory switch will stay on for ap-proximately 5 seconds after pushingthe switch.

If memory is stored in the samememory switch, the previous memorywill be deleted.

For manual transmission models, thememory positions can be stored evenwhen the engine is running. In this case,move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) po-sition and apply the parking brake. Then,repeat steps 2 through 4.

Linking Intelligent Key to a storedmemory position

The Intelligent Key can be linked to astored memory position with the followingprocedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memoryposition.

2. While the indicator light for thememory switch being set is illumi-nated for 5 seconds, push the

button on the Intelligent Key. Ifthe indicator light blinks, the Intelli-gent Key is linked to that memory set-ting.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF posi-tion and press the button on the In-telligent Key. The driver’s seat, steeringwheel and outside mirrors will move tothe memorized position.

Confirming memory storage

O Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition and push the SET switch. If themain memory has not been stored, theindicator light will come on for ap-proximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored in position, the in-

dicator light will stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds.

O If the battery cable is disconnected, orif the fuse opens, the memory will becanceled. In this case, reset the de-sired position using the previous pro-cedure.

O If optional Intelligent Keys are addedto your vehicle, the memory storageprocedure to switch 1 or 2 and linkingIntelligent Key procedure to a storedmemory position should be performedagain for each Intelligent Key. For ad-ditional Intelligent Key information,see “Key (Intelligent Key)” earlier inthis section.

Selecting the memorized position




Move the shift lever to the 1st or R (Re-verse) position and apply the parkingbrake.

2. Use one of the following methods tomove the driver’s seat, the outsidemirrors and the steering wheel.


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

O Turn the ignition switch to the ONposition and push the memoryswitch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1second.

O Within 45 seconds of opening thedriver’s door, push the memoryswitch (1 or 2) fully for at least 1second.

The driver’s seat, steering column andoutside mirrors will move to thememorized position with the indicatorlight flashing, and then the light willstay on for approximately 5 seconds.

For manual transmission models, thememory positions can be selected evenwhen the engine is running. In this case,move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) po-sition and apply the parking brake. Then,perform step 2.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system willnot work or will stop operating under thefollowing conditions:

O When the vehicle speed is above 4MPH (7 km/h).

O When the adjusting switch for the driv-er’s seat and steering column isturned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

O When the memory switch 1 or 2 is notpushed for at least 1 second.

O When the seat, steering column andoutside mirrors have already beenmoved to the memorized position.

O When no position is stored in thememory switch.

O When the parking brake is released. —MT models

O When the speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h) while the parking brake is ap-plied. — MT modelsTo restart the drive positioner system,move the parking brake to off and on.

O When the engine is started while mov-ing the automatic drive positioner.

O When the AT selector lever is movedfrom the P (Park) position to any otherposition. (However, it will not be can-celed if the switch is pushed while theseat and steering column are returningto the previous positions (entry/exitfunction).)

O When the driver’s door remains openfor more than 45 seconds and the igni-tion switch is not in the ON position.

O The seat synchronization function isautomatically disabled if the outsidemirrors or steering wheel reaches itsmaximum adjustment.

O The seat synchronization function willnot move if the seat is adjusted overone of the following maximum thresh-olds:

— Seat sliding: 3.0 inch (76 mm)

— Seatback reclining: 9.1 degrees

— Seat lifer (rear side): 0.8 inch (20mm)


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

MEMO


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voicerecognition systems

Safety note....................................................... 4-2Center multi-function control panel................... 4-3

How to use INFINITI controller ..................... 4-4How to use touch screen (models withnavigation system) ..................................... 4-5Start-up screen (models with navigationsystem) ....................................................... 4-7Start menu .................................................. 4-7How to select menus on the screen ............ 4-8

Vehicle information and settings ...................... 4-9How to use “STATUS” button ...................... 4-9How to use “BRIGHTNESS CONTROL ANDDISPLAY ON/OFF” button............................. 4-9How to use “INFO” button........................... 4-9How to use “SETTING” button .................... 4-13How to use “AUX” button.......................... 4-20

Rearview monitor (if so equipped)................... 4-21How to read the displayed lines................ 4-22How to park with predicted course lines ... 4-22How to adjust the screen .......................... 4-24Operating tips ........................................... 4-24

Ventilators ...................................................... 4-25Automatic climate control ............................... 4-25

Automatic climate control (TYPE A) ............ 4-27

Automatic climate control (TYPE B) ............ 4-29In-cabin microfilter..................................... 4-31Servicing climate control............................ 4-31

Audio system.................................................. 4-32Audio operation precautions ..................... 4-32FM-AM-SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer..................................................... 4-40CompactFlash (CF) player operation(models with navigation system) .............. 4-44“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive audiosystem (models with navigation system)... 4-46CD/CF (CompactFlash) care and cleaning... 4-54Steering-wheel-mounted controls foraudio......................................................... 4-56Antenna..................................................... 4-57Auxiliary input jacks ................................. 4-57

Car phone or CB radio .................................... 4-58Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System (if soequipped) ....................................................... 4-58

Models with navigation system.................. 4-61Models without navigation system ............ 4-68Speaker adaptation (SA) mode .................. 4-77Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-80

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

INFINITI Voice Recognition System (modelswith navigation system) ................................. 4-81

Command list ............................................ 4-81

Using the system ...................................... 4-89Voice command learning function ............. 4-92Troubleshooting guide .............................. 4-96

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Do not disassemble or modify thissystem. If you do, it may result in acci-dents, fire, or electric shock.

O Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

O In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming from it,stop using the system immediately andcontact your nearest INFINITI dealer. Ig-noring such conditions may lead to acci-dents, fire, or electric shock.

O Park the vehicle in a safe location andapply the parking brake to view the im-ages on the front center display screenusing devices connected to the auxiliaryinput jacks.

Do not attempt to operate the system inextreme temperature conditions [below

−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]. Op-erating this system under these conditionsmay result in system malfunctions.

SAFETY NOTE

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)

2, 6, 7, 10, 11. For navigation system con-trol buttons (Refer to theseparate NavigationSystem Owner’s Manual.)

3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)

4. “PHONE” Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System button (P.4-58)

5. “ OFF” brightness control and dis-play ON/OFF button (P.4-9)

8. “AMzFMzSAT” band selector button(P.4-32)

9. “DISCzAUX” selector button(P.4-20, P.4-32)

12. “INFO” vehicle and navigation infor-mation button (P.4-9)

13. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)

SAA1523With navigation system

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. “AUX” button (P.4-20)

2. “RADIO AMzFM” band selector button(P.4-32)

3. INFINITI controller (P.4-4)

4. “ OFF” brightness control and dis-play ON/OFF button (P.4-9)

5. “INFO” vehicle information button(P.4-9)

6. “DISC” selector button (P.4-32)

7. “STATUS” status display button (P.4-9)

8. “SETTING” button (P.4-13)

When you use this system, make sure theengine is running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

HOW TO USE INFINITI CONTROLLER

Choose an item on the display using themain directional buttons q2 (or additionaldirectional buttons q6 with navigationsystem) or center dial q3 , and push theENTER button q1 for operation.

If you push the BACK button q4 beforethe setup is completed, the setup will becanceled and/or the display will return tothe previous screen. This button can alsobe used to delete characters that havebeen input.

After the setup is completed, push the

SAA1524Without navigation system



w 06.7.27/V36-D X

BACK button q4 and return to the pre-vious screen.

For the VOICE button q5 functions, referto the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual.

HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN(models with navigation system)

CAUTION

O The glass screen on the liquid crystaldisplay may break if it is hit with a hard

or sharp object. If the glass breaks, donot touch the liquid crystalline material,which contains a small amount of mer-cury. In case of contact with skin, washimmediately with soap and water.

O To clean the display, never use a roughcloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or anykind of solvent or paper towel with achemical cleaning agent. They willscratch or deteriorate the panel.

O Do not splash any liquid such as wateror car fragrance on the display. Contactwith liquid will cause the system to mal-function.

To ensure safe driving, some functionscannot be operated while driving.

The on-screen functions that are not avail-able while driving will be “grayed out” ormuted.

Park the vehicle in a safe location andthen operate the navigation system.

Touch screen operation

With this system, the same operations asthose for the INFINITI controller are pos-sible using the touch screen operation.

Selecting the item:

Touch an item to select. When you selectthe “Audio” settings, touch the “Audio”area q1 on the screen.

Touch the BACK q2 button to return theprevious screen.


SAA1542


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Adjusting the item:

Touch the + q1 or − q2 button to adjustthe settings.

Touch the UP q3 or DOWN q4 button tomove to the previous or next page.

Inputting characters:

Touch the letter or number q1 .

There are some options available when in-putting characters.

O Uppercase:

Shows uppercase characters.

O Lowercase:

Shows lowercase characters.

O Space:

Inserts a space.

O Symbols:

Shows symbols such as the questionmark (?).

O Delete:

Deletes the last character that hasbeen input with one touch. Push andhold the button to delete all of thecharacters.

O OK:

Completes character inputs.

Touch screen maintenance

If you clean the display screen, use a dry,soft cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-sary, use a small amount of neutral deter-gent with a soft cloth. Never spray thescreen with water or detergent. Dampenthe cloth first, and then wipe the screen.

SAA1543 SAA1617


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

START-UP SCREEN (models withnavigation system)

When you push the ignition switch to theACC or ON position, the SYSTEMSTART-UP warning is displayed on thescreen. When you read and agree with thewarning, push the ENTER button.

If you do not push the ENTER button, youwill not be able to use the NAVI system.

To proceed to the NAVI system, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

START MENU

The start menu can be displayed usingthe ENTER switch on the steering-wheel-mounted controls.

1. While the map (if equipped) or statusscreen is displayed, push and hold theENTER switch until the “Menu Op-tions” screen appears.

2. Highlight the preferred item tilting theENTER switch up or down, and thenpush the ENTER switch.

Available items

Destination/Route:

These items are for the navigationsystem. If your vehicle is equipped withthe navigation system, see the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual fordetails.

Information:

Displays the information screen. It is thesame screen that appears when you pushthe INFO button.

SAA1454 SAA1525 SAA1591


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Settings:

Displays the settings screen. It is thesame screen that appears when you pushthe SETTING button.

HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THESCREEN

Vehicle functions are viewed on the dis-play screen in menus. Whenever a menuselection is made or menu item is high-lighted, different areas on the screen pro-vide you with important information. Seethe following for details.

1. Header:

Shows the path used to get to the cur-rent screen. (i.e. push SETTING button> choose “Comfort & Conv.” menuitem.)

2. Menu Selections:

Shows the options to choose withinthat menu screen. (i.e. Auto Interior Il-lumination, etc.)

3. UP/DOWN Movement indicator:

Shows that the INFINITI controller maybe used to move UP/DOWN on thescreen and select more options.

4. Screen Count:

Shows the number of menu selectionsavailable for that screen (i.e. 1/9).

5. Footer/Information Line:

Provides more information (if avail-able) about the menu selection cur-rently highlighted. (i.e. Cabinlighting when unlocking doors.)

SAA1510


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

HOW TO USE “STATUS” BUTTON

To display the status of the audio, climatecontrol system, fuel consumption andnavigation system (if so equipped), pushthe STATUS button. The following infor-mation will appear when the STATUS but-ton is pushed.

Audio → Audio and Climate controlsystem → Audio and fuel consumption →Audio and Navigation system (if soequipped) → Audio

HOW TO USE “BRIGHTNESSCONTROL AND DISPLAY ON/OFF”BUTTON

Push the “ OFF” button to switch thedisplay brightness to the daytime modeor the nighttime mode, and to adjust thedisplay brightness using the INFINITI con-troller while the indicator is displayed atthe bottom of the screen.

The display brightness can also be ad-justed using the brightness UP button (+)or brightness DOWN button (−) (modelswith navigation system).

Push the “ OFF” button for more than2 seconds to turn the display off. Pushthe button again to turn the display on.

HOW TO USE “INFO” BUTTON

The display screen shows vehicle andnavigation (if so equipped) information foryour convenience.

The information shown on the screenshould be a guide to determine the condi-tion of the vehicle. See the following fordetails.

Vehicle information display

1. Push the INFO button on the controlpanel.The screens as illustrated will appear.

2. Choose an item using the INFINITI con-troller and push the ENTER button.

3. After viewing or adjusting the informa-tion on the following screens, pushthe BACK button to return to the IN-FORMATION menu.

For the items “Traffic Info.”, “Where amI?”, “GPS Satellite Info.” and “NavigationVersion”, refer to the separate Naviga-


VEHICLE INFORMATION AND SETTINGS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

tion System Owner’s Manual. “Fuel Economy” information

The distance to empty, average fueleconomy and current fuel economy(shown on the right side bar) will be dis-played for reference.

To reset the Average Fuel Economy, usethe INFINITI controller to highlight the“Reset” key and push the ENTER button.

If the “View” key is highlighted with theINFINITI controller and the ENTER buttonis pushed, the average fuel consumptionhistory will be displayed in graph formalong with the average for the previous

Reset-to-Reset period.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

The fuel economy information may differfrom the information displayed on the dotmatrix liquid crystal display. This is dueto the timing difference in updating theinformation and does not indicate a mal-function.


SAA1546 SAA1547


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Maintenance” information

To set the maintenance interval for Re-minders 1 to 4, choose an item using theINFINITI controller and push the ENTERbutton.

You can also set to display a message toremind you that the maintenance needsto be performed.

The following example shows how to setReminder 1. Use the same steps to set theother maintenance information.

1. Reset the driving distance to the newmaintenance schedule.

2. Set the interval (mileage) of the main-tenance schedule. To determine therecommended maintenance interval,refer to your “INFINITI Service andMaintenance Guide”.

3. To display the reminder automaticallywhen the set trip distance is reached,highlight the “Interval Reminder” keywith the INFINITI controller and pushthe ENTER button.

4. To return the display to MAINTENANCE

INFO., push the BACK button.

Maintenance information display cannotbe operated when the vehicle is moving.Stop the vehicle in a safe place to see theinformation.

The unit can be converted between “US”and “Metric”. See “How to use SETTINGbutton” later in this section.

SAA1554 SAA1555


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The Reminder will be automatically dis-played as shown when both of the follow-ing conditions are met:

O the vehicle is driven the set distanceand the ignition switch is pushed tothe LOCK position.

O the ignition switch is pushed to theACC or ON position the next time youdrive the vehicle after the set valuehas been reached.

To return to the previous display after the“MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen is dis-played, push the BACK button.

The “MAINTENANCE NOTICE” screen isdisplayed each time the ignition switch ispushed to the ON position until one of thefollowing conditions is met:

O “Reset Distance” is selected.

O “Interval Reminder” is set to OFF.

O the maintenance interval is set again.

“Voice Recognition” information(models with navigation system)

If you use the voice recognition systemfor the first time or you do not know howto operate it, you can display the voicecommand list or user guide for confirma-tion. See “INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM” later in this section for the de-tails.

Command List:

Displays a list of voice commands thatthe system can recognize.

SAA1611 SAA1592


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

User Guide:

Displays a simplified operation manual ofthe voice recognition system and how touse the voice commands.

HOW TO USE “SETTING” BUTTON

The display as illustrated will appearwhen the SETTING button is pushed.

For navigation settings, refer to the sepa-rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

To show the “Comfort & Conv.” item,push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.




w 06.9.29/V36-D X

“Audio” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Audio” key with the INFINITI controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

Bass/Treble/Balance/Fade:

To adjust the speaker tone quality andsound balance, select the “Bass”,“Treble”, “Balance” or “Fade” key and ad-just it with the INFINITI controller.

These items can also be adjusted bypushing and turning the AUDIO knob.

Precision Phased Audio (if so equipped):

When this item is turned to ON, superhigh pitch sound and super low pitchsound are emphasized and midrangesound is played naturally.

Speed Sensitive Vol.:

Sound volume is increased according tothe vehicle speed. Choose the effect levelfrom OFF (0) to 5.

“Display” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting“Display” key with the INFINITI controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

Display:

To turn off the screen, push the ENTERbutton and turn the “Display” indicatoroff. The other method is to push the“ OFF” button for more than 2 sec-onds.

When any mode button is pushed withthe screen off, the screen turns on for fur-

SAA1557 SAA1559 SAA1560With navigation system


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ther operation. The screen will turn off au-tomatically 5 seconds after the operationis finished.

To turn on the screen, set this item to theON position, or push the “ OFF”button.

Brightness/Contrast/Background Color:

To adjust the brightness and contrast ofthe screen, select the “Brightness” or“Contrast” key and push the ENTERbutton.

Then, you can adjust the brightness to“Darker” or “Brighter”, and the contrastto “Lower” or “Higher” using the multi-function controller.

For information on the “BackgroundColor” key, refer to the separate Naviga-tion System Owner’s Manual.

“Navigation” settings (if soequipped)

For the details of “Navigation” settings,refer to the separate Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual.

“Volume and Beeps” settings(models with navigation system)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Volume and Beeps” key with the INFINITIcontroller and pushing the ENTER button.

Guidance Vol.:

To adjust the guidance voice volumelouder or softer, select the “Guidance Vol-ume” and adjust it with the INFINITI con-troller.

You can also adjust the guidance voicevolume by turning the VOLUME control

knob while voice guidance is being an-nounced.

Guidance Voice:

When this item is turned to ON, you willhear voice guidance in the navigation (ifso equipped) operation or in other opera-tions.

Ringer Vol./Incoming Call/Outgoing Call:

For the details of these items, refer to“Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System”later in this section.

SAA1561 SAA1562


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you willhear a beep sound when you use abutton.

“Beeps” settings (models withoutnavigation system)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Beeps” key with the INFINITI controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

Button Beeps:

When this item is turned to ON, you willhear a beep sound when you use abutton.

“Phone” settings (if so equipped)

For the details of “Phone” settings, referto “Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem” later in this section.

SAA1612


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Clock” settings (if so equipped)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Clock” key with the INFINITI controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

On-screen Clock:

When this item is turned to ON, a clock isalways displayed in the upper right cornerof the screen.

This clock will indicate the time almostexactly because it is always adjusted bythe GPS system.

Clock Format:

Choose either the 12-hour clock display orthe 24-hour clock display.

Offset Adjust:

Adjust the time by increasing or de-creasing per minute.

Daylight Saving Time:

Turn this item to ON for daylight savingtime application.

Time Zone:

Choose the time zone from the following

O Pacific

O Mountain

O Central

O Eastern

O Atlantic

O Newfoundland

O Hawaii

O Aleutian

O Alaska

“Comfort & Conv.” settings

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Comfort & Conv.” key with the INFINITIcontroller and pushing the ENTER button.This key does not appear on the displayuntil the ignition switch is pushed to theON position.

Auto Interior Illumination:

When this item is turned to ON, the

SAA1563 SAA1564


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

interior lights will illuminate if any door isunlocked.

Auto Headlights Sensitivity:

Adjust the sensitivity of the automaticheadlights higher (right) or lower (left).

Auto Headlights Off Delay:

Choose the duration of the automaticheadlight off timer from 0, 30, 45, 60, 90,120, 150 and 180 second periods.

Speed Sensing Wiper Interval:

When this item is turned to ON, the wiperinterval is adjusted automatically ac-

cording to the vehicle speed.

Selective Door Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, only thedriver’s door is unlocked first after thedoor unlock operation. When the doorhandle request switch on the driver’s orfront passenger’s side door is pushed tobe unlocked, only the corresponding dooris unlocked first. All the doors can be un-locked if the door unlock operation is per-formed again within 5 seconds.

When this item is turned to OFF, all thedoors will be unlocked after the door un-lock operation is performed once.

Intelligent Key Lock/Unlock:

When this item is turned to ON, doorlock/unlock function by pushing the doorhandle request switch will be activated.

Lift Steering Wheel on Exit:

When this item is turned to ON, the steer-ing wheel moves upward for easy exit ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF positionand the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and pushing the igni-tion switch to the ACC position, the steer-ing wheel moves to the previous position.

Slide Driver Seat Back on Exit:

When this item is turned to ON, the driv-er’s seat moves backward for easy exit ifthe ignition switch is in the OFF positionand the driver’s door is opened. After get-ting into the vehicle and pushing the igni-tion switch to the ACC position, the driv-er’s seat moves to the previous position.

Return All Settings to Default:

Select this item, push the ENTER buttonand choose “YES” if you want to return allsettings to the default.

SAA1565


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Others” settings (models withnavigation system)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Others” key with the INFINITI controllerand pushing the ENTER button.

Voice Recognition:

O Command List

Displays the voice command list onthe screen.

O Minimize Voice Feedback

When this item is turned to ON, vocalfeedback is reduced if the voice recog-nition system is activated.

O Voice Command Learning

Select this item to have the INFINITIVoice Recognition system learn the us-er’s voice. The system can memorizethe voices of up to three persons.

For the details of this function, refer to“INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITIONSYSTEM” later in this section.

O User Guide

Select this item to learn the operationflow of the INFINITI Voice Recognitionsystem with the help of a step-by-stepguide.

Language/Units:

O Select Language

Choose the “Select Language” keyand push the ENTER button. Select“English” or “Français” for your fa-vorite display appearance.

O Select Units

Choose the “Select Units” key and

push the ENTER button. Select “US”(Mile, °F, MPG) or “Metric” (km, °C,L/100 km) for your favorite display ap-pearance.

SAA1566


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Language/Units” settings(models without navigationsystem)

The following display will appear whenpushing the SETTING button, selecting the“Language/Units” key with the INFINITIcontroller and pushing the ENTER button.

Select Language:

Choose the “Select Language” key andpush the ENTER button. From the fol-lowing display, select “English”,“Français” or “Español” for your favoritedisplay appearance.

Select Units:

Choose the “Select Units” key and pushthe ENTER button. From the following dis-play, select “US” (Mile, °F, MPG) or “Met-ric” (km, °C, L/100 km) for your favoritedisplay appearance.

HOW TO USE “AUX” BUTTON

Images being played can be switched tothe center display if NTSC compatible de-vices are connected to the auxiliary inputjacks in the center console. (See “Auxil-iary input jacks” later in this section.)Push the AUX button to performswitching.

The above display will appear when the“Setting” key is selected using theINFINITI controller.

SAA1092 SAA1567


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Display Mode:

Choose the display mode from the follow-ing:

O Normal

O Wide

O Cinema

When the selector lever is shifted into theR (Reverse) position, the monitor displayshows view to the rear of the vehicle.

The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary objectsto help avoid damaging the vehicle. Thesystem will not detect small objectsbelow the bumper and may not detect ob-jects close to the bumper or on theground.

WARNING

O The rear view camera is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing up. Always turn and check that it issafe to do so before backing up. Alwaysback up slowly.

O Objects viewed in the RearView Monitordiffer from actual distance because awide-angle lens is used. Objects in theRearView Monitor will appear visuallyopposite than when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

O Make sure that the trunk is securelyclosed when backing up.

O Do not put anything on the rear viewcamera. The rear view camera is in-stalled on the trunk finisher.

O When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray itaround the camera. Otherwise, watermay enter the camera unit causing watercondensation on the lens, a malfunction,fire or an electric shock.

O Do not strike the camera. It is a precisioninstrument. Otherwise, it may malfunc-tion or cause damage resulting in a fireor an electric shock.

CAUTION

There is a plastic cover over the camera. Donot scratch the cover when cleaning dirt orsnow from the cover.

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYEDLINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehiclewidth and distances to objects with refer-ence to the bumper line qA are displayedon the monitor.

They are indicated as reference distancesto objects. Displayed lines indicate dis-tances 1.5 feet (red) q1 , 3 feet (yellow) q2 ,7 feet (green) q3 and 10 feet (green) q4[0.5 m (red), 1 m (yellow), 2 m (green) and3 m (green)] from the lower part of thebumper line qA .

When the steering wheel is turned withthe selector lever in the R (Reverse) posi-tion, the predicted course line qB is dis-played on the monitor.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTEDCOURSE LINES

WARNING

O Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

O Use the displayed lines as a reference.The lines are highly affected by the num-ber of occupants, fuel level, vehicle posi-tion, road condition and road grade.

O If the tires are replaced with differentsized tires, the predicted course linemay be displayed incorrectly.

O On a snow-covered or slippery road,there may be a difference between thepredicted course line and the actualcourse line.

O If the battery is disconnected or be-comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. Ifthis occurs, please perform the fol-lowing procedures:

— Turn the steering wheel from lock tolock while the engine is running.

— Drive the vehicle on a straight road formore than 5 minutes.

O When the steering wheel is turned withthe ignition switch in the ACC position,the predicted course lines may be dis-played incorrectly.

O The distance guide line and the vehiclewidth line should be used as a referenceonly when the vehicle is on a level pavedsurface. The distance viewed on themonitor is for reference only and may bedifferent than the actual distance be-tween the vehicle and displayed objects.

O When backing-up the vehicle up a hillobjects viewed in the monitor are furtherthan they appear. When backing-up thevehicle down a hill objects viewed in themonitor are closer than they appear. Usethe inside mirror or glance over your

SAA1099


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

shoulder to properly judge distances toother objects.

The vehicle width and predicted courselines are wider than the actual width andcourse.

1. Visually check that the parking spaceis safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis-played on the screen as illustratedwhen the selector lever is moved tothe R position. The predicted course

lines qB will appear when the steeringwheel is turned to the right or left.

3. Back up the vehicle to the parkingspace qC while referring to the pre-dicted course lines. Do not rely com-pletely on the information displayed

SAA1137


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

on the screen. Confirm the safety ofthe vehicle by visually checkingaround the vehicle.

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to makethe vehicle width lines qD parallel tothe parking space qC while referring tothe predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in thespace completely, move the selectorlever to the P position and apply theparking brake.

HOW TO ADJUST THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness,Tint, Color, Contrast and Black Level ofthe RearView Monitor, push the SETTINGbutton with the RearView Monitor on, se-lect the item key and adjust the levelusing the INFINITI controller.

Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast,Tint and Color of the RearView Monitorwhile the vehicle is moving. Make surethe parking brake is firmly applied andthe engine is not running.

OPERATING TIPS

O When the selector lever is shifted to R,the monitor screen automaticallychanges to the RearView Monitor

mode. However, the radio can beheard.

O It may take some time until the Rear-View Monitor or the normal screen isdisplayed after the selector lever hasbeen shifted to R from another posi-tion or to another position from R. Ob-jects may be distorted momentarilyuntil the RearView Monitor screen isdisplayed completely.

O When the temperature is extremelyhigh or low, the screen may not clearlydisplay objects. This is not a malfunc-tion.

O When strong light directly enters thecamera, objects may not be displayedclearly. This is not a malfunction.

O Vertical lines may be seen in objectson the screen. This is due to strong re-flected light from the bumper. This isnot a malfunction.

O The screen may flicker under fluores-cent light. This is not a malfunction.

O The colors of objects on the RearViewMonitor may differ somewhat fromthose of the actual object.

O Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark place or at night. Thisis not a malfunction.

O If dirt, rain or snow attaches to thecamera, the RearView Monitor may notclearly display objects. Clean the cam-era.

O Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinnerto clean the camera. This will causediscoloration. To clean the camera,wipe with a cloth dampened with di-luted mild cleaning agent and thenwipe with a dry cloth.

O Do not damage the camera as themonitor screen may be adversely af-fected.

O Do not use wax on the camerawindow. Wipe off any wax with a cleancloth dampened with mild detergentdiluted with water.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Open or close, and adjust the air flow di-rection of ventilators.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are closed.

: This symbol indicates that thevents are open.

WARNING

O The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

O Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers alone in your vehicle. Pets shouldnot be left alone either. On hot, sunnydays, temperatures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become high enough tocause severe or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

O Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the auto-matic climate control system.

When the “STATUS” button is pushed, theautomatic climate control status screenwill appear. See “How to use STATUS but-ton” earlier in this section.

SAA1499Center ventilators

SAA1500Side ventilators

SAA0564BRear

VENTILATORS AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

You can individually set the driver andfront passenger side temperature usingeach temperature control button.

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ONbutton/Temperature control dial(driver side)

2. “A/C” air conditioner ON/OFF button

3. “ ” fan speed increase button

4. “ ” front defroster button

5. “MODE” manual air flow controlbutton

6. “DUAL” zone control ON/OFFbutton/Temperature control dial (pas-senger side)

7. “OFF” button for climate controlsystem

8. “ ” fan speed decrease button

9. “ ” rear window defroster button(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

10. “ ” intake air controlbutton

SAA1520 SAA1527Type A


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL(TYPE A)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round.The system works automatically to controlthe inside temperature, air flowdistribution and fan speed after thepreferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indi-cator on the button will illuminate andAUTO will be displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial(driver side) to set the desired tem-perature.

Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed will also be controlled auto-matically.

3. You can individually set driver andfront passenger side temperatureusing each temperature control

button. When the “DUAL” button ispushed or the passenger side tem-perature control button is turned, theDUAL indicator will come on. To turnoff the passenger side temperaturecontrol, push the “DUAL” button.

4. To turn off the climate control system,push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF):

The air conditioner does not activate inthis mode. When you need to heat only,use this mode.

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indi-cator will turn off.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial toset the desired temperature.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

O Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwise

the system may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “ ” front defrosterbutton. (The indicator light on the but-ton will come on.)


O To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, push the fan speedincrease button “ ” and set it tothe maximum position.

O As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, push the “AUTO”button to return to the auto mode.

O When the “ ” front defrosterbutton is pushed, the air conditionerwill automatically be turned on at out-side temperatures above 23°F (−5°C)to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculate mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the pas-senger compartment to improve thedefogging performance.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Push the fan speed increase “ ” ordecrease “ ” buttons to manuallycontrol the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation:

Push the intake air control button“ ” to recirculate interior air in-side the vehicle. The indicator light on the“ ” side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot beactivated when the air conditioner is in thefront defrosting mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation:

Push the intake air control button“ ” to draw outside air into thepassenger compartment. The indicatorlight on the “ ” side will come on.

Automatic intake air control:

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will becontrolled automatically. To manually con-trol the intake air, push the intake aircontrol button “ ”. To return tothe automatic control mode, push the in-

take air control button “ ” forabout 2 seconds. The indicator lights(both air recirculation and outside air cir-culation sides) will flash twice, and thenthe intake air will be controlled automati-cally.

Air flow control:

Pushing the “MODE” manual air flow con-trol button selects the air outlet to:

: Air flows from center and sideventilators.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn the system off:

Push the OFF button.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. “AUTO” automatic climate control ONbutton/Temperature control dial

2. Air flow control button

3. “ ” Fan speed control dial

4. “OFF” button

5. “ ” front defroster button

6. “ ” rear window defroster button(See “REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH” in the“2. Instruments and controls” section.)

7. “ ” intake air control button

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL(TYPE B)

Automatic operation

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating(AUTO):

This mode may be used all year round.The system works automatically to controlthe inside temperature, air flowdistribution and fan speed after thepreferred temperature is set manually.

1. Push the “AUTO” button on. (The indi-cator on the button will illuminate and

AUTO will be displayed.)

2. Use the temperature control dial to setthe desired temperature.

Adjust the temperature to about 75°F(24°C) for normal operation.

O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed will also be controlled auto-matically.

3. To turn off the climate control system,push the “OFF” button.

A visible mist may be seen coming fromthe ventilators in hot, humid conditionsas the air is cooled rapidly. This does notindicate a malfunction.

Heating (A/C OFF):

The air conditioner does not activate inthis mode. When you need to heat only,use this mode.

1. Push the “A/C” button. (The A/C indi-cator will turn off.)


O The temperature of the passengercompartment will be maintained auto-

SAA1526Type B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

matically. Air flow distribution and fanspeed are also controlled automati-cally.

O Do not set the temperature lower thanthe outside air temperature. Otherwisethe system may not work properly.

O Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging:

1. Push the “ ” front defrosterbutton. (The indicator light on the but-ton will come on.)


O To quickly remove ice from the outsideof the windows, turn the “ ” fanspeed control dial and set it to themaximum position.

O As soon as possible after the wind-shield is clean, push the “AUTO”button to return to the auto mode.

O When the “ ” front defrosterbutton is pushed, the air conditionerwill automatically be turned on at out-side temperatures above 23°F (−5°C)to defog the windshield, and the airrecirculate mode will automatically beturned off.

Outside air is drawn into the pas-senger compartment to improve thedefogging performance.

Manual operation

Fan speed control:

Turn the “ ” fan speed control dial tomanually control the fan speed.

Push the “AUTO” button to return to auto-matic control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation:

Push the intake air control button“ ” to recirculate interior air in-side the vehicle. The indicator light on the“ ” side will come on.

The air recirculation mode cannot beactivated when the air conditioner is in thefront defrosting mode “ ”.

Outside air circulation

Push the intake air control button“ ” to draw outside air into thepassenger compartment. The indicatorlight on the “ ” side will come on.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will becontrolled automatically. To manually con-

trol the intake air, push the intake aircontrol button “ ”. To return tothe automatic control mode, push the in-take air control button “ ” forabout 2 seconds. The indicator lights(both air recirculation and outside air cir-culation sides) will flash twice, and thenthe intake air will be controlled automati-cally.

Air flow control:

Pushing an air flow control button manu-ally controls the air flow and selects theair outlet to the following settings.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators.

: Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

: Air flows from defroster and footoutlets.

To turn the system off:

Push the OFF button.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The sunload sensor qA on the instrumentpanel helps maintain a constant tempera-ture. Do not put anything on or aroundthis sensor.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The climate control system is equippedwith an in-cabin microfilter which collectsdirt, pollen, dust, etc. To make sure theair conditioner heats, defogs, and venti-lates efficiently, replace the filter in accor-dance with the maintenance schedule inthe INFINITI Service and MaintenanceGuide. To replace the filter, contact anINFINITI dealer.

The filter should be replaced if air flow isextremely decreased or when windows fogup easily when operating heater or air con-ditioning system.

SERVICING CLIMATE CONTROL

The climate control system in yourINFINITI is charged with a refrigerant de-signed with the environment in mind. Thisrefrigerant will not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. However, special charging equip-ment and lubricant are required when ser-vicing your INFINITI air conditioner. Usingimproper refrigerants or lubricants willcause severe damage to your climate con-trol system. See “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-nical and consumer information” for cli-mate control system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations.

Your INFINITI dealer will be able to serviceyour environmentally friendly climate con-trol system.

WARNING

The system contains refrigerant under highpressure. To avoid personal injury, any airconditioner service should be done only byan experienced technician with the properequipment.

SIC2768


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Radio

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition and push the “RADIO” button toturn on the radio. If you listen to the radiowith the engine not running, the ignitionswitch should be pushed to the ACC posi-tion.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-nal strength, distance from radio trans-mitter, buildings, bridges, mountains andother external influences. Intermittentchanges in reception quality normally arecaused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio receptionquality.

Radio reception:

Your INFINITI radio system is equippedwith state-of-the-art electronic circuits toenhance radio reception. These circuitsare designed to extend reception range,and to enhance the quality of that recep-tion.

However there are some general charac-teristics of both FM and AM radio signalsthat can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finestequipment is used. These characteristicsare completely normal in a given recep-tion area, and do not indicate any mal-function in your INFINITI radio system.

Reception conditions will constantlychange because of vehicle movement.Buildings, terrain, signal distance and in-terference from other vehicles can workagainst ideal reception. Described beloware some of the factors that can affectyour radio reception.

FM radio reception:

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25to 30 miles (40 to 48 km), with monaural(single channel) FM having slightly morerange than stereo FM. External influencesmay sometimes interfere with FM stationreception even if the FM station is within25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distancebetween the transmitter and receiver. FMsignals follow a line-of-sight path, exhib-iting many of the same characteristics aslight. For example they will reflect off ob-jects.

SAA0306

AUDIO SYSTEM


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Fade and drift: As your vehicle movesaway from a station transmitter, the sig-nals will tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-ence from buildings, large hills or due toantenna position, usually in conjunctionwith increased distance from the stationtransmitter, static or flutter can be heard.This can be reduced by lowering thetreble setting to reduce the treble re-sponse.

Multipath reception: Because of the re-flective characteristics of FM signals, di-rect and reflected signals reach the re-ceiver at the same time. The signals maycancel each other, resulting in momentaryflutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception:

AM signals, because of their low fre-quency, can bend around objects andskip along the ground. In addition, thesignals can be bounced off the iono-sphere and bent back to earth. Becauseof these characteristics. AM signals arealso subject to interference as they travelfrom transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle ispassing through freeway underpasses or

in areas with many tall buildings. It canalso occur for several seconds duringionospheric turbulence even in areaswhere no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, elec-trical power lines, electric signs and eventraffic lights.

Satellite radio reception:

When the satellite radio (if so equipped)is first installed or the battery has beenreplaced, the satellite radio may not workproperly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radioON for satellite radio to receive all of thenecessary data.

The satellite radio mode will be skippedunless an optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XM orSIRIUSTM satellite radio service subscrip-tion is active. Satellite radio is not avail-able in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-fected if cargo carried on the roof blocksthe satellite radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the sat-ellite antenna.

Compact Disc (CD) player

O Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

O Trying to load a CD with the CD door

SAA0480


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

closed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

O During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

O The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

O The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the passenger compartmenttemperature is extremely high. De-crease the temperature before use.

O Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

O Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

O CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,scratched, covered with fingerprints, orthat have pin holes may not work prop-erly.

O The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

- Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

- Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

- Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

O Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion.

- 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

- CDs that are not round

- CDs with a paper label

- CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

O This audio system can only play prere-corded CDs. It has no capabilities torecord or burn CDs.

O If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

- Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

- Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PUSH EJECT:

This is an error due to the temperatureinside the player is too high. Remove

the CD by pushing the EJECT button,and after a short time reinsert the CD.The CD can be played when the tem-perature of the player returns tonormal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 or WMA CD).

CompactFlash (CF) player

O Do not force a CF card into the slot. Thiscould damage the CF card and/orplayer.

O During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CFcard and dehumidify or ventilate theplayer completely.

O The CF player sometimes cannot func-tion when the passenger compartmenttemperature is extremely high. De-crease the temperature before use.

O Do not expose a CF card to direct sun-light.

O Confirm that a CF card is inserted cor-rectly.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Compact Disc (CD)/CompactFlash(CF) with MP3 or WMA

Explanation of terms:

O MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pic-tures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.MP3 is the most well known com-pressed digital audio file format. Thisformat allows for near “CD quality”sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion ofan audio track from CD/CF can reducethe file size by approximately 10:1ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128kbps) with virtually no perceptible lossin quality. MP3 compression removesthe redundant and irrelevant parts of asound signal that the human eardoesn’t hear.

O WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)is a compressed audio format createdby Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.The WMA codec offers greater filecompression than the MP3 codec, en-abling storage of more digital audiotracks in the same amount of spacewhen compared to MP3s at the samelevel of quality.

O Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the numberof bits per second used by a digital

music files. The size and quality of acompressed digital audio file is deter-mined by the bit rate used when en-coding the file.

O Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-quency is the rate at which thesamples of a signal are convertedfrom analog to digital (A/D conversion)per second.

O Multisession — Multisession is one ofthe methods for writing data to media.Writing data once to the media iscalled a single session, and writingmore than once is called a multises-sion.

O ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag isthe part of the encoded MP3 or WMAfile that contains information aboutthe digital music file such as songtitle, artist, album title, encoding bitrate, track time duration, etc. ID3 taginformation is displayed on theAlbum/Artist/Track title line on thedisplay.

* Windows and Windows Media areregistered trademarks or trademarksof Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates of America and/or other coun-tries.

CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDiskCorporation in the United States ofAmerica and/or other countries.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Playback order:

Music playback order of the CD/CF withMP3 or WMA is as illustrated above.

O The folder names of folders not con-

taining MP3/WMA files are not shownin the display.

O If there is a file in the top level of thedisc, “Root Folder” is displayed.

O The playback order is the order inwhich the files were written by thewriting software, so the files might notplay in the desired order.

SAA1025


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, CF

Supported file systems

CD, CD-R, CD-RW:ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

CompactFlash card:FAT12, FAT16, FAT32

Supported ver-sions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4

WMA*2

Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4

Tag information (Song title and Artist name)ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

WMA tag (WMA only)

Folder levels

With navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files:512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)Without navigation system:Folder levels: 8, Folders and files: 999 (Max. 255 files forone folder)

Text character number limitationWith navigation system: 128 characters

Without navigation system: 64 characters

Displayable character codes*3

01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM BigEndian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little En-dian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbpsbit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot beplayed.

*3 Available codes depend on what kindof media, versions and information aregoing to be displayed.

*4 When VBR files are played, the play-back time may not be displayed cor-rectly.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the CD/CF was inserted correctly.

Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before usingthe player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will beplayed.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes andnumber of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting ofMP3/WMA writing applications or other text editing applications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the CD/CF is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the CD/CF is scratched or dirty.

It takes a relatively long time be-fore the music starts playing.

If there are many folder or file levels on the MP3/WMA CD/CF, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required beforethe music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., mightnot match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Move immediately to the nextsong when playing.

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited bycopyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.

The songs do not play back in thedesired order.

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in the de-sired order.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob

2. Radio PRESET A-B-C selector button

3. Radio SCAN (tuning)/CD RPT (repeat)play button

4. Radio CAT (category)/REW (rewind)button for SEEK/TRACK

5. FF (fast forward) button forSEEK/TRACK

6. Radio tuning / MP3/WMA folder selec-

tor / AUDIO control knob

7. CD EJECT button

8. Radio station and CD selector buttons

9. CD LOAD button (if so equipped)

10. CompactFlash (CF) card slot (modelswith navigation system) (locatedabove the ashtray)

No satellite radio reception is availableunless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM or SIRI-USTM satellite radio service subscriptionis active.

SAA1532


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. AMzFMzSAT band select button

2. DISCzAUX button

1. RADIO AMzFM band select button

2. DISC button

FM-AM-SAT RADIO WITH COMPACTDISC (CD) CHANGER

For all operation precautions, see “Audiooperation precautions” earlier in this sec-tion.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped un-less an optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM

satellite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Ha-waii and Guam.

It may take some time to receive the activa-tion signal after subscribing to the XMT orSIRIUS satellite radio provider. After re-ceiving the activation signal, an availablechannel list will be automatically updated inthe radio. For XMT, push the ignition switchfrom LOCK to ACC to update the channel list.

Audio main operation

Head unit:

The radio has an FM diversity receptionsystem, which employs two antennasprinted on the rear window. This systemautomatically switches to the antennawhich is receiving less interference.

The auto loudness circuit enhances thelow and high frequency ranges automati-




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

cally in both radio reception and CD play-back.

ONzOFF/Volume control:

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, and then push theONzOFF/VOLUME control knob while thesystem is off to call up the mode (radio,CD or AUX) which was playing immedi-ately before the system was turned off.While the system is on, pushing theONzOFF/VOLUME control knob turns thesystem off.

Turn the ONzOFF/VOLUME control knob toadjust the volume.

Adjusting tone quality and speakerbalance:

To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade,push the Audio control knob. When thedisplay shows the setting you want tochange (Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade),rotate the Audio control knob to set thedesired setting. For the other settingmethods, refer to “How to use SETTINGbutton” earlier in this section.

This vehicle has some sound effect func-tions as follows (if so equipped):

O Precision Phased Audio

O Speed Sensitive Volume

For more details, see “Vehicle informationand settings” earlier in this section.

FM-AM-SAT radio operation

or radio (FM/AM/SAT)band select:

Pushing the radio band select button willchange the band as follows:

(Without satellite radio)

AM → FM → AM

(With satellite radio)

AM → FM → SAT (XM/SR) → AM

When the radio band select button ispushed while the ignition switch is in theACC or ON position, the radio will comeon at the station last played.

The last station/channel played will alsocome on when the ONzOFF/VOL controlknob is pushed to ON.

The satellite radio mode will be skipped un-less an optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XM or SIRIUSTM

satellite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Ha-waii and Guam.

If another audio source is playing whenthe radio band select button is turned toON, the audio source will automaticallybe turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

When the stereo broadcast signal isweak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (Tuning):

O For AM and FM radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob formanual tuning.

O For satellite radio

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to seekchannels from all of the categorieswhen any CAT is not selected.

SEEK tuning/CATEGORY(CAT):

O For AM and FM radio

Push the SEEKzCAT or TRACK buttonor to tune from low to high

or high to low frequencies and to stopat the next broadcasting station.

O For satellite radio

Push the SEEKzCAT or TRACK button


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

or to tune to the firstchannel of the next or previous cat-egory.

During satellite radio reception, the fol-lowing notices will be displayed undercertain conditions.

O NO SIGNAL (No signal is receivedwhile the SAT tuner is connected.)

O OFF AIR (Broadcasting signed off)

O ANTENNA ERROR (Antenna connectionerror)

O LOADING(XM)/ACQUIRING(SR) (Whenthe initial setting is performed)

O UPDATING(XM)/CALL XXXX(SR) (Whenthe satellite radio subscription is notactive)

O INVALID CH (Invalid channel is re-ceived.)

SCAN tuning:

Push the SCAN tuning button to tune fromlow to high frequencies and stops at eachbroadcasting station for 5 seconds. Push-ing the button again during this 5 sec-onds period will stop SCAN tuning andthe radio will remain tuned to that sta-tion.

If the SCAN tuning button is not pushedwithin 5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves tothe next station.

PRESET select:

Push the PRESET select button to go tothe next PRESET. After choosing from thePRESET A, B or C, you can select the de-sired channel using the INFINITI controlleror pushing the station preset buttons q1to q6 .

q1 to q6 Station memory operations:

Six stations/channels can be set forPRESET A, B and C. The PRESET A, B and Cfunction allows you to store a combina-tion of FM, AM and SAT (if so equipped)stations for easy access.

1. Choose preset channel A, B or C usingthe preset select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using theSEEK, SCAN or TUNE button.

3. Select the desired station/channeland keep pushing any of the desiredstation preset buttons q1 to q6 until abeep sound is heard. (The radio muteswhen the select button is pushed.)

4. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Memo-rizing is now complete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the samemanner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or ifthe fuse blows, the radio memory will beerased. In that case, reset the desiredstations.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected with theINFINITI controller on the display and thenthe ENTER button is pushed while the sat-ellite radio is being played, the text infor-mation will be displayed on the screen.

O CH Name

O Category

O Name

O Title

O Other

Compact Disc (CD) changeroperation

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, push the LOAD button (if soequipped) and insert the compact discinto the slot with the label side facing up.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The compact disc will be guided automati-cally into the slot and start playing.

After loading the disc, the number oftracks on the disc and the play time willappear on the display.

If the radio is already operating, it will au-tomatically turn off and the compact discwill play.

If the system has been turned off whilethe compact disc was playing, pushingthe ONzOFF/VOL control knob will startthe compact disc.

CD LOAD (if so equipped):

To insert a CD in the CD changer, pushthe LOAD button for less than 1.5 sec-onds. Select the loading position bypushing the CD insert select button q1 toq6 , then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer in suc-cession, push the LOAD button for morethan 1.5 seconds.

The inserted slot numbers will illuminateon the display.

DISC or PLAY:

When the DISC (CD play) button is pushedwith the system off and the compact disc

loaded, the system will turn on and thecompact disc will start to play.

When the DISC button is pushed with thecompact disc loaded and the radioplaying, the radio will automatically beturned off and the compact disc will startto play.

When the DISC button is pushed while aCD is loaded and a medium is played us-ing the auxiliary input jacks, you cantoggle back and forth between CD andmedium.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected in thescreen using the INFINITI controller andthen the ENTER button is pushed whilethe CD is being played, the music infor-mation below will be displayed on thescreen.

CD:

O Disc title

O Track title

CD with MP3 or WMA:

O Folder title

O File title

O Song title

O Album title

O Artist

FF (Fast Forward), REW(Rewind)/APS (AutomaticProgram Search) FF, APSREW:

When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5seconds while the compact disc is beingplayed, the compact disc will play whilefast forwarding or rewinding. When thebutton is released, the compact disc willreturn to normal play speed.

When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the com-pact disc is being played, the next trackor the beginning of the current track onthe CD will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used toselect tracks when a CD is being played.

CD PLAY selection:

To change to another CD already loadedinto the player, push the CD play select

buttons q1 to q6 or choose a disc dis-played on the screen using the INFINITIcontroller.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while thecompact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:(CD)

(CD with MP3 or WMA)

CD EJECT:

When the CD EJECT button is pushed withthe compact disc loaded, the compactdisc will be ejected.

To eject the discs selected by the CD se-lect button, push the EJECT button for lessthan 1.5 seconds.

To eject all the discs, push the EJECT but-ton for more than 1.5 seconds.

When this button is pushed while thecompact disc is being played, the com-pact disc will come out and the systemwill turn off.

If the compact disc comes out and is not

removed, it will be pulled back into the slotto protect it.

COMPACTFLASH (CF) PLAYEROPERATION (models withnavigation system)

Push the ignition switch to the ACC or ONposition, remove the cover qA and insert aCF card qB into the slot. Then, push the

button repeatedly to switch to theCompactFlash mode.

If the system has been turned off whilethe CompactFlash card was playing,pushing the ONzOFF/VOL control knob willstart the CompactFlash card.

SAA1568


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PLAY:

When the DISC button is pushed with thesystem off and the CF card inserted, thesystem will turn on.

If another audio source is playing and aCF card is inserted, push the DISC buttonrepeatedly until the center displaychanges to the CompactFlash mode.

Text:

When the “Text” key is selected on thescreen using the INFINITI controller andthen the ENTER button is pushed whilethe CF is being played, the music informa-tion below will be displayed on thescreen.

O Folder title

O Song title

O Track title

O Album Title

O Artist


When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5seconds while the CompactFlash card isbeing played, the CompactFlash card willplay while fast forwarding or rewinding.When the button is released, the Com-pactFlash card will return to the normalplay speed.

When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while the Com-pactFlash card is being played, the nexttrack or the beginning of the current trackon the CF will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used toselect tracks when the CompactFlash cardis being played.

Folder selection:

To change to another folder in the Com-pactFlash card, turn the MP3/WMA folderselector or choose a folder displayed onthe screen using the INFINITI controller.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while theCompactFlash card is played, the playpattern can be changed as follows:

CF EJECT:

When the knob next to the CF slot ispushed with the CF card inserted, the CFcard will be ejected.

Messages:

The following messages will be displayedunder certain conditions.

O Reading Compact Flash (The system isreading the CF card inserted in theslot.)

O No Compact Flash card (A CF card isnot inserted in the slot.)

O Compact Flash read error (The systemcannot read a CF card.)

O Unplayable file (The system cannotplay a music file.)

O No audio file (The CF card inserted inthe slot or its folder does not containany music files.)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Compatibility with other media:

If a commercially available CompactFlashadapter is inserted into the slot, yourmemory media can also be used.

“MUSIC BOX” HARD-DISK DRIVEAUDIO SYSTEM (models withnavigation system)

The “Music Box” hard-disk drive audiosystem can store songs from CDs beingplayed. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte(GB) storage capacity and can record upto 200 hours (approximately 2,900songs).

The following CDs can be recorded in the“MUSIC BOX” hard-disk drive audiosystem.

O CDs without MP3/WMA files

O Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hy-brid CD-DA) specification in SuperAudio CDs

O Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA)specification in CD-Extras

O First session of multisession disc

The optional in-trunk CD changer cannotrecord music to the hard disk.

Extreme temperature conditions [below−4°F (−20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] couldaffect the performance of the hard disk.

NOTE:

If the hard disk needs to be replaced due toa malfunction, all stored music data will beerased.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Recording songs

1. Operate the audio system to play aCD. For the details of playing CDs,refer to “Compact Disc (CD) changeroperation” earlier in this section.

2. Select the “REC” key using the INFINITIcontroller and push the ENTER button.

The system starts recording the trackbeing played and “REC CD” appears onthe screen.

If the title information of the track beingrecorded is stored either in the hard-diskdrive or in the CD, the title is automati-

cally displayed on the screen. For title ac-quisition from the hard-disk drive, musicrecognition technology and related dataare provided by Gracenote .

To view the details of the track, select theText key by touching the screen or usingthe INFINITI controller. The track nameand album title are displayed on thescreen.

If a track is not recorded successfully dueto skipping sounds, the mark is dis-played behind the track number.

The “Music Box” audio system cannot

perform recording under the followingconditions.

O There is not enough space in the harddisk

O The number of albums reaches themaximum of 500.

O The number of tracks reaches themaximum of 3,000.

Automatic recording:

If the “Automatic Recording” function isturned to ON, recording starts when a CDis inserted. (See ““Music Box” settings”later in this section.)

Stopping recording:

To stop the recording, select the STOPbutton by touching the screen or usingthe INFINITI controller.

If the CD is ejected, the audio system isturned off or the ignition switch is pushedto the OFF position, the recording alsostops.

SAA1613 SAA1614


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Playing recorded songs

Select the “Music Box” audio system byusing one of the following methods.

O Push the source select switch on thesteering wheel and the ENTER switch.(See “STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTEDCONTROLS FOR AUDIO” later in thissection.)

O Push the DISC button repeatedly untilthe center display changes to the Mu-sic Box mode.

O Give voice commands. (See “INFINITI

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM” later inthis section.)

Stopping playback:

The system stops playing when:

a. another mode (radio, CD, Compact-Flash or AUX) is selected.

b. the audio system is turned off.

c. the ignition switch is pushed to theOFF position.


When the (fast forward) or (re-wind) button is pushed for more than 1.5seconds while a track is being played, thetrack will play while fast forwarding or re-winding. When the button is released, thetrack will return to the normal play speed.

When the or button is pushedfor less than 1.5 seconds while a track isbeing played, the next track or the begin-ning of the current track will be played.

The INFINITI controller can also be used toselect tracks when a track is beingplayed.

Play mode selection:

To change to another album or artist, turnthe MP3/WMA folder selector.

REPEAT (RPT):

When the RPT button is pushed while atrack is being played, the play pattern canbe changed as follows:

SAA1615


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

There are some options available duringplayback. Select one of the following thatare displayed on the screen, if necessary.

Menu:

Refer to the following information for eachitem.

O Play by Artist

Plays songs by an artist whose musicis currently being played. The artistsare sorted in alphabetical order.

O Play by Album

Plays tracks in each album. The al-bums are sorted in alphabetical order.

O Play by Date

Plays tracks in each album. The al-bums are sorted in order of the datewhen they were stored in the system.

O Play by Mood

Plays music from one of the followingmoods: Relaxing Music, Lively Music,Slow Music and Upbeat Music.

O Play by Category

Plays music from one of the followingcategories: My Favorites, Hit Songs,Kids’ Songs and Rarely Played.

O Search Artists

Displays a list of artists in alpha-betical order. Selecting an artist dis-plays all of the tracks by the artist andstarts playing the first track.

SAA1684 SAA1685


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Search Albums

Displays a list of albums in order ofthe date when they were stored in thesystem. Selecting an album displaysall of the tracks on the album andstarts playing the first track.

Select the “Sort” key to re-sort albumsin one of the following order: Rec. (Re-corded) Date, Name, Release Year, Art-ist.

O Search Song Details

Set the conditions and select the“Start Song Search” key to search for

a desired song that is stored in thesystem. The conditions are as follows:

Music Tempo (All, Slow, Normal andFast)

Decade (All, ’70s, ’80s, ’90s, ’00s and’10s and After)

Group (All, Male Artist, Female Artist,Group and Duo)

Category (Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B,Hip Hop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae,Folk, Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Lis-tening, New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel& Religious, World, Classical, Chil-dren’s and Other)

O Search Keywords

Input a search keyword using the key-pad displayed on the screen. (See“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlierin this section.)

O Edit Albums

Select a category (Rec. (Recorded)Date, Name, Released Year and Artist)and edit the details using the keypaddisplayed on the screen. (See “HOWTO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier in thissection.)

O Music Box System Info.

Displays the following informationabout the “Music Box” audio system:

a. Music Box Used / Free Space (In-formation about “Saved Album”,“Saved Track” and “RemainingTime” is displayed.)

b. Mood Categories (Number of savedtracks and their categories (Relax-ing Music, Lively Music, SlowMusic, Upbeat Music and Others)are displayed.)

c. Deleted Items (Information aboutthe deleted tracks is displayed.)

d. Search Missing Titles

If titles are not displayed for CDs thathave been recorded, titles can be ac-quired using one of the followingmethods:

O Retrieve from HDD

Searches the title using the data-base in the hard disk.

O Retrieve from CF

Searches the title from the informa-tion acquired on the Internet. Visitwww.infiniti.com for details.

SAA1686


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Transfer Missing Titles to CF

Transfers the information of thealbum recorded without titles to aCompactFlash card. Visit www.infi-niti.com for details.

e. Music Box Settings (See “MusicBox” settings” later in this sec-tion.)

f. CDDB Version (the version of thebuilt-in Gracenote Database is dis-played.)

Text:


O Set Mood

Set the mood category of the track to“Relaxing Music”, “Lively Music”,“Slow Music” or “Upbeat Music”.

O Delete Track

Delete the track being played.

O Edit Info.

Edit the name of the track being

played and its artist using the keypaddisplayed on the screen. (See “HOWTO USE TOUCH SCREEN”.)

The category of the track can also beset to Rock, Pop, Latin, Jazz, R&B, HipHop, Club/Dance, Punk, Reggae, Folk,Blues, Country, Metal, Easy Listening,New Age, Soundtrack, Gospel & Reli-gious, World, Classical, Children’s andOthers.

O Remove Track

Reset the mood setting of a track.

Restoring deleted data

Deleted music data can be restored byperforming the following.

1. Select the “Menu” key and then the“Music Box System Info.” key on thescreen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items” key andthen the “Album/Track” key.

3. Select the “Restore Album/Track” keyto restore the deleted music data.

You can also listen to the beginning ofeach track that has been deleted by per-forming the following.

1. Select the “Menu” key and then the

SAA1688


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“Music Box System Info.” key on thescreen.

2. Select the “Deleted Items” key andthen the “Play Sample” key.

“Music Box” settings

To set up the “Music box” hard-disk driveaudio system to your preferred settings,select the “Menu” key during playback,“Music Box System Info.” key, and “MusicBox Settings” key with the INFINITI con-troller, and then push the ENTER button.

Automatic Recording:

When this item is turned to ON, the “Mu-sic Box” hard-disk audio system auto-matically starts recording when a CD is in-serted.

Recording Quality:

Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or132 kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.

Title Text Priority:

Set the priority to CDDB (Compact DiscData Base) to acquire track informationfrom the Gracenote Database or set to CDTEXT to acquire the information from CDs.

Delete ALL Music Box Data:

Delete all music data stored on the harddisk.

SAA1616


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Gracenote

NOTE:

O The information contained in theGracenote Database is not fully guar-anteed.

O The service of the Gracenote Databaseon the Internet may be stopped withoutprior notice for maintenance.

End-User License Agreement

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.

Gracenote MusicID Terms of Use

This device contains software fromGracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California(“Gracenote”). The software fromGracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) en-ables this application to do online discidentification and obtain music-related in-formation, including name, artist, track,and title information (“Gracenote Data”)from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”)and to perform other functions. You mayuse Gracenote Data only by means of theintended End-User functions of this de-vice.

You agree that you will use GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers for your own personalnon-commercial use only. You agree notto assign, copy, transfer or transmit theGracenote Software or any GracenoteData to any third party. YOU AGREE NOTTO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA,THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EX-PRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive licenseto use the Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers will ter-minate if you violate these restrictions. Ifyour license terminates, you agree tocease any and all use of the GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves allrights in Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers, in-cluding all ownership rights. Under no cir-cumstances will Gracenote become liablefor any payment to you for any informa-tion that you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights un-der this Agreement against you directly inits own name.

The Gracenote MusicID Service uses aunique identifier to track queries for sta-

tistical purposes. The purpose of a ran-domly assigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote MusicID service tocount queries without knowing anythingabout who you are. For more information,see the web page for the Gracenote Pri-vacy Policy for the Gracenote MusicID Ser-vice.

The Gracenote Software and each item ofGracenote Data are licensed to you “ASIS.” Gracenote makes no representationsor warranties, express or implied, regard-ing the accuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenotereserves the right to delete data from theGracenote Servers or to change data cat-egories for any cause that Gracenotedeems sufficient. No warranty is madethat the Gracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or that functioningof Gracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted. Gracenoteis not obligated to provide you with newenhanced or additional data types or cat-egories that Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue its onlineservices at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIESEXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUTNOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PAR-TICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OB-TAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER.IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLEFOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTALDAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS ORLOST REVENUES.

Copyright:

Music recognition technology and relateddata are provided by Gracenote .Gracenote is the industry standard in mu-sic recognition technology and relatedcontent delivery. For more informationvisit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000-2006Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright© 2000-2006 Gracenote. This productand service may practice one or more ofthe following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,#6,330,593, and other patents issued orpending. Some services supplied under li-cense from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.Patent: #6,304,523. Gracenote and CDDB

are registered trademarks of Gracenote.The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the“Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-marks of Gracenote.

CD/CF (CompactFlash) CARE ANDCLEANING

CD:

O Handle a CD by its edges. Never touchthe surface of the disc. Do not bendthe disc.

O Always place the discs in the storagecase when they are not being used.

O To clean a disc, wipe the surface fromthe center to the outer edge using aclean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the discusing a circular motion.Do not use a conventional record

SAA0451


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-trial use.

O A new disc may be rough on the innerand outer edges. Remove the roughedges by rubbing the inner and outeredges with the side of a pen or pencilas illustrated.

CF cards:

O Never touch the terminal portion ofthe CompactFlash cards. Do not bendthe cards.

O Always place the cards in the storagecase when they are not being used.

O Do not place heavy objects on thecards.

O Do not store the cards in highly humidlocations.

O Do not expose the cards to direct sun-light.

O Do not spill any liquids on the cards.

Refer to the CompactFlash card Owner’sManual for the details. 1. Source select switch

2. ENTER (models with navigation system)or tuning (models without navigationsystem) switch

3. Volume control switch4. BACK switch




w 06.7.27/V36-D X

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTEDCONTROLS FOR AUDIO

ENTER (models with navigationsystem) or tuning (models withoutnavigation system) switch

Push the switch upward or downward toselect a channel, track, CD or folder whenthey are listed on the display. You canalso use the ENTER switch to select theitems on the usual setting menu screen.

After selecting an MP3 folder using the upand down switch, push the ENTER switchto complete the selection.

While the display is in the NAVI, STATUSor Audio setting screen, some audio func-tions can also be controlled using the EN-TER switch. The function varies dependingon if you push the switch shorter (lessthan 1.5 seconds) or longer (more than 1.5seconds).

RADIO:

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”shorter

Next or previous preset channel

O Pushing DOWN “ ”/UP “ ”longer

Next or previous station/channel

CD:


Next track or the beginning of the cur-rent track


Disc change (When only one disc isloaded, the 1st track of the disc will beselected.)

CD/CF with MP3/WMA:




Folder change (When the last folder ona disc is playing, the next disc will beselected.)

“Music Box” hard-disk drive audiosystem:




Playlist change (When the last playlistis playing, the next playlist will be se-lected.)

BACK switch

Push this switch to go back to the pre-vious screen or cancel the selection if it isnot completed.

Volume control switches

Push the upper (+) or lower (−) sideswitch to increase or decrease thevolume.

“SOURCE” select switch

Push the source select switch to changethe mode in the sequence of Preset A,Preset B, Preset C, “Music Box” (if soequipped), CD and CompactFlash (if soequipped).


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ANTENNA

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside therear window.

CAUTION

O Do not place metalized film near the rearwindow glass or attach any metal partsto it. This may cause poor reception ornoise.

O When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

The auxiliary input jacks are located inthe center console. NTSC compatible de-vices such as video games, camcordersand portable video players can be con-nected to the auxiliary jacks.

The auxiliary jacks are color coded foridentification purposes.

O Yellow - video input

O White - left channel audio input

O Red - right channel audio input

Before connecting a device to a jack,turn off the power of the portable device.

SAA1507Automatic transmission models

SAA1531Manual transmission models


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When installing a car phone or a CB radioin your INFINITI, be sure to observe thefollowing cautions, otherwise the newequipment may adversely affect the elec-tronic control modules and electronic con-trol system harness.

WARNING

O A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

O If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands-free cel-lular phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Exer-cise extreme caution at all times so fullattention may be given to vehicle opera-tion.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop your ve-hicle before doing so.

CAUTION

O Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic control mod-ules.

O Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic controlsystem harness. Do not route the an-tenna wire next to any harness.

O Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

O Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

O For details, consult an INFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

O If a conversation in a moving vehicle re-quires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop your ve-hicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use aphone after starting the engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM(if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Your INFINITI is equipped with theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System. Ifyou are an owner of a Bluetooth enabledcellular phone, you can set up the wire-less connection between your cellularphone and the in-vehicle phone module.

With Bluetooth wireless technology, youcan make or receive a telephone call withyour cellular phone in your pocket.

Once your cellular phone is paired to thein-vehicle phone module, no phone con-necting procedure is required anymore.

Your phone is automatically connectedwith the in-vehicle phone module whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition with the registered cellularphone turned on and carried in the ve-hicle.

You can register up to 5 differentBluetooth cellular phones in the in-vehicle phone module. However, you cantalk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System, refer to the followingnotes.

O Set up the wireless connection be-tween a cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before usingthe Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem.

O Some Bluetooth enabled cellularphones may not be recognized by thein-vehicle phone module. Please visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for a rec-ommended phone list.

SAA1569


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following condi-tions:

- Your vehicle is outside of the tele-phone service area.

- Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive radio waves; suchas in a tunnel, in an undergroundparking garage, behind a tallbuilding or in a mountainous area.

- Your cellular phone is locked inorder not to be dialed.

O When the signal reception is too bador ambient sound is too loud, it maybe difficult to hear the other person’svoice during a call.

O Immediately after the ignition switchis pushed to the ON position, it maybe impossible to receive a call for ashort period of time.

O Do not place the cellular phone in anarea surrounded by metal or far awayfrom the in-vehicle phone module toprevent tone quality degradation andwireless connection disruption.

O While a cellular phone is connectedthrough the Bluetooth wireless connec-tion, the battery power of the cellularphone may discharge quicker thanusual.

O If the Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem seems to be malfunctioning,please visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for trou-bleshooting help.

O Refer to the cellular phone Owner’sManual regarding the telephonecharges, cellular phone antenna andbody, etc.

O The antenna display on the monitorwill not coincide with the antenna dis-play of some cellular phones.

O Keep the interior of the vehicle asquiet as possible to hear the caller’svoice clearly as well as to minimize itsechoes.

O If reception between callers is unclear,adjusting the outgoing volume mayimprove the clarity.

Regulatory information:

FCC Regulatory information

- CAUTION: To maintain compliance withFCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use onlythe supplied antenna. Unauthorizedantenna, modification, or attachmentscould damage the transmitter and mayviolate FCC regulations.

- Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1) this device may not cause interferenceand

2) this device must accept any interfer-ence, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the de-vice

IC Regulatory information:

- Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) this device may notcause interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference, in-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

- This Class B digital apparatus meetsall requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regu-lations.

Bluetooth trademark:

BLUETOOTH is a trademarkowned by Bluetooth SIG,Inc., U.S.A. and licenced toXanavi Informatics Corpora-tion.

MODELS WITH NAVIGATIONSYSTEM

Pairing procedure

1. Push the SETTING button, and selectthe “PHONE” key on the display usingthe INFINITI controller. Then push theENTER button.

2. Select the “Bluetooth Setup” key, andpush the ENTER button.

3. Select the “Pair Phone” key, and pushthe ENTER button.

4. Select the “None (Add New)” key from

the name list of the phones, and pushthe ENTER button.

5. When a PIN code appears on thescreen, operate the Bluetooth cel-lular phone to enter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cel-lular phone. See the cellular phoneOwner’s Manual for the details. Youcan also visitwww.infiniti.com/bluetooth for in-structions on pairing INFINITI recom-mended cellular phones.

SAA1570 SAA1571


w 06.8.14/V36-D X

6. When the pairing is completed, thescreen will return to the Bluetoothsetup display.

Phonebook registration

Up to 40 phone numbers can be stored inthe phonebook.

1. Push the SETTING button, and selectthe “PHONE” key on the display usingthe INFINITI controller. Then push theENTER button.

2. Select the “Phonebook” key, and pushthe ENTER button.

3. Select the “None (Add New)” key fromthe name list of the phonebook, andpush the ENTER button.

SAA1572

SAA1573

SAA1574


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

4. Select the “Transfer via Bluetooth”key, and push the ENTER button in or-der to register your cellular phonememory in the phonebook.

5. Operate the cellular phone to send aperson’s name and phone numberfrom the memory of the cellularphone. The memory sending proce-dure from the cellular phone varies ac-cording to each cellular phone manu-facturer. See the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual for more details.

6. After the memory is registered in thephonebook, the system will ask if you

want to add a voice tag for it. If youwant to add a voice tag, select “YES”on the “Add a voicetag?” screen. Forexample, if the partner’s name isDavid, speak “David” after a tonewhile the “Store voicetag” screen ison the display. The “David” voice tagis stored in the phonebook. Voice tagis a useful function for easy dialingsupported by the voice recognitionsystem. See “INFINITI Voice Recogni-tion System” later in this section.

7. When the phonebook registration iscompleted, the screen will return tothe name list of the phonebook.

There are different methods to input aphone number. Select one of the fol-lowing options instead of “Transfer viaBluetooth” in step 4 above.

Enter Data by Keypad:

Input the name and phone number manu-ally using the keypad displayed on thescreen. See “HOW TO USE TOUCHSCREEN” earlier in this section.

Copy from Downloaded Phonebook:

Copy a phonebook from the Bluetoothcellular phone. The availability of thisfunction depends on each cellular phone.The copying procedure from the cellularphone also varies according to each cellu-lar phone. See cellular phone Owner’sManual for more details.

Copy from Outgoing Call Logs:

Store the name and phone number fromthe outgoing call list.

Copy from Incoming Call Logs:

Store the name and phone number fromthe incoming call list.

Transfer via Bluetooth:

Transfer a contact from the Bluetoothcellular phone. Availability of this function

SAA1575 SAA1576


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

depends on each cellular phone. Thetransferring procedure from the cellularphone also varies according to each cellu-lar phone. See the cellular phone Owner’sManual for more details.

Delete:

Delete a contact that is registered in thephonebook.

Making a call

To make a call, follow the procedures be-low.

1. Push the PHONE button on the instru-ment panel or the button on thesteering wheel. The “PHONE” screenwill appear on the display.

2. Select the “Call (Phonebook)” key onthe “PHONE” menu, and push theENTER button.

3. Select the registered person’s namefrom the list, and push the ENTER but-ton. Dialing will start.

4. After the call is over, perform one ofthe following to finish the call.

a.Select the “Hang up” key and pushthe ENTER button.

b.Push the button on the steeringwheel.

c. Push the PHONE button on the in-strument panel.

There are different methods to make acall. Select one of the following optionsinstead of “Call (Phonebook)” in step 2above.

Redial:

Dial the previously dialed number again.

Call (Call Logs):

Select the name or phone number fromthe incoming or outgoing call logs.

Call (Downloaded):

Select the name or phone number fromthe downloaded call list.

Dial (Keypad):

Input the phone number manually usingthe keypad displayed on the screen. See“HOW TO USE TOUCH SCREEN” earlier inthis section.

SAA1577


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Receiving a call

When you hear a phone ring, the displaywill change to the incoming call mode. Toreceive a call, perform one of the fol-lowing procedures listed below.

a. Select the “Answer” key on the dis-play and push the ENTER button.

b. Push the PHONE button on the instru-ment panel.

c. Push the button on the steeringwheel.

There are some options available when

receiving a call. Select one of the fol-lowing displayed on the screen.

Answer:

Accept an incoming call to talk.

On Hold:

Put an incoming call on hold.

Reject Call:

Reject an incoming call.

To finish the call, perform one of the fol-lowing procedures listed below.

a. Select the “Hang up” key on the dis-play and push the ENTER button.

b. Push the PHONE button on the instru-ment panel.

c. Push the button on the steeringwheel.

During a call

There are some options available during acall. Select one of the following displayedon the screen if necessary.

Hang up:

Finish the call.

Use Handset:

Transfer the call to the cellular phone.

Mute:

Mute your voice to the person.

SAA1578 SAA1579


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Keypad:

Send a dial tone to the caller for usingnetwork services such as voice mail.

Cancel Mute:

This will appear after “Mute” is selected.Mute will be canceled.

To adjust the person’s voice to be louderor quieter, push the volume controlswitch (+ or −) on the steering wheel orturn the volume control knob on the in-strument panel while talking on thephone. This adjustment is also availablein the SETTING mode.

Phone setting

To set up the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System to your preferred settings,push the SETTING button on the instru-ment panel and select the “PHONE” keyon the display, and then push the ENTERbutton.

Phonebook:

See “Phonebook registration” in this sec-tion for adding, editing and deleting acontact.

Downloaded Phonebook:


O Download All

Download all of the contacts regis-tered in the Bluetooth cellular phone.Availability of this function dependson each cellular phone. The memorydownloading procedure from the cellu-lar phone also varies according toeach cellular phone. See cellularphone Owner’s Manual for more de-tails.

SAA1580 SAA1581


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O Delete Downloaded Phonebook

Delete a downloaded phonebook.

O Delete an Entry of Downloaded Phone-book

Delete an entry from the downloadedphonebook.

Automatic Hold:

If this item is turned on, an incoming callwill be placed on hold automatically afterseveral rings.

Use Vehicle Ringtone:

If this item is turned on, a specific ring-tone that is different from the cellularphone’s will sound when receiving a call.

Delete Call Logs:

Delete all of the incoming or outgoing calllogs from the list.

Bluetooth Setup:

See the following information for eachitem.

O Bluetooth

If this setting is turned off, the con-nection between the cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module willbe canceled.

O Bluetooth Info

Check information about the devicename, device PIN and connectionstatus.

O Pair Phone

See “Pairing Procedure” in this sec-tion.

O Priority Change

Use this command to change the pri-ority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines whichphone will be connected to the systemwhen more than one pairedBluetooth phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level ofthe active phone and asks for a newpriority level (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is alreadybeing used for another phone, the twophones will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority lev-els are:Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone B

Priority Level 3 = Phone Cand you change the priority level ofPhone C to Level 1, then:Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

O Remove Paired Phone

Delete a registered cellular phonefrom the paired list.

O Paired Phone List

Up to 5 registered cellular phones areshown on the list. If you select a cel-lular phone that is different from theone currently being connected, thenewly selected phone will be con-nected to the system.

O Edit Phone Name

Rename the registered cellular phonesusing the keypad displayed on thescreen. See “HOW TO USE TOUCHSCREEN” earlier in this section.


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

MODELS WITHOUT NAVIGATIONSYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to theON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition isinitialized, which takes a few seconds. Ifthe button is pushed before the ini-tialization completes, the system will an-nounce “Hands-free phone system notready” and will not react to voice com-mands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of theINFINITI Voice Recognition system, ob-serve the following:

O Keep the interior of the vehicle asquiet as possible. Close the windowsto eliminate surrounding noises (traf-fic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),which may prevent the system fromrecognizing voice commands correctly.

O Wait until the tone sounds beforespeaking a command. Otherwise, thecommand will not be received properly.

O Start speaking a command within 5seconds after the tone sounds.

O Speak in a natural voice without paus-ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,push and release the button locatedon the steering wheel. After the tonesounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by themicrophone, and voice feedback is givenwhen the command is accepted.

O If you need to hear the available com-mands for the current menu again, say“Help” and the system will repeatthem.

O If a command is not recognized, thesystem announces, “Command notrecognized. Please try again.” Repeatthe command in a clear voice.

O If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” or“Correction” anytime the system iswaiting for a response.

O You can cancel a command when thesystem is waiting for a response bysaying, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The systemannounces “Cancel” and ends thevoice recognition (VR) session. You

can also push the button on thesteering wheel at any time. Wheneverthe VR session is canceled, a doublebeep is played to indicate you haveexited the system.

O If you want to adjust the volume of thevoice feedback, push the volume con-trol switches (+ or -) on the steeringwheel while being provided with feed-back. You can also use the radiovolume control knob.

How to say numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the rules and examplesbelow.

O Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for“0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh six six two six twooh oh”, or

—“One eight zero zero six six two sixtwo oh oh”

O Words can be used for the first 4 dig-its places only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

—“One eight hundred six six two sixtwo oh oh”,

—NOT “One eight hundred six six twosixty two hundred, and

—NOT “One eight oh oh six six twosixty two hundred.

O Numbers can be spoken in smallgroups. The system will prompt you tocontinuing entering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

—“One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

—“six six two”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

—“six two oh oh”

O You can say “Star” for * and “Pound”for # at anytime in any position of thephone number.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

—“One five five five one two one twostar one two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

Control buttons

The control buttons for the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System are located onthe steering wheel.

TALK/PHONE SEND

Push the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See“List of voice commands” and “Duringa call” later in this section for more in-formation.

SAA1582


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PHONE END

Push the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

Getting started

The following procedures will help you getstarted using the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System with INFINITI Voice Recog-nition. For additional command options,refer to “List of voice commands” later inthis section.

Choosing a language

You can interact with the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System using English,Spanish or French.

See “How to use SETTING button” earlierin this section to change the language.

Pairing procedure

1. Push the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces theavailable commands.

2. Say: “Setup” qA . The system acknowl-edges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” qB . The system ac-knowledges the command and an-nounces the next set of available com-mands.

4. Say: “New phone” qC . The system ac-knowledges the command and asksyou to initiate pairing from the phonehandset qD .

When you are asked to enter a PINcode for pairing your Bluetooth cellu-

lar phone, operate it to enter the code“1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardlessof the number of phones paired.

The pairing procedure of the cellularphone varies according to each cel-lular phone. See the cellular phoneOwner’s Manual for details. You canalso visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on pairing INFINITI rec-ommended cellular phones.

5. The system asks you to say a name forthe phone qE .

If the name is too long or too short,the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Also, if more than one phone is pairedand the name sounds too much like aname already used, the system tellsyou, then prompts you for a nameagain.

6. The system asks you to assign a prior-ity level qF . The priority level deter-mines which phone is active whenmore than one paired Bluetoothphone is in the vehicle. Follow the in-structions provided by the system orrefer to “Setup” later in this section


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

for more information on changing pri-orities.

7. The system will ask if you would liketo select a custom ringtone qG . Followthe instructions provided by thesystem or refer to “Setup” later in thissection for more information on se-lecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

1. Push the button on steeringwheel. A tone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” qA . The system acknowl-edges the command and announcesthe next set of available commands.

3. Say the number you wish to call qB .For example, 555-1212 can be said as“five five five one two one two.” See“How to say numbers” earlier in thissection for more information.

4. When you have finished speaking thephone number, the system repeats itback and announces the availablecommands.

5. Say: “Dial” qC . The system acknowl-edges the command and makes thecall.

For additional command options, see “Listof voice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a call

When you hear the ringtone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ringtone, press the buttonon the steering wheel to reject the call.

For additional command options, see “Listof voice commands” later in this section.

List of voice commandsWhen you push and release the but-ton on the steering wheel, you canchoose from the commands on the MainMenu. The following pages describe thesecommands and the commands in eachsub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list ofcommands currently available anytime thesystem is waiting for a response.

If you want to end an action without com-

SAA1583


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

pleting it, you can say “Cancel” or “Quit”at anytime the system is waiting for a re-sponse. The system will end the VR ses-sion. Whenever the VR session is can-celed, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previouscommand, you can say “Go back” or “Cor-rection” anytime the system is waiting fora response.

When you get used to the menus in thesystem, you can talk ahead by sayingmore than one command at a time. Forexample, say, “Call five five five one twoone two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the toneby pressing the button on the steer-ing wheel. However, if you press the

button when the system is waitingfor a response from you it will end the VRsession.

“Call”

<Name> (speak name)

If you have stored entries in the PhoneBook, you can dial a number associatedwith a name and location.

See “Phone book” later in this section tolearn how to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say thename of the phone book entry you wish tocall. The system acknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated

with the name, the system asks you tochoose the location.

Once you have confirmed the name andlocation, the system begins the call.

<Number> (speak digits)

When prompted by the system, say thenumber you wish to call. Refer to “How tosay numbers” and “Making a call by en-tering a phone number” earlier in thissection for more details.

“Redial”

Use the Redial command to call the lastnumber that was dialed within the ve-hicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command,repeats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the sys-tem announces, “There is no number toredial” and ends the VR session.

“Callback”

Use the Call Back command to dial the

SAA1584


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

number of the last incoming call withinthe vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command,repeats the number and begins dialing. Ifa call back number does not exist, thesystem announces, “There is no numberto call back” and ends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several commandoptions available. Press the buttonon the steering wheel to mute the receiv-ing voice and enter commands.

O “Help” — The system announces theavailable commands.

O “Go back/Correction” — The systemannounces “Go back,” ends the VRsession and returns to the call.

O “Cancel/Quit” — The system an-nounces “Cancel,” ends the VR ses-sion and returns to the call.

O “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use theSend command to enter numbers dur-ing a call. For example, if you were di-rected to dial an extension by an auto-mated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the com-mand and sends the tones associatedwith the numbers. The system thenends the VR session and returns tothe call.

O “Transfer Call” — Use the Transfer Callcommand to transfer the call from theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone Systemto the cellular phone when privacy isdesired.

The system announces, “Transfer call.Call transferred to privacy mode.” Thesystem then ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Callcommand again to return to a hands-free call through the vehicle.

O “Mute” — Use the Mute command tomute your voice so the other partycannot hear it. Use the mute commandagain to unmute your voice.

NOTE:

If the other party ends the call or the cellu-lar phone network connection is lost whilethe Mute feature is on, the Mute featuremay need to be reset to “off.”

“Phone book”

The Phone Book stores up to 40 namesfor each phone paired with the system.Each name can have up to 4locations/phone numbers associated withit.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

SAA1585


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

“New Entry”

Use the New Entry command to store anew name in the system.

When prompted by the system, say thename you would like to give the newentry.

For example, say: “Mary.”

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like aname already stored, the system tellsyou, then prompts you for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name andyou confirm it is correct, the system asksfor a location (Home, Office, Mobile orOther).

For example, say: “Home.”

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phonenumber or to transfer a phone numberstored in the cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice com-mand:

For example, say: “five five five one two

one two.” See “How to say numbers” ear-lier in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in thecellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to ini-tiate the transfer from the phone handset.The new contact phone number will betransferred from the cellular phone viathe Bluetooth communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellularphone Owner’s Manual for details. Youcan also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on transferring phonenumbers from INFINITI recommended cel-lular phones.

The system repeats the number andprompts you for the next command. Whenyou have finished entering numbers,choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, locationand number. The system then asks if youwould like to store another location forthe same name. If you do not wish tostore another location, the system endsthe VR session.

“Edit”

Use the Edit command to alter an existingphone book entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or4th phone number to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say thename of the entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name andasks you for the location you would liketo edit.

Say the name of the location.

The system acknowledges the location.

The system will ask you to say a phonenumber or to transfer a phone numberstored in the cellular phone’s memory.

To enter a phone number by voice com-mand:

For example, say: “five five five one twoone two.” See “How to say numbers” ear-lier in this section for more information.

To transfer a phone number stored in thecellular phone’s memory (if so equipped):

Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to ini-tiate the transfer from the phone handset.The new contact phone number will betransferred from the cellular phone via


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

the Bluetooth communication link.

The transfer procedure varies according toeach cellular phone. See the cellularphone Owner’s Manual for details. Youcan also visit www.infiniti.com/bluetoothfor instructions on transferring phonenumbers from INFINITI recommended cel-lular phones.

The system repeats the number andprompts you for the next command. Whenyou have finished entering numbers,choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, locationand number, then announces that the en-try has been stored. The system thenends the VR session.

“Delete”

Use the Delete command to erase one en-try from the phone book, all entries fromthe phone book, the current redialnumber or the current call back number.

To delete entries from the phone book,say a name or “All entries” whenprompted by the system.

The system acknowledges the commandand asks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call

back number, say “redial number” or “callback number” when prompted by the sys-tem.

If a redial number or a call back numberexists, the system deletes them withoutasking for confirmation.

If there is no number for the entry you aretrying to delete, the system says so andends the VR session.

“List Name”

Use the List Names command to hear allthe names and locations in the phonebook.

The system recites the phone book en-tries but does not include the actualphone numbers. When the playback ofthe list is complete the system ends theVR session.

You can stop the playback of the list atany time by pressing the button onthe steering wheel. The system ends theVR session.

“Memo pad”

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 6voice memos, each up to 20 secondslong.

“Play”

The system plays back all the memos inthe order of newest to oldest. The systemends the VR session.

If there are no memos recorded, thesystem announces “No messages toplay.” The system ends the VR session.

SAA1586


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

“Record”

The system announces “Recording” and atone sounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to recordclearly. When you are done, press the

or button on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone soundsto end the VR session.

If the memo pad is full, the system asks ifyou wish to record over the oldest memo.

“Delete”

The Delete command erases all memos.The system asks you to confirm this ac-tion before deleting all memos.

“Setup”

Use the Setup command to change op-tions associated with the BluetoothHands-Free Phone System.

“Pair Phone”

Use the Pair Phone command to pair aphone to the Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System.

When you are asked to enter a PIN code forpairing your Bluetooth cellular phone, op-erate it to enter the code “1234”.

The code is always “1234” regardless ofthe number of phones paired.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try topair a sixth phone, the system announcesthat you must first delete one phone orreplace an existing phone.

If you try to pair a phone that has alreadybeen paired to your vehicle’s system, thesystem announces the name the phone isalready using. The pairing procedure willthen be canceled.

When prompted by the system, choosefrom the following commands:

O “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing aphone” earlier in this section.

O “Replace phone” — The system an-nounces the names of the phones al-ready paired and asks which youwould like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phoneyou wish to replace, the paring proce-dure will begin. Refer to “Pairing pro-cedure” earlier in this section.

O “List phone” — See the descriptionbelow.

“List Phones”

Use the List Phone command to hear thenames of the phones currently paired. Ifno phones are paired, the system an-

SAA1587


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

nounces, “No paired phones to list.” Thesystem then ends the VR session.

“Select Phone”

Use the Select Phone command to selecta phone of lesser priority when two ormore phones paired with BluetoothHands-Free Phone System are in the ve-hicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phoneand confirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the se-lected phone remains active until the igni-tion switch is turned OFF or you select anew phone.

“Change Priority”

Use the Change Priority command tochange the priority level of the activephone.

The priority level determines which phoneis active when more than one pairedBluetooth phone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of theactive phone and asks for a new prioritylevel (1, 2, 3, 4, 5).

If the new priority level is already beingused for another phone, the two phones

will swap priority levels.

For example, if the current priority levelsare:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of PhoneC to Level 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete Phone”

Use the Delete Phone command to deletea specific phone or all phones from theBluetooth Hands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of thephones already paired with the system andtheir priority level. The system then givesyou the option to delete a specific phone,all phones or listen to the list again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or allphones, the system asks you to confirmthis action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associated

phone book for that phone will also be de-leted.

“Select Ring tone”

Use the Select Ring tone command to se-lect the tone heard in the vehicle when anincoming call is received.

The system announces the name of theactive phone and asks you to choose fromthe following commands:

O “Ringtone” — The system plays a ring-tone and asks if you would like to se-lect that tone. If you say no, thesystem plays the next ringtone avail-able and continues to cycle throughthe ringtones until you select one orquit.

O “Silent” — The system asks you toconfirm your wish to disable the ring-tone.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-ofdialect users to train the system to improverecognition accuracy. By repeating anumber of commands, the users can createa voice model of their own voice that isstored in the system. The system is ca-pable of storing a different speaker adapta-


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

tion model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system willuse memory A to store the model. Ifmemory A is in use and memory B isavailable, the system will use memory Bto store the model. If both of the memorylocations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory locationshould be overwritten.

Training procedure

The procedure for training a voice is asfollows.

1. Position the vehicle in a reasonablyquiet outdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the enginerunning, the parking brake on, and thetransmission in Park.

3. Press and hold the button formore than 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode.

5. Press the button.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is se-lected automatically. If both memory

locations are already in use, thesystem will prompt you to overwriteone. Follow the instructions providedby the system.

7. When preparation is complete and youare ready to begin, the press the

button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Followthe instructions provided by thesystem.

9. When training is finished, the systemwill tell you an adequate number ofphrases have been recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say yourname. Follow the instructions to regis-ter your name.

11. The system will announce thatspeaker adaptation has been com-pleted and the system is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

O The button is pressed for morethan 5 seconds in SA mode.

O The vehicle is driven during SA mode.

O The ignition switch is pushed to theOFF or LOCK position.

Training phrases

During the SA mode, the system instructsyou to say the following phrases.

(The system will prompt you for eachphrase.)

O phone book new entry

O dial three oh four two nine

O delete call back number

O setup pair phone

O memo pad play

O eight pause nine three two pauseseven

O delete all entries

O call seven two four zero nine

O phone book delete entry

O memo pad record

O dial star two one seven oh

O Yes

O No

O select ringtone


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

O dial eight five six nine two

O Bluetooth on

O setup change priority

O call three one nine oh two

O nine seven pause pause three oh eight

O Cancel

O call back number

O call star two zero nine five

O delete phone

O dial eight three zero five one

O Home

O four three pause two nine pause zero

O delete redial number

O phone book list names

O call eight oh five four one

O Correction

O setup change ringtone

O dial seven four oh one eight

O setup main menu

O Delete

O dial nine seven two six six

O memo pad delete

O call seven six three oh one

O go back

O call five six two eight zero

O dial six six four three seven


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, try the following solu-tions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command cor-rectly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the ve-hicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it istoo noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out toimprove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong en-try from the phone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmedby using the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

INFINITI Voice Recognition allows hands-free operation of the systems equippedon this vehicle, such as the display,audio, climate control, phone and op-tional navigation systems.

To operate INFINITI Voice Recognition,push and release the TALK switch lo-cated on the steering wheel. Then speakthe command for the system you wish toactivate. The command given is picked upby the microphone, and it is performedwhen it is properly recognized. At thistime INFINITI Voice Recognition will pro-vide a voice and message (in the centerdisplay) to inform you of the command re-sults.

COMMAND LIST

Displaying command list

If you are controlling the system by voicecommands for the first time or do notknow the appropriate voice command,perform the following procedure for dis-playing the voice command list and helplist.

1. Push the INFO button on the instru-ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” keyusing the INFINITI controller and pushthe ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Command List” keyusing the INFINITI controller and pushthe ENTER button.

4. Highlight a category using the INFINITIcontroller and push the ENTER button.

SAA1545 SAA1590

INFINITI VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM(models with navigation system)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

5. Highlight an item using the INFINITIcontroller and push the ENTER button.

6. If necessary, scroll the screen usingthe INFINITI controller to view the en-tire list.

7. Press the BACK button to return to theprevious screen.

SAA1593


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

List of help commands

Navigation Help:

See the separate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

Audio Help:

O Music Box

COMMAND ACTION

Music Box Play Turns on the “Music Box” hard-disk drive audio system.

Play by Mood Plays the specified song matching your mood.

Relaxing Music Plays the specified relaxing music.

Lively Music Plays the specified lively music.

Slow Music Plays the specified slow music.

Upbeat Music Plays the specified upbeat music.

Play by Category Plays the specified song in the specified category.

My Favorites Plays your favorite song.

Rarely Played Plays a rarely played song.

Hit Songs Plays the specified hit song.

Kids’ Songs Plays the specified song for children.

Music Box OFF Turns on the “Music Box” off.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Radio

COMMAND ACTION

Radio Play Turns the radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Radio AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.

Radio FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.

Tune <87.7 - 107.9> Tunes to the specified FM frequency.

Tune <530 - 1710> Tunes to the specified AM frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

O Satellite

COMMAND ACTION

Satellite Radio Turns the SAT radio on, selecting the station and band last played.

Satellite Radio Channel <1 - 255> Tunes to the specified SAT frequency.

Preset <A - C> <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <A - C> Switches directly to the specified preset station in the specified preset bank.

Preset <1 - 6> Switches directly to the specified preset bank.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Radio OFF Turns the radio off.

Radio Menu Displays the radio menu.

O CD

COMMAND ACTION

CD Play Starts to play a CD.

Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track.

Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified MP3 folder and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track on the specified MP3 folder.

CD OFF Stops the CD playback.

CD Text Displays the information about the track currently being played.

CD Menu Displays the CD menu.

O Changer

COMMAND ACTION

CD Changer Play Starts to play the CD changer.

Disc <1 - 6> Switches to the specified CD and plays the first file.


Disc <1 - 6> Track <1 - 99> Switches to the specified track in the specified CD.

CD Changer OFF Stops the CD playback.

CD Changer Menu Displays the CD menu.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Audio

COMMAND ACTION

Audio Play Turns the audio system on.

Audio OFF Turns the audio system off.

O CF

COMMAND ACTION

Compact Flash Play Starts to play the files saved in the CompactFlash card.


Folder <1 - 255> Selects the specified folder in the CompactFlash card and plays the first file.

Folder <1 - 255> Track <1 - 512> Switches to the specified track in the specified folder in the CompactFlash card.

Compact Flash OFF Stops the playback of the CompactFlash card.

Compact Flash Text Displays the information about the file currently being played.

Compact Flash Menu Displays the CompactFlash menu.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Phone Help:

COMMAND ACTION

Phone Redial Redials the phone number last dialed.

Phone Dial Dials the phone number given in the command.

Phone Dial <Phone number>Dials the phone number given in the command. Speak the phone number in one sequence. The number is automatically di-aled.

Phonebook Shows the first page of the “Phonebook” list.

Phonebook <Voicetag> Dials the phone number registered in the specified “voicetag”.

Outgoing Calls Shows the outgoing call history (1 to 5).

Incoming Calls Shows the incoming call history (1 to 5).

Phone Select Selects another cellular phone registered in the system.

Play Phonebook Outputs the “Voicetags” registered in the system.

Climate Control Help:

COMMAND ACTION

Climate Control Turns the climate control system on and operates it in the AUTO mode.

Climate Control OFF Turns the climate control system off.

Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the climate control temperature to the value given in the command.

Driver Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the driver’s side temperature to the value given in the command.

Passenger Temperature <60 - 90> Sets the passenger’s side temperature to the value given in the command.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Others Help:

O Vehicle

COMMAND ACTION

Fuel Economy Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

Maintenance Displays the Maintenance screen.

Status Displays the Status screen.

O Help

COMMAND ACTION

Help Displays the command list.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Displaying user guide

You can confirm how to use voice com-mands by displaying a simplified UserGuide or by displaying simulated voicecommand operations.

1. Push the INFO button on the instru-ment panel.

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” keyusing the INFINITI controller and pushthe ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “User Guide” key usingthe INFINITI controller and push theENTER button.

4. Highlight an item using the INFINITIcontroller and push the ENTER button.

Available items:

O Getting Started

Displays the simplified User Guide de-scribing how to operate the voice rec-ognition system.

O Placing Calls

Simulates voice commands to make aphone call by voice command opera-tion.

O Help on Speaking

Displays useful tips for how to cor-rectly speak commands in order forthem to be properly recognized by thesystem.

O Voice Recognition Settings

Displays the description of voice rec-ognition settings.

O Adapting the System to Your Voice

Simulates an example of the operationto adapt the system to your voice.

For the items “Finding Points of Interest”,“Using the Address Book” and “Finding aStreet Address”, refer to the separateNavigation system Owner’s Manual.

USING THE SYSTEM

Initialization

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, INFINITI Voice Recognition isinitialized, which takes a few seconds.When completed, the system is ready toaccept voice commands. If the TALK

switch is pushed before the initial-ization completes, a beep sounds.

SAA1594 SAA1595


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Before starting

To get the best performance out ofINFINITI Voice Recognition, observe thefollowing:

O Keep the interior of the vehicle asquiet as possible. Close the windowsto eliminate the surrounding noises(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),which may prevent the system fromrecognizing the voice commands cor-rectly.

O When the climate control is in theAUTO mode, the fan speed decreasesautomatically for easy recognition.

O Wait until a tone sounds beforespeaking a command.

O Speak in a natural voice without paus-ing between words.

Giving voice command

1. Push and release the TALKswitch located on the steering

wheel.

2. A list of commands appears on thescreen, and the system announces,“Please say a command”.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon onthe screen changes from to

, speak “Help”, “Voice help” or“Command list”.

SAA1588 SAA1589


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

4. The system confirms the recognizedcommand, and a list of command listcategories appears.

5. Locate your desired voice command inthe list using the INFINITI controller.Selecting a category lists its voicecommands.

6. Push the TALK switch and enterthe command.

Operating tips

O Voice commands cannot be acceptedwhen the icon is .

O The list displayed can be scrolled bytilting the ENTER switch on thesteering wheel.

O If the command is not recognized, thesystem announces, “Please sayagain”. Repeat the command in a clearvoice.

O Push the BACK button once to returnto the previous screen.

O If you want to cancel the command,push and hold the TALK switchfor 1 second. The message “Voice can-celed” will be announced.

O Push the TALK switch again topause the operation. Push the TALK

switch to restart the operation.

O If you want to adjust the volume of thesystem feedback, push the volumecontrol buttons (+ or −) on thesteering wheel or use the audiosystem volume knob while the systemis making an announcement.

How to speak numbers

INFINITI Voice Recognition requires a cer-tain way to speak numbers in voice com-mands. Refer to the following examples.

(General rule: Either “zero” or “oh” canbe used for “0”).

Radio frequencies:

Speak radio frequencies according to thefollowing examples:

O 930 kHz— “Tune nine thirty AM.”— “Tune nine thirty.”

O 1000 kHz— “Ten hundred.”

O 1040 kHz— “Tune ten forty.”

O 1710 kHz— “Tune seventeen ten.”

O 97.9 MHz— “Tune ninety seven point nine.”

O 100.5 MHz— “Tune one hundred point five.”

O 101.1 MHz— “Tune one oh one point one FM.”

Temperatures (climate control):

Speak temperatures according to the fol-lowing examples:

O 74°F— “Temperature seventy four.”

SAA1590


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O 21.5°C— “Temperature twenty one point

five.”— “Temperature twenty one and a

half.”

O 19.0°C— “Temperature nineteen point zero.”— “Temperature nineteen point oh.”— “Temperature nineteen.”

Phone numbers:

Speak phone numbers according to thefollowing examples:

O 1-800-662-6200

— “Dial one eight oh oh six six twosix two oh oh.”

— “Dial one eight hundred six six twosix two oh oh.”

— “Dial one eight zero zero six sixtwo oh oh.”

Note 1: For the best voice recognitionphone dialing results, say phone numbersas single digits.

Note 2: You cannot say 555-6000 as “fivefive five six thousands”.

Personal vocabulary (voicetags)

INFINITI Voice Recognition provides thefunction called “voicetags,” which can beassociated with the phone and the navi-gation system (if so equipped). Usingyour own voice, 40 voicetags can be reg-istered in the “Phonebook” (phone) and10 locations can be registered in the “Ad-dress Book” (navigation system).

See “Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem” earlier in this section and/or theseparate Navigation System Owner’sManual (if so equipped) for the method of“voicetag” registration.

VOICE COMMAND LEARNINGFUNCTION

The voice recognition system has a func-tion to learn the user’s voice for bettervoice recognition performance. Thesystem can memorize the voices of up tothree persons.

Having the system learn theuser’s voice

1. Push the SETTING button on the in-strument panel, highlight the “Others”key on the display and then push theENTER button.

SAA1601


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

2. Highlight the “Voice Recognition” keyand then push the ENTER button.

3. Highlight the “Voice CommandLearning” key and then push theENTER button.

4. Select the user whose voice is memo-rized by the system and push theENTER button.

5. Select a category to be learned by thesystem from the following list andthen push the ENTER button.

O Audio

O Phone

O Vehicle Info.

O Others

The voice commands in the categoryare displayed.

6. Select a voice command and thenpush the ENTER button.

SAA1606 SAA1605


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The voice recognition system starts.

7. The system requests that you repeat acommand after a tone.

8. After the tone sounds and the icon onthe screen changes from to

, speak the command that thesystem requested.

9. When the system has recognized thevoice command, the voice of the useris learned.

Push the switch or BACK button toreturn to the previous screen.

If the system has learned the commandcorrectly, the voice command indicator onthe screen turns on.

SAA1607


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

Learning function settings

Edit Name:

Edit the user name using the keypad dis-played on the screen.

Store Result:

When this item is turned to ON, the voicerecognition system can easily recognizethe user’s voice that it has learned.

Reset Result:

Resets the user’s voice that the voice rec-ognition system has learned.

Continuous Learning:

When this item is turned to ON, you canhave the system learn the voice com-mands in succession, without selectingcommands one by one.

SAA1608


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voice commands without difficulty. If problems are encountered, follow the solutions givenin this guide for the appropriate error.Where the solutions are listed by number, try each solution in turn, starting with number one, until the problem is resolved.

Symptom/error message SolutionDisplays “COMMAND NOT REC-OGNIZED” or the system fails tointerpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see Command list in this section.2. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.NOTE:If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.4. If optional words of the command have been omitted, then the command should be tried with these in place.

The system consistently selectsthe wrong voicetag.

1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by giving the Radio Directory orPhone Directory command.

2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

MEMO


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving.............. 5-2Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .................. 5-2Three-way catalyst....................................... 5-3Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ..... 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover..................... 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ............. 5-6All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safetyprecautions (For AWD models) ................... 5-6

Push-button ignition switch .............................. 5-7Push-button ignition switch positions ......... 5-8Intelligent Key battery discharge ................. 5-8

Before starting the engine ................................ 5-9Starting the engine........................................... 5-9Driving the vehicle .......................................... 5-10

Automatic transmission.............................. 5-10Manual transmission ................................. 5-15

Parking brake.................................................. 5-16Cruise control .................................................. 5-17

Precautions on cruise control ..................... 5-17Cruise control operations........................... 5-18

Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system (if soequipped)........................................................ 5-19

Selecting the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode............................................. 5-20

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode ... 5-21Precautions on vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode ............................................ 5-21Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control modeoperation................................................... 5-23Conventional (fixed speed) cruise controlmode......................................................... 5-36Preview function (for Intelligent CruiseControl system equipped models) .............. 5-41

Break-in schedule ........................................... 5-41Increasing fuel economy.................................. 5-41All-wheel drive (AWD) (if so equipped) ............ 5-42Parking/parking on hills ................................. 5-44Power steering................................................ 5-45Brake system .................................................. 5-45

Braking precautions................................... 5-45Brake assist.................................................... 5-46

Brake assist .............................................. 5-46Preview function (Intelligent CruiseControl system equipped models) ............. 5-46Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ................. 5-49

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ........... 5-50Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS) system (if soequipped) ...................................................... 5-52

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Cold weather driving....................................... 5-52Freeing a frozen door lock ......................... 5-52Antifreeze .................................................. 5-52Battery....................................................... 5-52Draining of coolant water .......................... 5-52

Tire equipment .......................................... 5-53Special winter equipment .......................... 5-53Driving on snow or ice............................... 5-53Engine block heater (if so equipped) ......... 5-54

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the support ofothers alone in your vehicle. Pets shouldnot be left alone either. They could acci-dentally injure themselves or othersthrough inadvertent operation of the ve-hicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, tempera-tures in a closed vehicle could quicklybecome high enough to cause severe orpossibly fatal injuries to people or ani-mals.

O Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with thetrunk closed, when not in use, and pre-vent children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (Carbon monoxide)

WARNING

Do not breathe exhaust gases; they containcolorless and odorless carbon monoxide.Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can causeunconsciousness or death.

O If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicle in-spected immediately.

O Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

O Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

O Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could be drawninto the passenger compartment. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open,follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation buttonto off and the fan control at 4 (high)

to circulate the air.

O If electrical wiring or other cable connec-tions must pass to a trailer through theseal on the trunk lid or the body, followthe manufacturer’s recommendation toprevent carbon monoxide entry into thevehicle.

O If a special body, camper or other equip-ment is added for recreational or otherusage, follow the manufacturer’s recom-mendation to prevent carbon monoxideentry into the vehicle. Do not occupythese areas while the engine is runningeven if the vehicle is parked. Some recre-ational vehicle appliances such asstoves, refrigerator, heaters, etc. mayalso generate carbon monoxide.

O The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanic when-ever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING ANDDRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emissioncontrol device installed in the exhaustsystem. Exhaust gases in the three-waycatalyst are burned at high temperaturesto help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

O The exhaust gas and the exhaust systemare very hot. Keep people, animals orflammable materials away from the ex-haust system components.

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

CAUTION

O Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline seriously reducethe three-way catalyst’s ability to helpreduce exhaust pollutants.

O Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keepdriving if the engine misfires, or if no-ticeable loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions are detected.Have the vehicle inspected promptly byan INFINITI dealer.

O Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

O Do not race the engine while warming itup.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-vided), should be checked monthly whencold and inflated to the inflation pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufac-turer on the vehicle placard or tire infla-tion pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indi-cated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-tion pressure label, you should determinethe proper tire inflation pressure for thosetires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illumi-nates a low tire pressure telltale whenone or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. Accordingly, when the lowtire pressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to theproper pressure. Driving on a significantlyunder-inflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

Starting and driving 5-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-rect tire pressure, even if under-inflationhas not reached the level to trigger illumi-nation of the TPMS low tire pressure tell-tale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating prop-erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressure tell-tale. When the system detects a malfunc-tion, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain con-tinuously illuminated. This sequence willcontinue upon subsequent vehiclestart-ups as long as the malfunction ex-ists. When the malfunction indicator is il-luminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as in-tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur fora variety of reasons, including the instal-lation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels onyour vehicle to ensure that the replace-ment or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information

O The TPMS does not monitor the tirepressure of the spare tire.

O The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

O The low tire pressure warning lightdoes not automatically turn off whenthe tire pressure is adjusted. After thetire is inflated to the recommendedpressure, the vehicle must be drivenat speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) toactivate the TPMS and turn off the lowtire pressure warning light. Use a tirepressure gauge to check the tire pres-sure.

O Tire pressure rises and falls de-pending on the heat caused by the ve-hicle’s operation and the outside tem-perature. Low outside temperature canlower the temperature of the air insidethe tire which can cause a lower tireinflation pressure. This may cause thelow tire pressure warning light to illu-minate. If the warning light illuminatesin low ambient temperature, check thetire pressure for all four tires.

For additional information, see “Low tirepressure warning light” in the “2. Instru-ments and controls” section and “Tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)” inthe “6. In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning light illu-minates or LOW PRESSURE informationis displayed on the monitor screen whiledriving, avoid sudden steering maneu-vers or abrupt braking, reduce vehiclespeed, pull off the road to a safe locationand stop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occur andmay lead to an accident and could resultin serious personal injury. Check the tirepressure for all four tires. Adjust the tirepressure to the recommended COLD tirepressure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If the lightstill comes on while driving after ad-justing the tire pressure, a tire may beflat. If you have a flat tire, replace it witha spare tire as soon as possible. (See“Flat tire” in the “6. In case of emer-gency” section for changing a flat tire.)


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flashfor approximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Contact yourINFINITI dealer as soon as possible for tirereplacement and/or system resetting.


O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tiresealant into the tires, as this may cause amalfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

CAUTION

O The low tire pressure warning systemmay not function properly when thewheels are equipped with tire chains orthe wheels are buried in snow.

O Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows.This may cause poor reception of the sig-nals from the tire pressure sensors, andthe TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-porarily interfere with the operation of theTPMS and cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate. Some ex-amples are:

O Facilities or electric devices usingsimilar radio frequencies are near thevehicle.

O If a transmitter set to similar frequen-cies is being used in or near the ve-hicle.

O If a computer (or similar equipment) ora DC/AC converter is being used in ornear the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause un-desired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe andprudent manner may result in loss of controlor an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces-sive speed, high speed cornering, or sud-den steering maneuvers, because thesedriving practices could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle. As with any ve-hicle, a loss of control could result in a col-lision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to rollover, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times,and avoid driving when tired. Never drivewhen under the influence of alcohol ordrugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-ness). Always wear your seat belt as out-lined in the “Seat belts” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passen-gers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury incollisions and rollovers. In a rollover


w 07.2.19/V36-D X

crash, an unbelted or improperly beltedperson is significantly more likely to be in-jured or killed than a person properlywearing a seat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol ordrugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reducescoordination, delays reaction time and im-pairs judgement. Driving after drinking alco-hol increases the likelihood of being in-volved in an accident injuring yourself andothers. Additionally, if you are injured in anaccident, alcohol can increase the severityof the injury.

INFINITI is committed to safe driving. Youmust not drive under the influence of al-cohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol related acci-dents. Although the local laws vary onwhat is considered to be legally intoxi-cated, the fact is that alcohol affects allpeople differently and most people under-estimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’tmix!

And that’s true for drugs too (over thecounter, prescription, and illegal drugs).Don’t drive if your ability to operate yourvehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, orsome other physical condition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVINGSAFETY PRECAUTIONS (For AWDmodels)

WARNING

O Do not drive beyond the performance ca-pability of the tires, even with AWD en-gaged. Accelerating quickly, sharpsteering maneuvers or sudden brakingmay cause loss of control.

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Install tire chains on the rearwheels when driving on slippery roadsand drive carefully.

O This vehicle is not designed for offroad

(rough road) use. Do not drive on sandyor muddy roads that tires may get stuckin.

O For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off the groundand shift the transmission to any D(drive) or R (reverse) position. Doing somay result in transmission damage orunexpected vehicle movement whichcould result in serious vehicle damageor personal injury.

O Do not attempt to test an AWD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, evenif the other two wheels are raised of theground. Doing so may result in transmis-sion damage or unexpected vehiclemovement which could result in seriousvehicle damage or personal injury.

O When a wheel is off the ground due to anunlevel surface, do not spin the wheelexcessively.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignitionswitch while driving the vehicle except in anemergency. (The engine will stop when theignition switch is pushed 3 consecutivetimes or the ignition switch is pushed andheld for more than 2 seconds.) If the enginestops while the vechicle is being driven, thiscould lead to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button ignitionswitch, be sure to move the selector leverto the P (Park) position (for automatictransmission model) or the shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position (for manual trans-mission model).

When the ignition switch is pushedwithout depressing the brake pedal (auto-matic transmission model) or the clutchpedal (manual transmission model), theignition switch position will change as fol-lows:

O Push center once to change to ACC.O Push center two times to change to ON.O Push center three times to change to

OFF. (No position illuminates.)O Push center four times to return to ACC.O Open or close any door to return to

LOCK during the OFF position.

The ignition switch is equipped with ananti-theft steering lock device.

The ignition lock is designed so that theignition switch position cannot beswitched to OFF until the selector lever ismoved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot bepushed toward the LOCK position, pro-ceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P po-sition.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignitionswitch position will change to the ONposition.

3. Push the ignition switch again to theLOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the Pposition if the ignition switch is in the ONposition and the brake pedal is depressed.

In order for the steering wheel to belocked, it must be turned about 1/8 of aright or left turn from the straight up posi-tion.

To lock the steering wheel, push the igni-tion switch to the LOCK position. To unlockthe steering wheel, push the ignitionswitch. If the steering lock release mal-

SSD0597

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH


w 06.9.15/V36-D X

function indicator appears on the dot ma-trix liquid crystal display, push the push-button ignition switch again while lightlyturning the steering wheel right and left.See “Dot matrix liquid crystal display” inthe “2. Instruments and controls” section.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,the push-button ignition switch cannot beturned from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-tion are displayed on the dot matrix liquidcrystal display between the speedometerand tachometer. See “Dot matrix liquidcrystal display” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCHPOSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position):

The ignition switch can only be locked inthis position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked whenit is pushed to the ACC position while car-rying the Intelligent Key or with the Intel-ligent Key inserted in the port.

ACC (Accessories):

This position activates electrical accesso-ries such as the radio, when the engine isnot running.

ON (Normal operating position):

This position turns on the ignition systemand electrical accessories.

OFF:

The engine can be turned off withoutlocking the steering wheel.

The ignition lock is designed so that theignition switch cannot be pushed to theLOCK position until the selector lever ismoved to the P position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the push-button ignition switch in ACC or ON posi-tions when the engine is not running for anextended period. This can discharge the bat-tery.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERYDISCHARGE

If the battery of the Intelligent Key is al-most discharged, the guide light qB of theIntelligent Key port qA blinks and the indi-cator appears on the dot matrix liquidcrystal display. See “Dot matrix liquidcrystal display” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section.

In this case, inserting the Intelligent Keyinto the port q1 allows you to start theengine. Make sure that the key ring sidefaces backward as illustrated. Insert the

SSD0595


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Intelligent Key in the port until it islatched and secured.

Pull the Intelligent Key to remove it fromthe port.

NOTE:

The Intelligent Key port does not chargethe Intelligent Key battery. If you see thelow battery indicator, replace the batteryas soon as possible. See “Intelligent Keybattery replacement” in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

CAUTION

O Never place anything except the Intelli-gent Key in the Intelligent Key port.Doing so may cause damage to theequipment.

O Make sure the Intelligent Key is in thecorrect direction when inserting it to theIntelligent Key port. The engine may notstart if it is in the wrong direction.

O Remove the Intelligent Key from the In-telligent Key port after the ignitionswitch is pushed to the OFF position.

O Make sure the area around the vehicleis clear.

O Make sure the periodical maintenanceis being performed.

O Make sure all windows and lights areclean.

O Make sure of the proper inflation oftires and their conditions.

O Make sure to lock all doors.

O Make sure to adjust seats and headrestraints.

O Make sure to adjust inside and out-side mirrors.

O Make sure to fasten seat belts and di-rect all passengers to do likewise.

O Make sure to check the operation ofwarning lights when the ignitionswitch is pushed to the ON position.

1. Apply the parking brake.


Move the selector lever to the P or Nposition. (P is recommended.)

The starter is designed so that it doesnot operate unless the selector leveris in either of the above positions.


Move the shift lever to the N position.Depress the clutch pedal fully to thefloor.

The starter is designed so that it doesnot operate unless the clutch pedal isfully depressed.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-sition. Depress the brake pedal andpush the ignition switch to start theengine.

To start the engine immediately, pushand release the ignition switch whiledepressing the brake pedal with theignition switch in any position.

If the engine starts, but fails to run, re-peat the above procedure.

O If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and whileholding, push the ignition switch for up to15 seconds to crank the engine. Releasethe accelerator pedal when the enginestarts.

O If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the accelerator pedalall the way to the floor and hold it. Crankthe engine for 5 to 6 seconds. After crank-ing the engine, release the acceleratorpedal. Crank the engine with your foot offthe accelerator pedal by depressing thebrake pedal and pushing the push-buttonignition switch to start the engine. If theengine starts, but fails to run, repeat theabove procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than 15seconds at a time. If the engine does notstart, push the ignition switch to OFF andwait 10 seconds before cranking again, oth-erwise the starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30seconds after starting. Do not race the

engine while warming it up. Drive atmoderate speed for a short distancefirst, especially in cold weather. Incold weather, keep the engine runningfor a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes beforeshutting it off. Starting and stoppingthe engine over a short period of timemay make the vehicle more difficult tostart.

5. To stop the engine, shift the selectorlever to the P position (Automatictransmission models) or move theshift lever to the N position (Manualtransmission models), and push theignition switch to the OFF position.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

5 speed automatic transmission

The automatic transmission in your ve-hicle is electronically controlled by atransmission control module to producemaximum efficiency and smooth opera-tion.

Shown on the following pages are the rec-ommended operating procedures for thistransmission. Follow these procedures formaximum vehicle performance anddriving enjoyment.

Starting the vehicle

After starting the engine, fully depress thefoot brake pedal and push the selector le-ver button before shifting the selectorlever to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or Manual shiftmode position. Be sure the vehicle is fullystopped before attempting to shift the se-lector lever.

This automatic transmission model is de-signed so that the foot brake pedal mustbe depressed before shifting from P (Park)to any drive position while the ignitionswitch position is ON.

The selector lever cannot be moved out of

DRIVING THE VEHICLE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

the P (Park) position and into any of theother gear positions if the ignition switchis pushed to the LOCK, OFF or ACC posi-tion.

1. Keep the foot brake pedal depressedand push the selector lever button toshift into a driving gear.

2. Release the parking brake and footbrake, then gradually start the vehiclein motion.

WARNING

O Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), DS (DriveSport) or manual shift mode. Always de-press the brake pedal until shifting iscompleted. Failure to do so could causeyou to lose control and have an accident.

O Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

O On slippery roads, do not downshift.This may cause a loss of control.

O Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while vehicle is moving forward. Nevershift to P (Park), D (Drive) or DS (DriveSport) while vehicle is moving rearward.Failure to do so could cause you to losecontrol and have an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depressingthe accelerator pedal. The foot brake shouldbe used for this purpose. Shifting

To move the selector lever,

: Push the button while depressingthe brake pedal,

: Push the button,: Just move the selector lever.

After starting the engine, fully depress thebrake pedal and shift the selector leverfrom P (Park) to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), D(Drive), DS (Drive Sport) or Manual shiftmode position.

Push the button to shift into P (Park) or R(Reverse). All other positions can be se-

SSD0596


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

lected without pushing the button.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selector leveris in any position while the engine is not run-ning. Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away and resultin serious personal injury or propertydamage.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicleis parked or when starting the engine.Make sure the vehicle is completelystopped. The brake pedal must be de-pressed and the selector lever buttonpushed in to move the selector lever from N(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).Apply the parking brake. When parking ona hill, apply the parking brake first, thenmove the selector lever to the P (Park) po-sition.

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped.

R (Reverse):

Use this position to back up. Always besure the vehicle is completely stopped be-fore selecting R (Reverse). The brake pedalmust be depressed and the selector leverbutton pushed in to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-gaged. The engine can be started in thisposition. You may shift to N (Neutral) andrestart a stalled engine while the vehicleis moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forwarddriving.

DS (Drive Sport) mode

When the selector lever is shifted fromthe D (Drive) position to the manual shiftgate, the transmission enters the DS(Drive Sport) mode.

Moving the selector lever to the DS (Drive

Sport) position allows you to enjoy com-fortable driving on a winding road andfeel smooth acceleration or decelerationon a hilly road by moving in a lower gearautomatically.

When canceling the DS mode, return theselector lever to the D (Drive) position.The transmission returns to the normaldriving mode.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is in the DS (DriveSport) position, the transmission is readyfor the manual shift mode. Shift rangescan be selected manually by moving theselector lever up or down, or pulling theright-side or left-side paddle shifter.

When shifting up, move the selector leverto the + (up) side or pull the right-sidepaddle shifter (+) qA . The transmissionshifts to the higher range.

When shifting down, move the selector le-ver to the − (down) side or pull the left-

side paddle shifter (−) qB . The transmis-sion shifts to the lower range.

When canceling the manual shift mode,return the selector lever to the D position.The transmission returns to the normaldriving mode.

When you pull the paddle shifter while inthe D (Drive) position, the transmissionwill shift to the upper or lower range tem-porarily. The transmission will automati-cally return to the D (Drive) position aftera short period of time. If you want to re-turn to the D (Drive) position manually,pull and hold the paddle shifter for about1.5 seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range isdisplayed on the position indicator in themeter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one asfollows:

M1→←

M2→←

M3→←

M4→←

M5

M5 (5th):

Use this position for all normal forward driv-ing.

M4 (4th):

For driving up or down long slopes whereengine braking would be advantageous.M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking ondownhill grades.M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steephills slowly or driving slowly throughdeep snow, or for maximum enginebraking on steep downhill grades.

O Remember not to drive at high speedsfor extended periods of time in lowerthan 5th gear. This reduces fueleconomy.

O Moving the selector lever rapidly tothe same side twice will shift theranges in succession.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

O In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion automatically shifts down to 1stgear before the vehicle comes to a

SSD0599


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

stop. When accelerating again, it isnecessary to shift up to the desiredrange.

Accelerator downshift— In D position —

For passing or hill climbing, fully depressthe accelerator pedal to the floor. Thisshifts the transmission down into thelower gear, depending on the vehiclespeed.

Fail-safe

When the fail-safe operation occurs, notethat the transmission will be locked inany of the forward gears according to thecondition.

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. This will occureven if all electrical circuits are functioningproperly. In this case, push the switch tothe OFF position and wait for 3 seconds.Then push the ignition switch back to theON position. The vehicle should return toits normal operating condition. If it doesnot return to its normal operating condi-tion, have an INFINITI dealer check thetransmission and repair if necessary.

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,the selector lever may not be moved fromthe P (Park) position even with the brakepedal depressed and the selector leverbutton pushed.

To move the selector lever, perform thefollowing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF orLOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock cover qA using asuitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock qB as illus-trated.

5. Push the selector lever button qC andmove the selector lever to N (Neutral)position qD while holding down theshift lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion to unlock the steering wheel. Nowthe vehicle may be moved to the desiredlocation.

If the battery is discharged completely,the steering wheel cannot be unlocked.Do not move the vehicle with the steeringwheel locked.

If the lever cannot be moved out of P(Park), have an INFINITI dealer check theautomatic transmission system as soonas possible.

SSD0598


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Shifting

To change gears, or when upshifting ordownshifting, fully depress the clutchpedal, shift into the appropriate gear,then slowly and smoothly release theclutch.

This vehicle is equipped with a shortthrow shifter manual transmission. To en-sure smooth gear changes, fully depressthe clutch pedal before operating the shiftlever. If the clutch pedal is not fully de-pressed before the transmission is

shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans-mission damage could occur.

Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gear in se-quence according to the vehicle speed.

To back up, depress the shift lever andthen move it to the R (Reverse) gear afterstopping the vehicle completely.

If it is difficult to move the shift lever intothe R (Reverse) or 1st gear, shift to the N(Neutral) position, and then release theclutch pedal once. Fully depress theclutch pedal again and shift into the R(Reverse) or 1st gear.

WARNING

O Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

O Do not over-rev the engine when shiftingto a lower gear. This may cause a loss ofcontrol or engine damage.

CAUTION

O Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving. This may damage theclutch.

O Fully depress the clutch pedal beforeshifting to help prevent transmissiondamage.

O Stop your vehicle completely beforeshifting into R (Reverse).

O When the vehicle is stopped for a periodof time, for example at a stop light, shiftto N (Neutral) and release the clutchpedal with the foot brake applied.

Suggested upshift speeds

Shown below are suggested vehiclespeeds for shifting into a higher gear.These suggestions relate to fuel economyand vehicle performance. Actual upshiftspeeds will vary according to road condi-tions, the weather and individual drivinghabits.

SSD0536


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

For normal acceleration in low altitude ar-eas [less than 4,000 ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 8 (13)2nd to 3rd 16 (25)3rd to 4th 25 (40)4th to 5th 30 (50)5th to 6th 33 (53)

For quick acceleration in low altitudeareas or in high altitude areas [over 4,000ft (1,219 m)]:

Gear change MPH (km/h)1st to 2nd 15 (24)2nd to 3rd 25 (40)3rd to 4th 40 (64)4th to 5th 45 (72)5th to 6th 50 (80)

Suggested maximum speed ineach gear

Downshift to a lower gear if the engine isnot running smoothly, or if you need toaccelerate.

Do not exceed the maximum suggestedspeed (shown below) in any gear. Forlevel road driving, use the highest gearsuggested for that speed. Always observe

posted speed limits, and drive accordingto the road conditions, which will ensuresafe operation. Do not over-rev the enginewhen shifting to a lower gear as it maycause engine damage or loss of vehiclecontrol.

Gear MPH (km/h)1st 39 (63)

2nd 64 (103)3rd 92 (148)4th —5th —6th —

Automatic transmission models

To apply: Fully depress the parking brakepedal q1 .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake q2 .

2. Depress the parking brake pedal q1and the parking brake will be re-leased.

3. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

SPA2331

PARKING BRAKE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Manual transmission models

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever upq1 .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brakelever slightly, push the button q2 andlower the lever completely q3 .

4. Before driving, be sure the brakewarning light goes out.

WARNING

O Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

O Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

O Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

O Do not leave children unattended in a ve-hicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

O If the cruise control system malfunc-tions, it will cancel automatically. TheSET indicator on the dot matrix crystaldisplay will then blink to warn thedriver.

O If the engine coolant temperature be-comes excessively high, the cruisecontrol system will be canceled auto-matically.

O If the SET indicator blinks, turn thecruise control main switch off andhave the system checked by yourINFINITI dealer.

O The SET indicator may sometimes blinkwhen the cruise control main switch isturned ON while pushing theRESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST orCANCEL switch. To properly set thecruise control system, perform thesteps below in the order indicated.

SPA2110

CRUISE CONTROL


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving un-der the following conditions:

O when it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed

O in heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed

O on winding or hilly roads

O on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.)

O in very windy areas

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident.

CAUTION

On manual transmission models, do notshift into N (Neutral) without depressing theclutch pedal when the cruise control is set.Should this occur, depress the clutch pedaland turn the main switch off immediately.Failure to do so may cause engine damage.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch2. SET/COAST switch3. CANCEL switch4. MAIN (ONzOFF) switch

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at aspeed between 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144km/h) without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push theMAIN switch on. The CRUISE indicator willcome on.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (TheCRUISE SET indicator will come on in theinstrument panel.) Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle will main-tain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed on winding or hilly roads. If thishappens, drive without the cruise con-trol.

To cancel the preset speed, follow any ofthese methods:

a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indi-cator will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicatorwill go out.

c) Move the selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position. The SET indicator will goout.

d) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and SET indicator willgo out.

O If you depress the brake pedal while

SSD0600


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE orSET/COAST switch and reset at thecruising speed, the cruise control willdisengage. Turn the MAIN switch offonce and then turn it on again.

O The cruise control will automaticallycancel if the vehicle slows more than8 MPH (12 km/h) below the set speed.

O If you depress the clutch pedal(Manual Transmission models) ormove the selector lever to N (Neutral)position (Automatic Transmissionmodels), the cruise control will be can-celed.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following methods:

O Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

O Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. When the vehicleattains the speed you desire, releasethe switch.

O Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

O Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch.The vehicle will resume the last set cruis-ing speed when the vehicle speed is over25 MPH (40 km/h).

The Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) systemautomatically maintains a selected dis-tance from the vehicle traveling in front ofyou according to that vehicle’s speed (upto the set speed), or at the set speedwhen the road ahead is clear.

The ICC function can be set to one of twocruise control modes:

O Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode:

For maintaining a selected distancebetween your vehicle and the vehiclein front of you up to the preset speed.

O Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode:

For cruising at a preset speed.

WARNING

O Always drive carefully and attentivelywhen using either cruise control mode.Read and understand the Owner’sManual thoroughly before using thecruise control. To avoid serious injury ordeath, do not rely on the system to pre-vent accidents or to control the ve-

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

hicle’s speed in emergency situations.Do not use cruise control except in ap-propriate road and traffic conditions.

O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode, a warning buzzer will notsound to warn you if you are too close tothe vehicle ahead. Pay special attentionto the distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead of you or a colli-sion could occur.

1. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode

2. Conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode

Push the MAIN switch qA to choose thecruise control mode between the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode q1 andthe conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode q2 .

Always confirm the setting in the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system display.

For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, see the following description. For

the conventional (fixed speed) cruise con-trol mode, see page 5-37.

SELECTING THEVEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

To choose the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode q1 , quickly push and re-lease the MAIN switch qA .

Once a control mode is activated, itcannot be changed to the other cruisecontrol mode. To change the mode, pushthe MAIN switch once to turn the systemoff. Then push the MAIN switch again to

SSD0604


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

turn the system back on and select thedesired cruise control mode.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode, the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)system automatically maintains a se-lected distance from the vehicle travelingin front of you according to that vehicle’sspeed (up to the set speed), or at the setspeed when the road ahead is clear.

With ICC, the driver can maintain thesame speed as other vehicles without theconstant need to adjust the set speed asyou would with a normal cruise controlsystem.

PRECAUTIONS ONVEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE

The system is intended to enhance theoperation of the vehicle when following avehicle traveling in the same lane and di-rection.

If the distance sensor qA detects a slowermoving vehicle ahead, the system will re-duce the vehicle speed so that your ve-hicle follows the vehicle in front at the se-lected distance.

The system automatically controls thethrottle and applies the brakes (up to25% of vehicle braking power) if neces-sary.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

WARNING

O This system is only an aid to assist thedriver and is not a collision warning oravoidance device. It is the driver’s re-sponsibility to stay alert, drive safelyand be in control of the vehicle at all

SSD0624Type A

SSD0625Type B


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

times.

O The system is primarily intended for useon straight, dry, open roads with lighttraffic. It is not advisable to use the sys-tem in city traffic or congested areas.

O This system will not adapt automaticallyto road conditions. This system shouldbe used in evenly flowing traffic. Do notuse the system on roads with sharpcurves, or on icy roads, in heavy rain orin fog.

The distance sensor will not detect undermost conditions:

O Stationary and slow moving vehicles

O Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

O Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

O Motorcycles traveling offset in thetravel lane

This system will not automatically brakethe vehicle to a stop.

WARNING

O As there is a performance limit to thedistance control function, never relysolely on the Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem. This system does not correctcareless, inattentive or absent-mindeddriving, or overcome poor visibility inrain, fog, or other bad weather. Decel-erate the vehicle speed by depressingthe brake pedal, depending on the dis-tance to the vehicle ahead and the sur-rounding circumstances in order tomaintain a safe distance between ve-hicles.

O Although the brake operation is con-trolled by the system, the system doesnot automatically stop the vehicle. If thevehicle speed falls below approximately20 MPH (32 km/h), the Intelligent CruiseControl system is automatically can-celed and a warning chime sounds. (Thebrake control is also canceled.)

O The system may not detect the vehicle infront of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, neveruse the Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem under the following conditions:

− On roads where the traffic is heavy orthere are sharp curves

− On slippery road surfaces such as onice or snow, etc.

− During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,etc.)

When the windshield wiper is oper-ated at the low speed (LO) or highspeed (HI) position, the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system is auto-matically canceled.

− When strong light (for example, atsunrise or sunset) is directly shiningon the front of the vehicle

− When rain, snow or dirt adhere to thesystem sensor

− On steep downhill roads (the vehiclemay go beyond the set vehicle speedand frequent braking may result inoverheating the brakes)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

− On repeated uphill and downhill roads

− When traffic conditions make it diffi-cult to keep a proper distance be-tween vehicles because of frequentacceleration or deceleration

O Do not use the Intelligent Cruise Controlsystem if you are towing a trailer. Thesystem may not detect a vehicle ahead.

O In some road or traffic conditions, a ve-hicle or object can unexpectedly comeinto the sensor detection zone andcause automatic braking. You may needto control the distance from other ve-hicles using the accelerator pedal. Al-ways stay alert and avoid using the ICCsystem when it is not recommended inthis section.

VEHICLE-TO-VEHICLE DISTANCECONTROL MODE OPERATION

Always pay attention to the operation ofthe vehicle and be ready to manually con-trol the proper following distance. Thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control modeof the Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) sys-tem may not be able to maintain the se-lected distance between vehicles (follow-ing distance) or selected vehicle speedunder some circumstances.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode uses a sensor qA located on thefront of the vehicle to detect vehicles trav-eling ahead. The sensor generally detectsthe signals returned from the reflectorson a vehicle ahead. Therefore, if thesensor cannot detect the reflector on thevehicle ahead, the ICC system may notmaintain the selected distance.

The following are some conditions inwhich the sensor cannot detect the sig-nals:

O When the reflector of the vehicleahead is positioned high on the ve-hicle (trailer, etc.)

O When the reflector on the vehicleahead is missing, damaged or covered

SSD0624Type A

SSD0625Type B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O When the reflector of the vehicleahead is covered with dirt, snow androad spray

O When the snow or road spray fromtraveling vehicles reduces the sensor’svisibility

O When dense exhaust or other smoke(black smoke) from vehicles reducesthe sensor’s visibility

O When excessively heavy baggage isloaded in the rear seat or the trunk ofyour vehicle

O When your vehicle is towing a trailer,etc.

The ICC system is designed to automati-cally check the sensor’s operation. Whenthe sensor is covered with dirt or ob-structs, the system will automatically becanceled. If the sensor is covered withice, a transparent or translucent vinylbag, etc., the ICC system may not detectthem. In these instances, the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may notcancel and may not be able to maintainthe selected following distance from thevehicle ahead. Be sure to check and cleanthe sensor regularly.

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

mode is designed to maintain a selecteddistance and reduce the speed to matchthe slower vehicle ahead; the system willdecelerate the vehicle as necessary. How-ever, the ICC system can only apply up to25% of the vehicles total braking power.This system should only be used whentraffic conditions allow vehicle speeds toremain fairly constant or when vehiclespeeds change gradually. If a vehiclemoves into the traveling lane ahead or ifa vehicle traveling ahead rapidly deceler-ates, the distance between vehicles maybecome closer because the ICC systemcannot decelerate the vehicle quicklyenough. If this occurs, the ICC system willsound a warning chime and blink the sys-tem display to notify the driver to takenecessary action.

The system will cancel and a warningchime will sound if the speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h). Thesystem will also disengage below the 20MPH (32 km/h) cut-off speed or over themaximum set speed.

Refer to “Approach warning” later in thissection.

The following items are controlled in thevehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode:

O When there are no vehicles travelingahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode maintains the speed setby the driver. The set speed range isbetween approximately 25 and 90MPH (40 and 144 km/h).

O When there is a vehicle travelingahead, the vehicle-to-vehicle distancecontrol mode adjusts the speed tomaintain the distance, selected bydriver, from the vehicle ahead. The ad-justing speed range is between ap-proximately 20 MPH (32 km/h) and upto the set speed.

O When the vehicle traveling ahead hasmoved out from its lane of travel, thevehicle-to-vehicle distance controlmode accelerates and maintains ve-hicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehiclespeed or warn you when you approachstationary and slow moving vehicles. Youmust pay attention to vehicle operation tomaintain proper distance from vehiclesahead when approaching toll gates ortraffic congestion.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The detection zone of the ICC sensor islimited. A vehicle ahead must be in thedetection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicledistance detection mode to maintain theselected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of thedetection zone due to its position withinthe same lane of travel. Motorcycles maynot be detected in the same lane ahead ifthey are traveling offset from the center-line of the lane. A vehicle that is enteringthe lane ahead may not be detected untilthe vehicle has completely moved into thelane. If this occurs, the ICC system maywarn you by blinking the system indicator

and sounding the chime. The driver mayhave to manually control the proper dis-tance away from vehicle traveling ahead.

SSD0252


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When driving on some roads, such aswinding, hilly, curved, narrow roads, orroads which are under construction, theICC sensor may detect vehicles in a differ-ent lane, or may temporarily not detect avehicle traveling ahead. This may causethe ICC system to decelerate or acceleratethe vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-neuver or traveling position in the lane,etc.) or vehicle condition. If this occurs,the ICC system may warn you by blinkingthe system indicator and sounding thechime unexpectedly. You will have to

manually control the proper distance awayfrom the vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on the freeway at a setspeed and approaching a slower travelingvehicle ahead, the ICC will adjust thespeed to maintain the distance, selectedby the driver, from the vehicle ahead. Ifthe vehicle ahead changes lanes or exitsthe freeway, the ICC system will accel-erate and maintain the speed up to theset speed. Pay attention to the driving op-eration to maintain control of the vehicleas it accelerates to the set speed.

The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed on winding or hilly roads. If this oc-curs, you will have to manually controlthe vehicle speed.

SSD0253 SSD0254


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Intelligent cruise control switch

The system is operated by a MAIN switchand four control switches, all mounted onthe steering wheel.

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:Sets desired cruise speed, reducesspeed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:Deactivates the system withouterasing the set speed.

4. DISTANCE switch:Changes the vehicle’s following dis-tance:O LongO MiddleO Short

5. MAIN switch:Master switch to activate the system

Intelligent cruise control systemdisplay and indicators

The display is located between the speed-ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:

Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehiclein front of you.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be-

SSD0605 SSD0606


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

tween vehicles set with the DISTANCEswitch.

4. Indicates your vehicle

5. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed isdisplayed in km/h.

6. Intelligent Cruise Control systemwarning light (Orange):

The light comes on if there is a mal-function in the ICC system.

When the ignition switch is pushed to theON position, the indicators come on as il-lustrated to check for a burned-out bulb,and it turns off when the engine isstarted.

Operating vehicle-to-vehicledistance control mode

To turn on the cruise control, quickly pushand release the MAIN switch qA on. Thecruise indicator light, set distance indica-tor and set vehicle speed indicator comeon and in a standby state for setting.

SSD0607 SSD0608


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (Vehicleahead detection indicator, set distance in-dicator and set vehicle speed indicatorcome on.) Take your foot off the accelera-tor pedal. Your vehicle will maintain theset speed.

The Intelligent Cruise Control system can-not be set under the following conditionseven if the SET/COAST switch is pushed.

O When traveling outside the 25 to 90MPH (40 to 144 km/h) speed range

O While the brakes are applied by thedriver

O When pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch without a setspeed in memory

O When the windshield wipers are oper-ating at low speed (LO) or high speed(HI)

O When the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system is switched off

O When the SNOW mode switch isturned on

SSD0609


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. System set display with vehicle ahead2. System set display without vehicle

ahead

System operation

WARNING

Normally when controlling the distance to avehicle ahead, this system automatically ac-celerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.Depress the accelerator to properly acceler-

ate your vehicle when acceleration is re-quired for a lane change. Depress the brakepedal when deceleration is required to main-tain a safe distance to the vehicle ahead dueto its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in.Always stay alert when using the ICCsystem.

The driver sets the desired vehicle speedbased on the road conditions. The ICCsystem maintains the set vehicle speed,similar to standard cruise control, as long

as no vehicle is detected in the laneahead.

The ICC system displays the set speed.

Vehicle detected ahead:

When a vehicle is detected in the laneahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-hicle by controlling the throttle and ap-plying the brakes to match the speed of aslower vehicle ahead. The system thencontrols the vehicle speed based on thespeed of the vehicle ahead to maintainthe driver selected distance.

The stoplights of the vehicle come on andthe brake pedal depresses when braking isperformed by the ICC system.

When the brake operates, a noise may beheard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.The ICC system will also display the setspeed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected:

When a vehicle is no longer detectedahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-ates your vehicle to resume the previouslyset vehicle speed. The ICC system thenmaintains the set speed.

SSD0610


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When a vehicle is no longer detected thevehicle ahead detection indicator turnsoff.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accel-eration to the set vehicle speed or anytime the ICC system is in operation, thesystem controls the distance to that ve-hicle.

When passing another vehicle, the setspeed indicator will flash when the ve-hicle speed exceeds the set speed. Thevehicle detect indicator will turn off whenthe area ahead of the vehicle is open.When the pedal is released, the vehiclewill return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set inthe ICC system, you can depress the ac-celerator pedal when it is necessary to ac-celerate your vehicle rapidly.

How to change the set vehiclespeed

To cancel the preset speed, use any ofthese methods:

O Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-hicle speed indicator will go out.

O Tap the brake pedal. The set vehiclespeed indicator will go out.

O Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theON/OFF switch indicator and set ve-hicle speed indicator will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following methods:

O Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

O Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The set vehiclespeed will increase by approximately 5MPH (5 km/h for Canada).

O Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by approximately 1 MPH (1km/h for Canada).

SSD0611


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following methods:

O Lightly tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

O Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.The set vehicle speed will decrease byapproximately 5 MPH (5 km/h forCanada).

O Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byapproximately 1 MPH (1 km/h forCanada).


How to change the set distance tothe vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can beselected at any time depending on thetraffic conditions.

Each time the DISTANCE switch qA ispushed, the set distance will change tolong, middle, short and back to longagain in that sequence.

SSD0612


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O The distance to the vehicle ahead willchange according to the vehiclespeed. The higher the vehicle speed,the longer the distance.

O If the engine is stopped, the set dis-tance becomes “long”. (Each time the

engine is started, the initial settingbecomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicleahead due to rapid deceleration of that

vehicle or if another vehicle cuts in, thesystem warns the driver with the chimeand ICC system display. Decelerate by de-pressing the brake pedal to maintain asafe vehicle distance if:

• The chime sounds.

• The vehicle ahead detection and setdistance indicator blink.

The warning chime may not sound insome cases when there is a short dis-tance between vehicles. Some examplesare:

O When the vehicles are traveling at thesame speed and the distance betweenvehicles is not changing

O When the vehicle ahead is travelingfaster and the distance between ve-hicles is increasing

O When the accelerator pedal is de-pressed, overriding the system

O When a vehicle cuts in near your ve-hicle

The warning chime will not sound whenyour vehicle approaches vehicles that areparked or moving slowly.

SSD0613


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may soundand the system display may blink whenthe ICC sensor detects some reflectors qA

which are fitted on vehicles in other lanesor on the side of the road. This may causethe ICC system to decelerate or acceleratethe vehicle. The ICC sensor may detectthese reflectors when the vehicle is drivenon winding roads, hilly roads or when en-tering or exiting a curve. The ICC sensormay also detect reflectors on narrow roadsor in road construction zones. In thesecases you will have to manually control theproper distance ahead of your vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af-fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-neuver or driving position in the lane) ortraffic or vehicle condition (for example, ifa vehicle is being driven with some dam-age).

Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-ditions and the control is automaticallycanceled.

O When the vehicle speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

O When the selector lever is shifted tothe N (Neutral) position

O When the windshield wipers are oper-ated at low speed (LO) or high speed(HI)

O When the VDC is turned off

O When the VDC operates

O When the engine coolant temperaturebecomes excessively high

Warning light and display

Condition A

The chime sounds and the IntelligentCruise Control system is canceled auto-matically in the conditions describedbelow. Part of the system display willcome on or blink, making it impossible toset.

O When the VDC is turned off

O When the VDC operates

O When a tire slips

SSD0284A SSD0614


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O When the SNOW mode switch isturned on

O When strong light (sunlight, etc.) is di-rectly shining on the front of the ve-hicle

Action to take:

When the conditions listed above are nolonger present, turn the system off usingthe Intelligent Cruise Control MAINSwitch. Turn the ICC system back on touse the system.

Condition B

When the sensor window is dirty, makingit impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,the ICC system is automatically canceled.

The chime sounds and the systemwarning light (Orange) will come on andthe “CLEAN SENSOR” indicator will ap-pear.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place, turn the engineoff. Clean the sensor window with a softcloth and then perform the settings again.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operatingproperly, the chime sounds and thesystem warning light (Orange) will comeon.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine, resume driving andset the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or theindicator stays on, it may indicate that thesystem is malfunctioning. Although the ve-

SSD0615 SSD0616


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

hicle is still driveable under normal condi-tions, have the vehicle checked at anINFINITI dealer.

Sensor maintenance

The sensor for the ICC system qA is lo-cated below the front bumper.

To keep the ICC system operating prop-erly, be sure to observe the following:

O Always keep the sensor clean. Wipewith a soft cloth carefully so as not todamage the sensor.

O Do not strike or damage the areasaround the sensor. Do not touch or re-move the screw located on the sensor.Doing so could cause failure or mal-function. If the sensor is damaged dueto an accident, contact an INFINITIdealer.

O Do not attach a sticker (includingtransparent material) or install an ac-cessory near the sensor. This couldcause failure or malfunction.

CONVENTIONAL (FIXED SPEED)CRUISE CONTROL MODE

This mode allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 to 89 MPH (40 to 144 km/h)without keeping your foot on the accel-erator pedal.

SSD0624Type A

SSD0625Type B


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O In the conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode, a warning chime does notsound to warn you if you are too close tothe vehicle ahead, as neither the pres-ence of the vehicle ahead nor thevehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected.

O Pay special attention to the distance be-tween your vehicle and the vehicleahead of you or a collision could occur.

O Always confirm the setting in the Intelli-gent Cruise Control system display.

O Do not use the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode when drivingunder the following conditions:

— when it is not possible to keep the ve-hicle at a set speed

— in heavy traffic or in traffic that variesin speed

— on winding or hilly roads

— on slippery roads (rain, snow, ice,etc.)

— in very windy areas

O Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol switch

1. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch:Resumes set speed or increases speedincrementally.

2. SET/COAST switch:Sets the desired cruise speed, reducesspeed incrementally.

3. CANCEL switch:Deactivates the system withouterasing the set speed.

4. MAIN switch:Master switch to activate the system.

SSD0617


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Conventional (fixed speed) cruisecontrol mode display andindicators

The display is located between the speed-ometer and tachometer.

1. MAIN switch indicator:Indicates that the MAIN switch is ON.

2. Cruise set switch indicator:Displays while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode of the ICCsystem.

3. Cruise system warning light:Comes on if there is a malfunction inthe cruise control system.

Operating conventional (fixedspeed) cruise control mode

To turn on the conventional (fixed speed)cruise control mode, push and hold theMAIN switch qA for longer than about 1.5seconds.

When pushing the MAIN switch on, the In-telligent Cruise Control system displayand the CRUISE indicator are displayed onthe dot matrix crystal display. After youhold the MAIN switch on for longer thanabout 1.5 seconds, the Intelligent CruiseControl system display goes out. TheCRUISE indicator stays lit. You can now

SSD0618 SSD0619


w 06.8.14/V36-D X

set your desired cruising speed. Pushingthe MAIN switch again will turn thesystem completely off.

When the ignition switch is pushed to theOFF position, the system is also automati-cally turned off. To use the IntelligentCruise Control again, quickly push and re-lease the MAIN switch (vehicle-to-vehicledistance control mode) or push and holdit (conventional cruise control mode)again to turn it on.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging cruise con-trol, make sure to turn the ON/OFF switch offwhen not using the Intelligent Cruise Con-trol.

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-hicle to the desired speed, push theSET/COAST switch and release it. (TheSET indicator will come on in the display.)Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

O To pass another vehicle, depress theaccelerator pedal. When you releasethe pedal, the vehicle will return tothe previously set speed.

O The vehicle may not maintain the setspeed when going up or down steephills. If this happens, manually main-tain vehicle speed.

To cancel the preset speed, use any of thefollowing methods:

a) Push the CANCEL button. The SET indi-cator will go out.

b) Tap the brake pedal. The SET indicatorwill go out.

c) Turn the MAIN switch off. Both theCRUISE indicator and SET indicator willgo out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods:

a) Depress the accelerator pedal. Whenthe vehicle attains the desired speed,push and release the SET/COASTswitch.

b) Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELERATE set switch. When the ve-hicle attains the speed you desire, re-lease the switch.

c) Push, then quickly release theRESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Eachtime you do this, the set speed will in-crease by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, useone of the following three methods:

a) Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

SSD0620


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

vehicle attains the desired speed,push the SET/COAST switch and re-lease it.

b) Push and hold the SET/COAST switch.Release the switch when the vehicleslows down to the desired speed.

c) Push, then quickly release theSET/COAST switch. Each time you dothis, the set speed will decrease byabout 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).


Automatic cancellation

A chime sounds under the following con-ditions and the control is automaticallycanceled.

O When the vehicle slows down morethan 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the setspeed

O When the vehicle speed falls belowapproximately 20 MPH (32 km/h)

O When the selector lever is shifted tothe N (Neutral) position

O When the VDC operates (except ABS,which is functional with ICC systemoperation)

O When the engine coolant temperaturebecomes excessively high

Warning light

When the system is not operating prop-erly, the chime sounds and the systemwarning light (Orange) will come on.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine, resume driving andthen perform the setting again.

If it is not possible to set or the indicatorstays on, it may indicate that the system ismalfunctioning. Although the vehicle isstill driveable under normal conditions,

SSD0621


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

have the vehicle checked at an INFINITIdealer.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (for IntelligentCruise Control system equippedmodels)

The ICC system with the preview functionidentifies the need to apply emergencybraking by sensing the vehicle ahead inthe same lane and the distance to the ve-hicle ahead and relative speed from it, itapplies the brake pre-pressure before thedriver depresses the brake pedal andhelps improve brake response by re-ducing pedal free play.

For more details, refer to “Brake assist”later in this section.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and ensurethe future reliability and economy of yournew vehicle.

Failure to follow these recommendationsmay result in shortened engine life and re-duced engine performance.

O Avoid driving for long periods at con-stant speed, either fast or slow. Donot run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

O Do not accelerate at full throttle in anygear.

O Avoid quick starts.

O Avoid hard braking as much as pos-sible.

O Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Main-tain cruising speeds with a constantaccelerator position.

O Drive at moderate speeds on the high-way.

O Avoid unnecessary stopping and brak-ing. Keep a safe distance behind othervehicles.

O Select a gear range suitable to roadconditions.

O Avoid unnecessary prolonged engineidling.

O Keep your engine tuned up.

O Follow the recommended periodicmaintenance schedule.

O Keep the tires inflated at the correctpressure. Improper tire pressure willincrease wear and waste fuel.

O Make sure the front wheels are prop-erly aligned. Improper alignment willcause premature tire wear and lowerfuel economy.

O Climate control operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner onlywhen necessary.

O When cruising at highway speeds, it is

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

more economical to use the air condi-tioner and leave the windows closed toreduce drag.

The AWD warning light is located in themeter.

The AWD warning light comes on whenthe ignition switch is pushed to the ONposition. It turns off soon after the engineis started.

If any malfunction occurs in the AWD sys-tem while the engine is running, thewarning light will come on.

The warning light may blink rapidly (abouttwice per second) while trying to free astuck vehicle due to high power train oiltemperature. The driving mode maychange to two-wheel drive. If the warninglight blinks rapidly during operation, stopthe vehicle with the engine idling in asafe place immediately. Then if the lightgoes off after a while, you can continuedriving.

A large difference between the diametersof front and rear wheels will make thewarning light blink slowly (about once pertwo seconds). Pull off the road in a safearea, and idle the engine. Check that alltire sizes are the same, tire pressure iscorrect and tires are not worn.

If the warning light is blinking after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

SSD0336

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (if so equipped)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O For AWD equipped vehicles, do not at-tempt to raise two wheels off the groundand shift the transmission to any driveor reverse position with the engine run-ning. Doing so may result in drivetraindamage or unexpected vehicle move-ment which could result in serious ve-hicle damage or personal injury.

O Do not attempt to test an AWD equippedvehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (suchas the dynamometers used by somestates for emissions testing) or similarequipment even if the other two wheelsare raised off the ground. Make sure thatyou inform the test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with AWDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer.Using the wrong test equipment may re-sult in drivetrain damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

CAUTION

O Do not operate the engine on a free rollerwhen any of the wheels are raised.

O If the warning light comes on while driv-ing there may be a malfunction in theAWD system. Reduce the vehicle speedand have your vehicle checked by anINFINITI dealer as soon as possible.

O If the warning light remains on after theabove operation, have your vehiclechecked by an INFINITI dealer as soon aspossible.

O The power train may be damaged if youcontinue driving with the warning lightblinking rapidly.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

O Never leave the engine running while thevehicle is unattended.

O Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

O Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park).Failure to do so could cause the vehicleto move unexpectedly or roll away andresult in an accident.

O Make sure the automatic transmissionselector lever has been pushed as farforward as it can go and cannot bemoved without depressing the button atthe end of the lever.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.




Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse)gear. When parking on an uphillgrade, place the shift lever in the 1stgear.

3. To help prevent the vehicle fromrolling into the street when parked ona sloping drive way, it is a good prac-tice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

O HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: q1

Turn the wheels into the curb andmove the vehicle forward until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

O HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: q2

Turn the wheels away from the curband move the vehicle back until thecurb side wheel gently touches thecurb.

SD1006MA

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: q3

Turn the wheels toward the side of theroad so the vehicle will move awayfrom the center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the OFF po-sition.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for the steer-ing will not work. Steering will be muchharder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hy-draulic pump, driven by the engine, to as-sist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive beltbreaks, you will still have control of thevehicle. However, much greater steeringeffort is needed, especially in sharp turnsor at low speeds.

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS

The brake system has two separate hy-draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc-tions, you will still have braking at twowheels.

You may feel a small click and hear asound when the brake pedal is fully de-pressed slowly. This is not a malfunctionand means the brake assist mechanism isoperating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by usingengine vacuum. If the engine stops, youcan stop the vehicle by depressing thebrake pedal. However, greater foot pres-sure on the brake pedal will be requiredto stop the vehicle and the stopping dis-tance will be longer.

When the brake pedal is depressed slowlyand firmly, you may hear a clicking noiseand feel a slight pulsation. This is normaland indicates that the Brake AssistSystem is operating.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driventhrough water, the brakes may get wet.As a result, your braking distance will be

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

longer and the vehicle may pull to oneside during braking.

To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly tapping the brakepedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this untilthe brakes return to normal. Avoid drivingthe vehicle at high speeds until thebrakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes when-ever the stopping effect of the parkingbrake is weakened or whenever the park-ing brake shoes and/or drums/rotors arereplaced, in order to assure the bestbraking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicleservice manual and can be performed byan INFINITI dealer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving. This will cause overheatingof the brakes, wearing out the brake andpads faster and reduce gas mileage.

To help save the brakes and to preventthe brakes from overheating, reducespeed and downshift to a lower gear be-fore going down a slope or long grade.

Overheated brakes may reduce brakingperformance and could result in loss ofvehicle control.

WARNING

O While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or acceler-ating could cause the wheels to skid andresult in an accident.

O If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedalexceeds a certain level, the Brake Assistis activated generating greater brakingforce than a conventional brake boostereven with light pedal force.

WARNING

The Brake Assist is only an aid to assistbraking operation and is not a collisionwarning or avoidance device. It is the driv-er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safelyand be in control of the vehicle at all times.

PREVIEW FUNCTION (IntelligentCruise Control system equippedmodels)

When the Preview Function identifies theneed to apply emergency braking bysensing a vehicle ahead in the same laneand the distance and relative speed fromit, it applies the brake pre-pressure be-fore the driver depresses the brake pedaland helps improve brake response by re-ducing pedal free play.

BRAKE ASSIST


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O This system will not operate when thevehicle is moving at approximately 20MPH (32 km/h) or less.

O The pre-pressure function ceaseswhen the following conditions aremet:

a) When the driver depresses the accel-erator pedal or the brake pedal.

b) If the driver does not operate the ac-celerator or brake pedal within ap-proximately 1 second.

O The sensor will not detect:

a) Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

b) Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

c) Motorcycles traveling offset in thetravel lane as illustrated

WARNING

O This system is only an aid to assist brak-ing operation and is not a collision warn-ing or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drivesafely and be in control of the vehicle atall times.

O As there is a performance limit to thePreview Function, never rely solely onthis system. This system does not cor-rect careless inattentive or absent-minded driving, or overcome poor vis-ibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather.Reduce vehicle speed by depressing thebrake pedal, in order to maintain a safedistance between vehicles.

O The system may not detect the vehicle infront of you in certain road or weatherconditions. The Preview Function maynot operate properly under the followingconditions. The vehicle is still driveableunder normal conditions and the BrakeAssist will operate.— When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

system sensor— When strong light (for example, at

sunrise or sunset) is directly shiningon the front of the vehicle

SSD0338


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

— Winding or hilly roads may cause thesensor to temporarily not detect a ve-hicle in the same lane or may detectobjects or vehicles in other lanes.

— Vehicle position in the lane maycause the sensor to temporarily notdetect a vehicle in the same lane ormay detect objects or vehicles inother lanes.

O When the Preview Function operates, thebrake pedal may move slightly and maymake a small noise. This is not a systemmalfunction.

Warning light and display

When the Preview Function is not oper-ating properly, the buzzer sounds and thesystem warning light (Orange) will comeon.

Action to take:

If the warning light comes on, park thevehicle in a safe place. Turn the engineoff, restart the engine and resume driving.

If the indicator stays on, it may indicatethat the Preview Function is malfunc-tioning (the brake is operative). Althoughthe Vehicle is still driveable under normal

conditions, have the vehicle checked at anINFINITI dealer.

How to handle the sensor

The sensor for the Preview Function iscommon with Intelligent Cruise Controland is located below the front bumper.

To keep the Preview Function operatingproperly, be sure to observe the fol-lowing:

O Always keep the sensor clean. Wipewith a soft cloth carefully so as not todamage the sensor.

O Do not strike or damage the areasaround the sensor. Do not touch or re-move the screw located on the sensor.Doing so could cause failure or mal-function. If the sensor is damaged dueto an accident, contact an INFINITIdealer.

O Do not attach a sticker (includingtransparent material) or install an ac-cessory near the sensor. This couldcause failure or malfunction.

SSD0471


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

WARNING

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a so-phisticated device, but it cannot prevent ac-cidents resulting from careless or dangerousdriving techniques. It can help maintain ve-hicle control during braking on slippery sur-faces. Remember that stopping distances onslippery surfaces will be longer than onnormal surfaces even with ABS. Stoppingdistances may also be longer on rough,gravel or snow covered roads, or if you areusing tire chains. Always maintain a safedistance from the vehicle in front of you. Ulti-mately, the driver is responsible for safety.

Tire type and condition may also affect brak-ing effectiveness.

— When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.

— When installing a spare tire, make surethat it is the proper size and type as

specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label. See “Tire and Loading In-formation label” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

— For detailed information, see “Wheelsand tires” in the “8. Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-trols the brakes so the wheels do not lockduring hard braking or when braking onslippery surfaces. The system detects therotation speed at each wheel and variesthe brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By pre-venting each wheel from locking, the sys-tem helps the driver maintain steeringcontrol and helps to minimize swervingand spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold itdown. Depress the brake pedal with firmsteady pressure, but do not pump thebrakes. The ABS will operate to preventthe wheels from locking up. Steer the ve-hicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so mayresult in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec-tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and acomputer. The computer has a built-in di-agnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed in forward orreverse. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal and does not indicate a malfunc-tion. If the computer senses a malfunc-tion, it switches the ABS off and illumi-nates the ABS warning light on the instru-ment panel. The brake system thenoperates normally, but without anti-lockassistance. If the ABS warning light illu-minates during the self-test or while driv-ing, have the vehicle checked by anINFINITI dealer.


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6MPH (5 to 10 km/h).

When the ABS senses that one or morewheels are close to locking up, the actua-tor rapidly applies and releases hydraulicpressure. This action is similar topumping the brakes very quickly. You mayfeel a pulsation in the brake pedal andhear a noise from under the hood or feela vibration from the actuator when it isoperating. This is normal and indicatesthat the ABS is operating properly. How-ever, the pulsation may indicate that roadconditions are hazardous and extra careis required while driving.

When accelerating or driving on slipperysurfaces, the tires may spin or slide. Withthe Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)system, sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engineoutput to help improve vehicle stability.

O When the VDC system is operating,the “SLIP” indicator in the instrumentpanel blinks.

O When only the Traction Control System(TCS) portion of the VDC system is op-erating, the “SLIP” indicator in the in-strument panel blinks.

O If the “SLIP” indicator blinks, the roadconditions are slippery. Be sure to ad-just your speed and driving to theseconditions. Be sure to drive carefully.See “SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT”, and “VE-HICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFFINDICATOR LIGHT” in the “2. Instru-ments and controls” section.

O Indicator lightIf a malfunction occurs in the system,the “SLIP” and “VDC OFF” indicatorlights illuminate in the instrumentpanel. As long as these warning lightsare illuminated, the VDC system func-tion is canceled.

The VDC system uses an Active Brake Lim-ited Slip (ABLS) function to improve ve-hicle traction. The ABLS system workswhen one of the driving wheels is spin-ning on a slippery surface. The ABLS sys-tem brakes the spinning wheel, whichdistributes the driving power to the otherdrive wheel. If the vehicle is operatedwith the VDC system turned off, all VDCsystem and TCS functions will be turnedoff. The ABLS system and ABS will stilloperate with the VDC system off. If theABLS system or ABS is activated, the“SLIP” indicator light will blink and youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pul-sation in the brake pedal. This is normaland is not an indication of a malfunction.

While the VDC system is operating, youmay feel a pulsation in the brake pedaland hear a noise or feel a vibration fromunder the hood. This is normal and indi-cates that the VDC system is workingproperly.

The VDC system computer has a built-indiagnostic feature that tests the systemeach time you start the engine and movethe vehicle at a low speed forward orbackward. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

normal and is not an indication of a mal-function.

WARNING

O The VDC system is designed to help im-prove driving stability but does not pre-vent accidents due to abrupt steeringoperation at high speeds or due to care-less or dangerous driving techniques.Reduce vehicle speed and be especiallycareful when driving and cornering onslippery surfaces and always drive care-fully.

O If engine related parts such as mufflerare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the “VDC OFF” in-dicator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-cator lights may illuminate.

O Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not INFINITI approvedor are extremely deteriorated the VDCsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handling

performance, and the “VDC OFF” indi-cator or “SLIP” indicator or both indi-cator lights may illuminate.

O If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lightsmay illuminate.

O When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the VDC system may not operate prop-erly and the “VDC OFF” indicator or“SLIP” indicator or both indicator lightsmay illuminate. Do not drive on thesetypes of roads.

O When driving on unstable surfaces suchas a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp,the “VDC OFF” indicator or “SLIP” indi-cator or both indicator lights may illumi-nate. This is not a malfunction. Restartthe engine after driving onto a stablesurface.

O If wheels or tires other than those rec-

ommended are used, the VDC systemmay not operate properly and “VDC OFF”indicator or “SLIP” indicator or both in-dicator lights may illuminate.

O The VDC system is not a substitute forwinter tires or tire chains on a snow cov-ered road.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The Four-Wheel Active Steer (4WAS)system is an electronically controlledfour-wheel steering system.

Depending on the vehicle speed andsteering angle, the angles of the front andrear wheels are adjusted by the 4WASsystem to help improve driving perfor-mance.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the4WAS function will stop but the ordinarytwo-wheel steering system will operatenormally. The “4WAS” warning light willilluminate. If the light illuminates whileyou are driving, contact an INFINITI dealerfor repair.

The steering wheel may be slightly turnedeven when driving on a straight road dueto a protection mechanism for the 4WASsystem. This is not a malfunction. Thesteering wheel will return to the normalposition after the protection mechanismdeactivates.

The protection mechanism activatesunder the following conditions:

O The steering wheel is operated forciblywhen it is hard to operate or the tiresare blocked by obstacles.

O The steering wheel is continuously op-

erated when the vehicle is parked orbeing driven at extremely low speed.

O The steering wheel is forcibly turnedbeyond its operation limits.

O The battery voltage is reduced.

Repeated steering maneuvers that mayactivate the protection mechanism willdamage the 4WAS system.

WARNING

The 4WAS system, although a sophisticateddevice, cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom careless or dangerous driving tech-niques. Ultimately the responsibility forsafety of self and others rests in the handsof the driver. Therefore only through atten-tive and careful driving methods can the4WAS system be fully appreciated andsafety optimized.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing,apply deicer or glycerin to it through thekey hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heatthe key before inserting it into the keyhole.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated thatthe temperature will drop below 32°F(0°C), check antifreeze to assure properwinter protection. For additional informa-tion, see “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged duringextremely cold weather conditions, thebattery fluid may freeze and damage thebattery. To maintain maximum efficiency,the battery should be checked regularly.For additional information, see “Battery”in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside withoutantifreeze, drain the cooling system byopening the drain plug located under the

FOUR-WHEEL ACTIVE STEER (4WAS)SYSTEM (if so equipped)

COLD WEATHER DRIVING


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

radiator. Refill before operating the ve-hicle. See “Engine cooling system” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion for changing engine coolant.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires are of a tread design toprovide superior performance on drypavement. However, the performanceof these tires will be substantially re-duced in snowy and icy conditions. Ifyou operate your vehicle on snowy oricy roads, INFINITI recommends theuse of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASONtires on all four wheels. Please consultan INFINITI dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability in-formation.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,studded tires may be used. However,some provinces and states prohibittheir use. Check local, state and pro-vincial laws before installing studdedtires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details,

see “Tire chains” in the “Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

4. For all-wheel drive:If you install snow tires, they mustalso be the same size, brand, con-struction and tread pattern on all fourwheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the followingitems be carried in the vehicle duringwinter:

1. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush toremove ice and snow from the win-dows and wiper blades.

2. A sturdy, flat board to be placed underthe jack to give it firm support.

3. A shovel to dig the vehicle out ofsnow-drifts.

4. Extra window washer fluid to refill thereservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

O Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

O Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

O Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

O Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

O Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwise clearroad in shaded areas. If a patch of ice isseen ahead, brake before reaching it.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Try not to brake while on the ice, andavoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

O Do not use cruise control on slipperyroads.

O Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. Keep snow clear ofthe exhaust pipe and from around yourvehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)

Engine block heaters are availablethrough INFINITI dealers to assist in coldtemperature starting. The engine blockheater should be used when the outsidetemperature is 20°F (−7°C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engineblock heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord intoa grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must beplugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, de-pending on outside temperatures, toproperly warm the engine coolant. Usean appropriate timer to turn the en-gine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug andproperly store the cord to keep it awayfrom moving parts.

WARNING

O Do not use your engine block heater withan ungrounded electrical system or a2-pronged adapter. You can be seriouslyinjured by an electrical shock if you usean ungrounded connection.

O Disconnect and properly store the en-gine block heater cord before startingthe engine. Damage to the cord could re-sult in an electrical shock and can causeserious injury.

O Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-tension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground FaultInterrupt (GFI) protected, grounded110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the properextension cord or a grounded outlet canresult in a fire or electrical shock andcause serious personal injury.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

6 In case of emergency

Roadside assistance program........................... 6-2Flat tire ........................................................... 6-2

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .... 6-2Changing a flat tire ..................................... 6-3

Jump starting ................................................... 6-8Push starting .................................................. 6-10

If your vehicle overheats................................. 6-10Towing your vehicle......................................... 6-11

Towing recommended by INFINITI .............. 6-12Vehicle recovery (Freeing a stuckvehicle) ...................................................... 6-15

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Every new INFINITI comes with a 4 year,unlimited mileage Roadside Assistanceplan. In the event of a roadsideemergency, Roadside Assistance Serviceis available to you. Please refer to yourWarranty Information Booklet (U.S.) orWarranty & Roadside AssistanceInformation Booklet (Canada) for details.Both the Warranty Information Bookletand Roadside Assistance Calling Card inyour Owner’s Literature Portfolio providethe Toll-Free Number to call for assistance.Roadside Assistance is provided 24 hoursa day, 365 days a year, for 4 years fromthe date sold to give emergency roadsidehelp, in the event of mechanical ornonmechanical trouble(s) such as flattires, out-of-gas, dead battery, lost keys,mechanical breakdown, accident, etc.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly under-inflated. Thesystem also displays pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display bysending a signal from a sensor that is in-stalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-ing driven with low tire pressure, theTPMS will activate and warn you of it bythe low tire pressure warning light. Thissystem will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible re-minders” in the “2. Instruments and con-trols” section and “Tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS)” in the “5. Startingand driving” section.

WARNING

O If the low tire pressure warning light illu-minates or LOW PRESSURE informationis displayed on the monitor screen whiledriving, avoid sudden steering maneu-vers or abrupt braking, reduce vehiclespeed, pull off the road to a safe locationand stop the vehicle as soon as pos-sible. Serious vehicle damage couldoccur and may lead to an accident andcould result in serious personal injury.Check the tire pressure for all four tires.Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-mended COLD tire pressure shown onthe Tire and Loading Information label toturn the low tire pressure warning lightOFF. If the light still comes on while driv-ing after adjusting the tire pressure, atire may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon as pos-sible.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

the low tire pressure warning light willflash for approximately 1 minute. Thelight will remain on after 1 minute. Con-tact your INFINITI dealer as soon as pos-sible for tire replacement and/or systemresetting.


O Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instruc-tions below.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the roadand away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply theparking brake. Move the selector leverto the P (Park) position (Automatic

transmission models). Move the shiftlever to the R (Reverse) gear (Manualtransmission models).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,and to signal professional road assis-tance personnel that you need assis-tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-hicle and stand in a safe place, awayfrom traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

O Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the manual transmission isshifted into R (Reverse), or the automatictransmission into P (Park).

O Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

O Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks q1 at both the frontand back of the wheel diagonally oppo-site the flat tire to prevent the vehiclefrom moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

MCE0001A

In case of emergency 6-3

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Getting the spare tire and tools

Raise the trunk floor cover q1 using thetab qA .

Remove jacking tools located inside thetrunk as illustrated.

The spare tire is located under the jackingtools. Remove the cap q2 holding thespare tire.

Jacking up the vehicle andremoving the damaged tire

WARNING

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, support itwith safety stands.

O Use only the jack provided with your ve-hicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

O Use the correct jack-up points. Never useany other part of the vehicle for jack sup-port.

O Never jack up the vehicle more than nec-essary.

O Never use blocks on or under the jack.

O Do not start or run the engine while ve-hicle is on the jack, as it may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially true

SCE0659Jacking tools

SCE0660Spare


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

for vehicles with limited slip differen-tials.

O Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label attachedto the jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Place the jack directly under thejack-up point as illustrated so the topof the jack contacts the vehicle at thejack-up point. Align the jack head be-tween the two notches in the front orthe rear as shown. Also fit the grooveof the jack head between the notchesas shown.

The jack should be used on level firmground.

CE1089-AJack-up point


w 06.9.29/V36-D X

2. Loosen each wheel nut one or twoturns by turning counterclockwise withthe wheel nut wrench. Do not removethe wheel nuts until the tire is off theground.

3. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tireclears the ground. To lift the vehicle,securely hold the jack lever and rodwith both hands as shown above. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then re-move the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The T-type spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions underthe heading “Wheels and tires” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surfacebetween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on andtighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

18-inch tire models:

When replacing a front tire, make sure

SCE0504 SCE0661


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

that the hole in the spare tire wheel isaligned with the pin on the brakerotor.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tightenwheel nuts alternately and evenly inthe sequence as illustrated (q1 , q2 ,q3 , q4 , q5 ) until they are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with thewheel nut wrench, tighten the wheelnuts securely in the sequence as illus-trated. Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

O Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tight-ened wheel nuts can cause the wheel tobecome loose or come off. This couldcause an accident.

O Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

O Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

O As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto specification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightenedto specifications at each lubrication in-terval.

O Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-sure.

COLD pressure:

After the vehicle has been parked forthree hours or more or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on theTire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jackingequipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and thetrunk floor carpeting over the dam-aged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

O Always make sure that the spare tire andjacking equipment are properly secured

SCE0662


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

after use. Such items can become dan-gerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

O The T-type spare tire and small sizespare tire are designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the“8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section.

If needed Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

To start your engine with a booster bat-tery, the instructions and precautionsbelow must be followed.

WARNING

O If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could also dam-age your vehicle.

O Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

O Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corro-sive sulphuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

O Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-dren.

O The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated bat-tery can damage your vehicle.

O Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

O Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

O Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at any time.Keep hands and other objects away fromit.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty Information Booklet (Canada).

JUMP STARTING


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Failureto do so could result in damage to the charg-ing system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-hicle qA , position the two vehicles (qA

and qB ) to bring their batteries intoclose proximity to each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the se-

lector lever to the P (Park) position(Automatic transmission models).Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)position (Manual transmissionmodels). Switch off all unnecessaryelectrical systems (light, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with afirmly wrung out moist cloth qC to re-duce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se-quence as illustrated (q1 → q2 → q3→ q4 ).

If the battery is disconnected or dis-charged, the steering wheel will lockand cannot be turned. Supply powerusing jumper cables before pushingthe ignition switch and disengagingthe steering lock.

CAUTION

O Always connect positive (+) to positive(+) and negative (−) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, engine liftbracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

O Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that clamps do not contactany other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicleqA and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the boostervehicle qA at about 2,000 rpm, andstart your engine of the jumped ve-hicle qB in the normal manner.

SCE0653


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine does notstart right away, push the ignition switch tothe OFF position and wait 10 seconds beforetrying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefullydisconnect the negative cable andthen the positive cable (q4 → q3 →q2 → q1 ).

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped).Be sure to dispose of the cloth used tocover the vent holes as it may be con-taminated with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover and the enginecompartment cover on.

Do not attempt to start the engine bypushing.

CAUTION

O Automatic transmission models cannotbe push started. Attempting to do somay cause transmission damage.

O Three way catalyst equipped modelsshould not be started by pushing sincethe three way catalyst may be damaged.

O Never try to start the vehicle by towingit; when the engine starts, the forwardsurge could cause the vehicle to collidewith the tow vehicle.

If needed, Roadside Assistance is avail-able. Please see your Warranty Informa-tion Booklet or Roadside Assistance I.D.Card for the toll-free number to call (U.S.)or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Infor-mation Booklet (Canada).

WARNING

O Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiator capis removed, pressurized hot water willspurt out, possibly causing serious in-jury.

O Do not open the hood if steam is comingout.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicatedby an extremely high temperature gaugereading), or if you feel a lack of enginepower, detect abnormal noise, etc., takethe following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,apply the parking brake and move theselector lever to the P (Park) position(Automatic transmission models).Move the shift lever to the R (Reverse)position (Manual transmission mod-els).

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the climate control. Open allthe windows, move the heater or airconditioner temperature control tomaximum hot and fan control to highspeed.

3. If engine overheating is caused byclimbing a long hill on a hot day, runthe engine at a fast idle (approxi-mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera-ture gauge indication returns tonormal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listenfor steam or coolant escaping from theradiator before opening the hood (Ifsteam or coolant is escaping, turn offthe engine.). Do not open the hoodfurther until no steam or coolant canbe seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the engine,stand clear to prevent getting burned.

6. Visually check if the cooling fan is run-ning. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant isleaking, or the cooling fan does notrun, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jew-elry or clothing to come into contact with, orget caught in, engine belts or the enginecooling fan. The engine cooling fan can startat any time when the coolant temperature ishigh.

7. After the engine cools down, checkthe coolant level in the reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolantto the reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at thenearest INFINITI dealer.


When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro-vincial in Canada) and local regulationsfor towing must be followed. Incorrecttowing equipment could damage your ve-hicle. Towing instructions are availablefrom an INFINITI dealer. Local service op-erators will generally be familiar with theapplicable laws and procedures fortowing. To assure proper towing and toprevent accidental damage to your ve-hicle, INFINITI recommends that you havea service operator tow your vehicle. It isadvisable to have the service operatorcarefully read the following precautions.

WARNING

O Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

O Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CAUTION

O When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpower train are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

O Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to“Flat towing” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.


TOWING RECOMMENDED BYINFINITI

Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models

INFINITI recommends that your vehicle betowed with the driving (rear) wheels offthe ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

O Never tow automatic transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground or four wheels on the ground(forward or backward), as this maycause serious and expensive damage tothe transmission. If it is necessary totow the vehicle with the front wheelsraised, always use towing dollies underthe rear wheels.

SCE0561Two-wheel drive models


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O When towing rear wheel drive modelswith the front wheels on the ground oron towing dollies: Push the ignitionswitch to the ACC or ON position, and se-cure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar de-vice. Never secure the steering wheel byselecting the LOCK position. This maydamage the steering lock mechanism.

O If you have to tow manual transmissionmodels with the rear wheels on theground (if you do not use towing dollies)or four wheels on the ground:

— Push the ignition switch to the ONposition.

— Always release the parking brake.

— Move the transmission shift lever tothe N (Neutral) position.

— Observe the following restricted tow-ing speeds and distances for manualtransmission models only:

Speed: Below 60 MPH (95 km/h)

Distance: Less than 500 miles (800km)

— If the speed or distance must neces-sarily be greater, remove the pro-peller shaft before towing to preventdamage to the transmission.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

INFINITI recommends that towing dolliesbe used when towing your vehicle or thevehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as il-lustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow AWD models with any of thewheels on the ground as this may cause se-rious and expensive damage to the powertrain.

SCE0488All-wheel drive models

SCE0654


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

VEHICLE RECOVERY (Freeing astuck vehicle)

WARNING

O Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

O Do not spin your tires at high speed. Thiscould cause them to explode and resultin serious injury. Parts of your vehiclecould also overheat and be damaged.

Pulling a stuck vehicle

Securely install the vehicle recovery hookq1 stored with jacking tools as illustrated.Make sure that the hook is properly se-cured in the original place after use.

Do not use the tie down hooks q2 fortowing or vehicle recovery.

CAUTION

O Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the vehicle recovery hooks ormain structural members of the vehicle.Otherwise, the vehicle body will be

damaged.

O Do not use the vehicle tie downs to free avehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.

O Never tow a vehicle using the vehicle tiedowns or recovery hooks.

O Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front of the vehicle. Never pull on thevehicle at an angle.

O Pulling devices should be routed so theydo not touch any part of the suspension,steering, brake or cooling systems.

O Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow,mud, etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and be-hind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-tions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and leftto clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward andbackward.

O Shift back and forth between R (re-verse) and D (drive) (automatic trans-mission models) or 1st (low) and R (re-verse) (manual transmission models).

O Apply the accelerator as little as pos-sible to maintain the rocking motion.

O Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R and D (automatictransmission models) or 1st and R(manual transmission models).

O Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after afew tries, contact a professionaltowing service to remove the vehicle.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

MEMO


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .............................................. 7-2Washing ...................................................... 7-2Waxing ........................................................ 7-2Removing spots........................................... 7-3Underbody................................................... 7-3Glass........................................................... 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels................................ 7-3Chrome parts .............................................. 7-3Tire dressing ............................................... 7-3

Cleaning interior............................................... 7-4

Power window switch finisher ..................... 7-5Floor mats ................................................... 7-5Seat belts.................................................... 7-5

Corrosion protection ......................................... 7-6Most common factors contributing tovehicle corrosion......................................... 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion..................................................... 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........ 7-6

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

In order to maintain the appearance ofyour vehicle, it is important to take propercare of it.

To protect the paint surface, wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

O after a rainfall to prevent possibledamage from acid rain

O after driving on coastal roads

O when contaminants such as soot, birddroppings, tree sap, metal particles orbugs get on the paint surface

O when dust or mud builds up on thesurface

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, parkin a shady area or protect the vehicle witha body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wetsponge and plenty of water. Clean the ve-hicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a spe-cial vehicle soap or general purpose dish-

washing liquid mixed with clean, luke-warm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

O Do not use car washes that use acid inthe detergent. Some car washes, espe-cially brushless ones, use some acid forcleaning. The acid may react with someplastic vehicle components, causingthem to crack. This could affect their ap-pearance, and also could cause them notto function properly. Always check withyour car wash to confirm that acid is notused.

O Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

O Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

O Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removing caked-ondirt or other foreign substances so thepaint surface is not scratched or

damaged.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty ofclean water.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on thedoors, hatches and hood are particularlyvulnerable to the effects of road salt.Therefore, these areas must be regularlycleaned. Make sure that the drain holesin the lower edge of the door are open.Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and washaway road salt.

Avoid leaving water spots on the paintsurface by using a damp chamois to drythe vehicle.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surfaceand helps retain new vehicle appearance.Polishing is recommended to removebuilt-up residue and to avoid a weatheredappearance before reapplying wax.

An INFINITI dealer can assist you inchoosing the proper product.

O Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

washing. Follow the instructions sup-plied with the wax.

O Do not use a wax containing any abra-sives, cutting compounds or cleanersthat may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive pol-ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-ish may dull the finish or leave swirlmarks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,insects, and tree sap as quickly as pos-sible from the paint surface to avoid last-ing damage or staining. Special cleaningproducts are available at an INFINITIdealer or automotive accessory stores.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter,the underbody must be cleaned regularly.This will prevent dirt and salt frombuilding up and causing underbody andsuspension corrosion. Before the winterperiod and again in the spring, the under-seal must be checked and, if necessary,re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke anddust film from the glass surfaces. It isnormal for glass to become coated with afilm after the vehicle is parked in the hotsun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth willeasily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows, donot use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electricalconductors, radio antenna elements or rearwindow defogger elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash regularly with a sponge dampenedin a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt isused. Salt could discolor the wheels if notremoved.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid stainingor discoloring the wheels:

O Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

O Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

O Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain thefinish.

TIRE DRESSING

INFINITI does not recommend the use oftire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply acoating to the tires to help reduce discol-oration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is

Appearance and care 7-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

applied to the tires, it may react with thecoating and form a compound. This com-pound may come off the tire while drivingand stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, takethe following precautions:

O Use a water-based tire dressing. Thecoating on the tire dissolves moreeasily with an oil-based tire dressing.

O Apply a light coat of tire dressing tohelp prevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be diffi-cult to remove).

O Wipe off excess tire dressing using adry towel. Make sure the tire dressingis completely removed from the tiretread/grooves.

O Allow the tire dressing to dry as rec-ommended by tire dressing manufac-turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from theinterior trim, plastic parts and seats usinga vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush.Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with aclean, soft cloth dampened in mild soapsolution, then wipe clean with a dry softcloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance to theleather.

Before using any fabric protector, readthe manufacturer’s recommendations.Some fabric protectors contain chemicalsthat may stain or bleach the seat mate-rial. Use a cloth dampened only withwater, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

O Never use benzine, thinner, or anysimilar material.

O Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to the leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do not usesaddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils,cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents orammonia-based cleaners as they maydamage the leather’s natural finish.

O Only use fabric protectors approved byINFINITI.

O Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It maydamage the lens cover.

CLEANING INTERIOR


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

POWER WINDOW SWITCH FINISHER

Wipe the power window switch finishersurfaces with a clean soft cloth dampenedin a mild soap solution, then wipe it cleanwith a dry, soft cloth.

Some cleaners contain chemicals thatmay stain or peel off the surface. Beforeusing any cleaner, contact an INFINITIdealer for recommendations.

Regular care and cleaning is required inorder to maintain the appearance of thepower finisher surfaces.

FLOOR MATS

The use of INFINITI floor mats can extendthe life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matterwhat mats are used, be sure they are fittedfor your vehicle and are properly posi-tioned in the footwell to prevent interfer-ence with pedal operation. Mats should bemaintained with regular cleaning and re-placed if they become excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid

This model includes front floor mat brack-ets to act as floor mat positioning aid.INFINITI floor mats have been speciallydesigned for your vehicle model. The frontfloor mats have grommet holes in them.To install, simply position the mat byplacing the floor mat bracket through thefloor mat grommet hole while centeringthe mat in the floor pan contour.Periodically check to make certain thatthe mats are properly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wipingthem with a sponge dampened in a mildsoap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-pletely before using them.See “Seat belt maintenance” in the“1. Safety — Seats, seat belts and supple-mental restraint system” section.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severely weakenthe seat belt webbing.

SAI0031

SAI0036

Appearance and care 7-5

w 06.8.4/V36-D X

MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

O The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt and debris in body panelsections, cavities, and other areas.

O Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stonechips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water onthe vehicle body underside can acceleratecorrosion. Wet floor coverings will not drycompletely inside the vehicle, and shouldbe removed for drying to avoid floor panelcorrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas ofhigh relative humidity, especially thoseareas where the temperatures stay abovefreezing where atmospheric pollution ex-ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature

A temperature increase will accelerate therate of corrosion to those parts which arenot well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of saltin the air in coastal areas, or heavy roadsalt use will accelerate the corrosion pro-cess. Road salt will also accelerate thedisintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROMCORROSION

O Wash your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

O Always check for minor damage to thepaint and repair it as soon as pos-sible.

O Keep drain holes at the bottom of thedoors open to avoid water accumula-tion.

O Check the underbody for accumulationof sand, dirt or salt. If present, washwith water as soon as possible.

CAUTION

O NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debrisfrom the passenger compartment bywashing it out with a hose. Remove dirtwith a vacuum cleaner or broom.

O Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicingare extremely corrosive. They acceleratecorrosion and deterioration of underbodycomponents such as the exhaust system,fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floorpan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust andcorrosion, which may be required in someareas, consult an INFINITI dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION


w 06.8.4/V36-D X

8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirement ................................. 8-2General maintenance........................................ 8-2

Explanation of maintenance items............... 8-2Maintenance precautions.................................. 8-5Engine compartment check locations................ 8-7

VQ35HR engine ........................................... 8-7Engine cooling system ..................................... 8-8

Checking engine coolant level..................... 8-8Changing engine coolant............................. 8-9

Engine oil ......................................................... 8-9Checking engine oil level ............................ 8-9Changing engine oil and filter .................. 8-10

Automatic transmission fluid........................... 8-12Power steering fluid ........................................ 8-12Brake fluid ...................................................... 8-13Clutch fluid .................................................... 8-14Window washer fluid ...................................... 8-14Battery ............................................................ 8-15

Jump starting............................................. 8-16Variable voltage control system ...................... 8-17Drive belts ...................................................... 8-17Spark plugs .................................................... 8-18

Replacing spark plugs ............................... 8-18Air cleaner ...................................................... 8-19Windshield wiper blades................................. 8-19

Cleaning .................................................... 8-19Replacing .................................................. 8-20

Brakes ............................................................ 8-21Self-adjusting brakes................................. 8-21Brake pad wear indicators ......................... 8-21

Fuses.............................................................. 8-22Engine compartment ................................. 8-22Passenger compartment ............................ 8-23

Intelligent Key battery replacement ................ 8-23Lights ............................................................. 8-25

Headlights ................................................ 8-26Exterior and interior lights ........................ 8-26

Wheels and tires ............................................ 8-28Tire pressure............................................. 8-28Tire labeling .............................................. 8-32Types of tires ............................................ 8-34Tire chains ................................................ 8-35Changing wheels and tires........................ 8-36

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Your new INFINITI has been designed tohave minimum maintenance requirementswith longer service intervals to save youboth time and money. However, some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essen-tial to maintain your INFINITI’s fine me-chanical condition, as well as its emissionand engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure that the specified maintenance, aswell as general maintenance, is per-formed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the onlyone who can ensure that your vehicle re-ceives the proper maintenance care. Youare a vital link in the maintenance chain.

Scheduled maintenance:

For your convenience, both required andoptional scheduled maintenance itemsare described and listed in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”. Youmust refer to that guide to ensure thatnecessary maintenance is performed onyour INFINITI at regular intervals.

General maintenance:

General maintenance includes those itemswhich should be checked during normalday-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is yourresponsibility to perform these proceduresregularly as prescribed.

These checks or inspections can be doneby yourself, a qualified technician or, ifyou prefer, an INFINITI dealer.

Where to go for service:

If maintenance service is required or yourvehicle appears to malfunction, have thesystems checked and serviced by anINFINITI dealer.

INFINITI technicians are well-trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through tech-nical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership information systems. They arecompletely qualified to work on INFINITIvehicles before work begins.

You can be confident that an INFINITIdealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenancerequirements on your vehicle — in areliable and economic way.

During the normal day-to-day operation ofthe vehicle, general maintenance shouldbe performed regularly as prescribed inthis section. If you detect any unusualsounds, vibrations or smell, be sure tocheck for the cause or have an INFINITIdealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify an INFINITI dealer if youthink that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-nance work, see “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCEITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe performed from time to time, unlessotherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that alldoors and the engine hood, operate prop-erly. Also ensure that all latches lock se-curely. Lubricate hinges and latches ifnecessary. Make sure that the secondarylatch keeps the hood from opening when

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

the primary latch is released.

When driving in areas using road salt orother corrosive materials, check lubrica-tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regularbasis. Make sure that the headlights,stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights,and other lights are all operating properlyand installed securely. Also check head-light aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: Whenchecking the tires, make sure no wheelnuts are missing, and check for any loosewheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotatedevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km), except 18-inch tire models.

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gaugeoften and always prior to long distancetrips. If necessary, adjust the pressure inall tires, including the spare, to the pres-sure specified. Check carefully fordamage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If thevehicle should pull to either side whiledriving on a straight and level road, or ifyou detect uneven or abnormal tire wear,there may be a need for wheel alignment.

If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancingmay be needed.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on aregular basis. Check the windshield atleast every six months for cracks or otherdamage. Have a damaged windshield re-paired by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check forcracks or wear if they do not wipe prop-erly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked on a regular basis, such aswhen performing periodic maintenance,cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal forsmooth operation and make sure thepedal does not catch or require uneveneffort. Keep the floor mat away from thepedal.

Automatic transmission P (Park) mecha-nism: On a fairly steep hill, check thatyour vehicle is held securely with the se-lector lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smoothoperation. If the brake pedal suddenlygoes down further than normal, the pedalfeels spongy or the vehicle seems to takelonger to stop, see an INFINITI dealer im-mediately. Keep the floor mat away fromthe pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pullthe vehicle to one side when applied.

Parking brake: Check the parking brakeoperation regularly. The vehicle should besecurely held on a fairly steep hill withonly the parking brake applied. If theparking brake needs adjusted, see anINFINITI dealer.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seatbelt system (For example, buckles, an-chors, adjusters and retractors) operateproperly and smoothly, and are installedsecurely. Check the belt webbing for cuts,fraying, wear or damage.

Seats: Check seat position controls suchas seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

to ensure they operate smoothly and thatall latches lock securely in every position.Check that the head restraints move upand down smoothly and that the locks (ifso equipped) hold securely in all latchedpositions.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in thesteering conditions, such as excessivefree play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make surethat all warning lights and chimes are op-erating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets prop-erly and in sufficient quantity when oper-ating the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properlyand that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here shouldbe checked periodically (For example,each time you check the engine oil or re-fuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in eachcell.It should be between the MAX and MIN

lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera-tures or under severe condition requirefrequent checks of the battery fluid level.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that thebrake fluid level is between the MAX andMIN lines on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolantlevel when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure that nobelt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level afterparking the vehicle on a level spot andturning off the engine. (Wait more than 15minutes for the oil to drain back into theoil pan.)

Exhaust system: Make sure there are noloose supports, cracks or holes. If thesound of the exhaust seems unusual orthere is a smell of exhaust fumes, imme-diately locate the trouble and correct it.See “Precautions when starting anddriving” in the “5. Starting and driving”section for exhaust gas (Carbon monox-ide).

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle forfuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks afterthe vehicle has been parked for a while.Water dripping from the air conditioner

after use is normal. If you should noticeany leaks or if gasoline fumes are evi-dent, check for the cause and have it cor-rected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:Check the level when the fluid is cold andthe engine is turned off. Check the linesfor proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects,leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.Make sure the hoses have no cracks, de-formation, deterioration or loose connec-tions.

Underbody: The underbody is frequentlyexposed to corrosive substances such asthose used on icy roads or to controldust. It is very important to remove thesesubstances, otherwise rust will form onthe floor pan, frame, fuel lines andaround the exhaust system. At the end ofwinter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, beingcareful to clean those areas where mudand dirt may accumulate. For additionalinformation, see “Cleaning exterior” inthe “7. Appearance and care” section.

Windshield washer fluid*: Check thatthere is adequate fluid in the tank.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

When performing any inspection or main-tenance work on your vehicle, always takecare to prevent serious accidental injuryto yourself or damage to the vehicle. Thefollowing are general precautions whichshould be closely observed.

WARNING

O Park the vehicle on a level surface, applythe parking brake securely and block thewheels to prevent the vehicle frommoving. For manual transmissionmodels, move the shift lever to N (Neu-tral) position. For automatic transmis-sion models, move the selector lever to P(Park) position.

O Be sure the ignition switch is in theLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

O If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans,belts and any other moving parts.

O It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

O Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

O If you must run the engine in an enclosedspace such as a garage, be sure there isproper ventilation for exhaust gases toescape.

O Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, support itwith safety stands.

O Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from fuel tank and the bat-tery.

O Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position andthe engine is not running. To avoid in-jury, always disconnect the negativebattery cable before working near thefan.

O The fuel filter or fuel lines should be ser-viced by an INFINITI dealer because thefuel lines are under high pressure evenwhen the engine is off.

CAUTION

O Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

O Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

O Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

O Avoid direct contact with used engine oiland coolant. Improperly disposed en-gine oil, and coolant, and/or other ve-hicle fluids can damage the environ-ment. Always conform to local regula-tions for disposal of vehicle fluid.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section gives instructions regarding onlythose items which are relatively easy formost owners to perform. A genuineINFINITI Service Manual is also available.See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manualorder information” in the “9. Technicaland consumer information” section.

You should be aware that incomplete orimproper servicing may result in oper-ating difficulties or excessive emissions,and could affect your warranty coverage.If in doubt about any servicing, we recom-mend that it be done by an INFINITI dealer.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

VQ35HR ENGINE

1. Fuse/fusible link holder2. Battery3. Engine oil filler cap4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Clutch fluid reservoir (Manual Trans-mission models)

6. Window washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Air cleaner9. Radiator filler cap

10. Drive belts11. Engine coolant reservoir12. Engine oil dipstick

SSI0265

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The engine cooling system is filled at thefactory with a high-quality, year-round,anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corro-sion inhibitors, therefore additionalcooling system additives are not neces-sary.

WARNING

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Wait until the engine andradiator cool down. Serious burns couldbe caused by high pressure fluid es-caping from the radiator. See precau-tions in “If your vehicle overheats” foundin the “6. In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

O The radiator is equipped with a pressuretype radiator cap. To prevent enginedamage, use only a genuine NISSAN ra-diator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sure

to use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water/distilled water. The use of other types ofcoolant solutions may damage your enginecooling system.

Outsidetemperature

down toAnti-

freeze

Demineral-ized water or

distilledwater°C °F

−35 −30 50% 50% CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoirtank when the engine is cold. If thecoolant level is below MIN q2 , open thereservoir tank cap and add coolant up tothe MAX q1 level. If the reservoir tank isempty, check the coolant level in the ra-diator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill theradiator with coolant up to the filler open-ing and also add it to the reservoir tankup to the MAX level q1 . Tighten the capsecurely after adding engine coolant.

SDI2043

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Tighten the cap securely after adding en-gine coolant.

If the cooling system requires coolant fre-quently, have it checked by anINFINITI dealer.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

Contact an INFINITI dealer if replacementis required.

O Major cooling system repairs shouldbe performed by an INFINITI dealer.The service procedures can be foundin the appropriate INFINITI ServiceManual.

O Improper servicing can result in re-duced heater performance and engineoverheating.

WARNING

O To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

O Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

O Avoid direct skin contact with used cool-ant. If skin contact is made, wash thor-oughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

O Keep coolant out of reach of children andpets.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 15minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and checkthe oil level. It should be within the

SDI2045

ENGINE OIL


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

range q1 . If the oil level is below q2 ,remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-ommended oil through the opening.Do not overfill q3 .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of op-erating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Oper-ating the engine with an insufficient amountof oil can damage the engine, and such dam-age is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

Change the engine oil and filter accordingto the maintenance intervals shown in theINFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andapply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine until it reaches operat-ing temperature.

3. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 15 minutes.

4. Raise and support the vehicle using asuitable floor jack and safety jackstands.

• Place the safety jack stands underthe vehicle jack-up points.

• A suitable adapter should be at-tached to the jack stand saddle.

5. Remove the plastic engine undercover.

a. Remove the small plastic clip at thecenter point of the undercover.

b. Then remove the other bolts thathold the undercover in place.

CAUTION

Make sure the correct lifting and supportpoints are used to avoid vehicle damage.

Engine oil and filter

1. Place a large drain pan under thedrain plug.

2. Remove the oil filler cap.3. Remove the drain plug q1 with a

wrench and completely drain the oil.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engineoil is hot.

SDI2024Two-wheel drive (2WD) models


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

O Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

O Check your local regulations.

(Perform steps 4 to 7 only when the en-gine oil filter change is needed.)

4. Loosen the oil filter q2 with an oilfilter wrench. Remove the oil filter byturning it by hand.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter mountingsurface with a clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old rubbergasket remaining on the mounting sur-face of the engine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter withclean engine oil.

7. Screw in the oil filter clockwise until aslight resistance is felt, then tightenadditionally more than 2/3 turn.

Oil filter tightening torque:

11 to 15 ft-lb(14.7 to 20.5 Nzm)

8. Clean and re-install the drain plugwith a new washer. Securely tightenthe drain plug with a wrench.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 to 29 ft-lb(29 to 39 Nzm)

Do not use excessive force.9. Refill engine with recommended oil

and install the oil filler cap securely.

CAUTION

The dipstick must be inserted in place toprevent oil spillage from the dipstick holewhile filling the engine with oil.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical

and consumer information” section fordrain and refill capacity. The drain andrefill capacity depends on the oil tem-perature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Al-ways use the dipstick to determine theproper amount of oil in the engine.

10. Start the engine and check forleakage around the drain plug andthe oil filter. Correct as required.

11. Turn the engine off and wait morethan 15 minutes. Check the oil levelwith the dipstick. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

After the operation

1. Install the engine undercover into po-sition as the following steps.

a. Pull the center of the small plasticclip out.

b. Hold the engine undercover intoposition.

c. Insert the clip through the under-cover into the hole in the frame,then push the center of the clip into lock the clip in place.

d. Install the other bolts that hold theundercover in place. Be careful not

SDI2047All-wheel drive (AWD) models


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

to strip the bolts or over-tightenthem.

2. Lower the vehicle carefully to theground.

3. Dispose of waste oil and filter prop-erly.

WARNING

O Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

O Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaner assoon as possible.

O Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

When checking or replacement is re-quired, we recommend an INFINITI dealerfor servicing.

CAUTION

O Use only Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF.Do not mix with other fluids.

O Using automatic transmission fluidother than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATFwill cause deterioration in driveabilityand automatic transmission durability,and may damage the automatic trans-mission, which is not covered by theINFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.

The specified automatic transmissionfluid is also described on caution labelslocated on the flip side of the hood.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked usingthe HOT range (q1 : HOT MAX., q2 : HOTMIN.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176°F(50 to 80°C) or using the COLD range (q3 :COLD MAX., q4 : COLD MIN.) at fluid tem-peratures of 32 to 86°F (0 to 30°C).

CAUTION

O Do not overfill.

O Use Genuine NISSAN PSF or equiva-

SDI1765A

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

lent.

WARNING

Use only new fluid. Old, inferior, or contami-nated fluid may damage the brake system.The use of improper fluids can damage thebrake system and affect the vehicle’s stop-ping ability.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid is below the MIN line q2 or thebrake warning light comes on, add Genu-ine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid

or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up to the MAXline q1 . If fluid must be added frequently,the system should be checked by anINFINITI dealer.

For further brake fluid specification infor-mation, refer to “Capacities and recom-mended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Tech-nical and consumer information” sectionof this manual.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfaces withwater.

SDI2025

BRAKE FLUID


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Ifthe fluid level is below the MIN line q1 ,add Genuine Nissan Super Heavy DutyBrake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid up tothe MAX line q2 .

If fluid is added frequently, the systemshould be thoroughly checked by anINFINITI dealer.

WARNING

O Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminatedfluid may damage the clutch system.

O Be sure to clean filler cap before re-moving.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces.This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled,wash the surface with water. WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should bestored carefully in marked containers out ofthe reach of children.

Add fluid when the low washer fluidwarning light illuminates. Pull up the res-ervoir tank cap and add a washer solventto the water for better cleaning. In thewinter season, add a windshield washerantifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

SDI1906A SDI2027

CLUTCH FLUID WINDOW WASHER FLUID


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSANWindshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &Antifreeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

O Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution. Thismay result in damage to the paint.

O Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

O Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concentrateand water.

O Keep the battery surface clean anddry. Any corrosion should be washedoff with a solution of baking soda andwater.

O Make certain the terminal connectionsare clean and securely tightened.

O If the vehicle is not to be used for 30days or longer, disconnect the nega-tive (—) battery terminal cable to pre-vent discharging it.

WARNING

O Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly washyour hands. If the acid contacts youreyes, skin or clothing, immediately flushwith water for at least 15 minutes andseek medical attention.

O Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce batterylife, and in some cases lead to an explo-sion.

O When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

O Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

O Keep the battery out of the reach ofchildren.

BATTERY


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

Check the fluid level in each cell (Removethe battery cover if it is necessary). Itshould be between the UPPER LEVEL q1and LOWER LEVEL q2 lines.

If it is necessary to add fluid, add onlydistilled water to bring the level to the in-dicator in each filler opening. Do not over-fill.

1. Remove the cell plugs qA .

2. Add distilled water up to the UPPERLEVEL q1 line.

If the side of the battery is not clear,check the distilled water level by look-ing directly above the cell; the condi-tion q1 indicates OK and the condi-tions q2 needs more to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs qA .

Vehicles operated in high temperatures orunder severe conditions require frequentchecks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, see “Jumpstarting” in the “6. In case of emergency”section. If the engine does not start byjump starting, the battery may have to bereplaced. Contact an INFINITI dealer.

DI0137MA SDI1480C


w 06.9.21/V36-D X

CAUTION

O Do not ground accessories directly tothe battery terminal. Doing so will by-pass the variable voltage control systemand the vehicle battery may not chargecompletely.

O Use electrical accessories with the en-gine running to avoid discharging thevehicle battery.

The variable voltage control system mea-sures the amount of electrical dischargefrom the battery and controls voltage gen-erated by the generator.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Alternator3. Crankshaft pulley4. Air conditioner compressorD: Tension checking points

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is in the LOCKposition. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs ofunusual wear, cuts, fraying or loose-

ness. If the belt is in poor condition orloose, have it replaced or adjusted byan INFINITI dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly forcondition in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in your “INFINITIService and Maintenance Guide”.

SDI2041

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM DRIVE BELTS


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

Be sure the engine is off, ignition switch is inthe LOCK position and that the parkingbrake is engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to removethe spark plugs. An incorrect socket candamage the spark plugs.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

If replacement is required, see an INFINITIdealer for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace the iridium-tipped spark plugs as frequently as theconventional type spark plugs since theywill last much longer. Follow the mainte-nance schedule in “INFINITI Service andMaintenance Guide”, but do not reusethem by cleaning or regapping.

Always replace spark plugs with recom-mended or equivalent ones.

SDI2020

SPARK PLUGS


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Remove the retainers q1 as illustratedand pull out the filter element q2 .

The filter element should not be cleanedand reused. Replace it according to themaintenance intervals. See “INFINITI Ser-

vice and Maintenance Guide” for mainte-nance intervals. When replacing the filter,wipe the inside of the air cleaner housingand the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING

O Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air, it stops flame if the en-gine backfires. If it isn’t there, and theengine backfires, you could be burned.Do not drive with the air cleaner re-moved, and be careful when working onthe engine with the air cleaner removed.

O Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after usingthe windshield washer or if a wiper bladechatters when running, wax or other ma-terial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with awasher solution or a mild detergent. Yourwindshield is clean if beads do not formwhen rinsing with clear water.

Clean the blade by wiping it with a clothsoaked in a washer solution or a mild de-tergent. Then rinse the blade with clearwater. If your windshield is still not clearafter cleaning the blades and using thewiper, replace the blades.

SDI2033

AIR CLEANER WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

1. Pull the wiper arm.

2. Push the release tab qA , and thenmove the wiper blade down the wiperarm q1 while pushing the release tabto remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto thewiper arm until a click sounds.

CAUTION

O After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

O Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arm may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

O Worn windshield wiper blades candamage the windshield and impairdriver vision.

SDI2048


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-ful not to let wax get into the washernozzle qA . This may cause clogging or im-proper windshield washer operation. Ifwax gets into the nozzle, remove it with aneedle or small pin qB .

If the brakes do not operate properly,have the brakes checked by an INFINITIdealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.

The disc-type brakes self-adjust everytime the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See an INFINITI dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does not re-turn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle haveaudible wear indicators. When a brakepad requires replacement, it will make ahigh pitched scraping or screechingsound when the vehicle is in motionwhether or not the brake pedal is de-pressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or othernoise may be heard. Occasional brakenoise during light to moderate stops isnormal and does not affect the function orperformance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For additional information,see the maintenance log section of your“INFINITI Service and Maintenance Guide”for maintenance intervals.

SDI1832

BRAKES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the electricalsystem or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushedto the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the engine hood and remove thecover on the battery and the fuse/fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holdercover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

5. If the fuse is open qA , replace it with anew fuse qB . Spare fuses are stored inthe passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Fusible links

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate and fuses are in good condition,check the fusible links. If any of thesefusible links are melted, replace only withgenuine INFINITI parts.

SDI1479A SDI1754

FUSES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower am-perage rating than that specified on the fusebox cover. This could damage the electricalsystem or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushedto the OFF or LOCK position and the

headlight switch is turned to OFF.

2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse pullerqA .

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with anew fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have theelectrical system checked and re-paired by an INFINITI dealer.

Replace the battery as follows:

1. Release the lock knob at the back ofthe Intelligent Key and remove the me-chanical key.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver qA

wrapped with a cloth into the slit qB

of the corner and twist it to separatethe upper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

O Do not touch the internal circuit andelectric terminals as it could cause amalfunction.

SDI2034 SDI1834

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Recommended battery: CR2032 orequivalent

Make sure that the ! side faces thebottom of the case. The ! mark isstamped on the bottom of the case.

4. Align the tips of the upper and lowerparts, and then push them togetheruntil it is securely closed.

5. Push the buttons two or three times tocheck its operation.

See an INFINITI dealer if you need any as-sistance for replacement.

If the battery is removed for any reasonother than replacement, perform step 5above.

O Be careful not to touch the circuit boardand the battery terminal as it couldcause a malfunction.

O An improperly disposed battery canharm the environment. Always confirmlocal regulations for battery disposal.

O When changing batteries, do not letdust or oil get on the Intelligent Key.

FCC Notice:

This equipment has been tested and foundto comply with the limits for a Class B digi-tal device pursuant to part 15 of the FCCRules. These limits are designed to providereasonable protection against harmful in-terference in a residential installation.This equipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if notinstalled and used in accordance with theinstructions, may cause harmful interfer-ence to radio communications. However,there is no guarantee that interference willnot occur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception, whichcan be determined by turning the equip-

ment off and on, the user is encouraged totry to correct the interference by one ormore of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna

— Increase the separation between theequipment and the receiver

— Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that to whichthe receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

SDI2042


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Front turn signal light

2. Headlight (high- and low-beam)

3. Clearance light and front side turn sig-nal light

4. Map light

5. Rear personal light

6. Fog light

8. Step light

9. High-mounted stop light (on the rearparcel shelf or in the rear spoiler)*

10. Trunk light

11. License plate light

12. Back-up light

13. Rear combination light (rear turnsignal/tail/stop/side marker light)

*: Note that the high-mounted stop lighton the rear parcel shelf will not be lit ifthe vehicle is equipped with the rearspoiler.

SDI2035

LIGHTS


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing

Xenon headlight bulb:

WARNING

HIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they producea high voltage. To prevent an electric shock,never attempt to modify or disassemble. Al-ways have your xenon headlights replacedat an INFINITI dealer. For additional informa-tion, see “Headlight and turn signal switch”in the “2. Instruments and controls” section.

If replacement is required, see an INFINITIdealer.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lensof the exterior lights in the rain or in a carwash. A temperature difference betweenthe inside and the outside of the lenscauses the fog. This is not a malfunction.If large drops of water collect inside thelens, contact an INFINITI dealer.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.Front turn signal light* 21 WY21WFront fog light* 51 HB4Clearance light and front side turn signal light* 5 WY5WRear combination light*

back-up 16 W16Wturn signal 21 W21Wstop/tail/side marker LED —

License plate light* 5 T10Map light 8 —Rear personal light 8 —Vanity mirror light 2 —Step light* 5 —Trunk light* 3.4 —High-mounted stop light* LED —

*: See an INFINITI dealer for replacement.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C, D,E or F. When replacing a bulb, first re-move the lens and/or cover.

SDI1679

SDI2030Map light

SDI2031Rear personal light


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the“6. In case of emergency” section.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit, one or more of yourtires is significantly underinflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the ve-hicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “2. Instrumentsand controls” section, “Tire Pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “5.Starting and driving” section and “Flattire” in the “6. In case of emergency” sec-tion.

Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure of the tires (includ-ing the spare) often and always prior tolong distance trips. The recommended

tire pressure specifications are shownon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel under the “Cold Tire Pressure”heading. The Tire and Loading Informa-tion label is affixed to the driver sidecenter pillar. Tire pressures should bechecked regularly because:O Most tires naturally lose air over

time.O Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle hasbeen parked for 3 or more hours, ordriven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at mod-erate speeds.

Incorrect tire pressure, including underinflation, may adversely affect tire lifeand vehicle handling.

SDI2032Vanity mirror light

WHEELS AND TIRES


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

WARNING

O Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

O The Gross Vehicle Weight rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and Loading In-formation label. Do not load yourvehicle beyond this capacity.Overloading your vehicle may re-sult in reduced tire life, unsafe op-erating conditions due to prema-ture tire failure, or unfavorablehandling characteristics andcould also lead to a serious acci-dent. Loading beyond the speci-fied capacity may also result infailure of other vehicle compo-nents.

O Before taking a long trip, or when-ever you heavily load your vehicle,use a tire pressure gauge to en-sure that the tire pressures are atthe specified level.

O Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tirefailure, loss of control and pos-sible injury.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Tire and loading information label

q1 Seating capacity: The maximumnumber of occupants that can beseated in the vehicle.

q2 Vehicle load limit: See “loading in-formation” in the “9. Technical andconsumer information” section.

q3 Original size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

q4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires arecold. Tires are considered COLD afterthe vehicle has been parked for 3 ormore hours, or driven less than 1mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.The recommended cold tire inflationis set by the manufacturer to providethe best balance of tire wear, vehiclehandling, driveability, tire noise,etc., up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

q5 Tire size — refer to “Tire labeling”later in this section.

q6 Spare tire size or compact spare tiresize (if so equipped)

SDI1948


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Checking the tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not presstoo hard or force the valve stemsideways, or air will escape. If thehissing sound of air escaping fromthe tire is heard while checking thepressure, reposition the gauge toeliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare it to the specifi-cation shown on the Tire andLoading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add or re-lease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

SIZECOLD TIREINFLATIONPRESSURE

FRONTORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/55R1795V

230 kPa,33 PSI

225/50 R1895W

230 kPa,33 PSI

REARORIGINAL

TIRE

P225/55 R1795V

230 kPa,33 PSI

245/45R1896W

230 kPa,33 PSI

SPARETIRE T145/80D17 420 kPa,

60 PSI

SDI1949


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informa-tion identifies and describes the funda-mental characteristics of the tire andalso provides the tire identificationnumber (TIN) for safety standard certifi-cation. The TIN can be used to identifythe tire in case of a recall.

q1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. (Notall tires have this information.)

2. Three-digit number (215): Thisnumber gives the width in millime-ters of the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It isa measurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

SDI1575Example

SDI1606Example


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

q2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-ment of Transportation”. Thesymbol can be placed above,below or to the left or right ofthe Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s iden-tification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Op-tional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

q3 Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubber-coated fabric in the tire.Tire manufacturers also must indi-cate the materials in the tire, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers.

q4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure.

q5 Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. When re-

placing the tires on the vehicle, al-ways use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

q6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”Indicates whether the tire requiresan inner tube (“tube type”) or not(“tubeless”).

q7 The word “radial”The word “radial” is shown, if thetire has radial structure.

q8 Manufacturer or Brand nameManufacturer or Brand name isshown.

Other tire-related terminology:

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, In-tended Outboard Sidewall is (1) thesidewall that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering or bears manufac-turer, brand and/or model namemolding that is higher or deeper thanthe same molding on the other sidewallof the tire, or (2) the outward facingsidewall of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that must always

SDI1607Example


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

face outward when mounted on a ve-hicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

O When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(Example: Summer, All Season or Snow)and construction. An INFINITI dealer maybe able to help you with informationabout tire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

O Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.


O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

INFINITI specifies all season tires on somemodels to provide good performance allyear, including snowy and icy road condi-tions. All Season tires are identified byALL SEASON and/or M&S (Mud and Snow)on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have bet-ter snow traction than All Season tiresand may be more appropriate in some ar-eas.

Summer tiresINFINITI specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performance issubstantially reduced in snow and ice.Summer tires do not have the tire tractionrating M&S on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle insnowy or icy conditions, INFINITI recom-mends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEA-SON tires on all four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessaryto select tires equivalent in size and load

rating to the original equipment tires. Ifyou do not, it can adversely affect thesafety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires will have lowerspeed ratings than factory equipped tiresand may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, INFINITI recommends the useof SNOW or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-ded tires may be used. However, someprovinces and states prohibit their use.Check local, state and provincial laws be-fore installing studded tires. Skid andtraction capabilities of studded snowtires, on wet or dry surfaces, may bepoorer than that of non-studded snowtires.

Snow tires could affect the proper opera-tion of the low tire pressure monitoringsystem.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) models

CAUTION

O Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted orradial), and tread pattern on all fourwheels. Failure to do so may result in acircumference difference between tireson the front and rear axles which willcause excessive tire wear and may dam-age the transmission, transfer case anddifferential gears.

O ONLY use spare tires specified for theAWD model.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recom-mended that all four tires be replacedwith tires of the same size, brand, con-struction and tread pattern. The tire pres-sure and wheel alignment should also bechecked and corrected as necessary. Con-tact an INFINITI dealer.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Driving

with chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

TIRE CHAINS

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-cording to location. Check the local lawsbefore installing tire chains. When install-ing tire chains, make sure they are theproper size for the tires on your vehicleand are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEClass S chains. Class “S” chains are usedon vehicles with restricted tire to vehicleclearance. Vehicles that can use Class “S”chains are designed to meet the SAEstandard minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspen-sion or body component required to ac-commodate the use of a winter tractiondevice (tire chains or cables). Theminimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tire size. Othertypes may damage your vehicle. Usechain tensioners when recommended bythe tire chain manufacturer to ensure atight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to preventthe possibility of whipping action damageto the fenders or underbody. If possible,avoid fully loading your vehicle when

using tire chains. In addition, drive at areduced speed. Otherwise, your vehiclemay be damaged and/or vehicle handlingand performance may be adversely af-fected.

Tire chains must be installed only on therear wheels and not on the front wheels.

Do not drive with tire chains on pavedroads which are clear of snow. Drivingwith chains in such conditions can causedamage to the various mechanisms of thevehicle due to some overstress.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

O Never install tire chains on a T-typespare tire as this could damage your ve-hicle.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation (except 18-inch tiremodels)

INFINITI recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km), except18-in tire models. See “Flat tire” in the“6. In case of emergency” section fortire replacing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten the wheelnuts to the specified torque with atorque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 Nzm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightenedto the specification at all times. It is rec-ommended that wheel nuts be tightenedto the specification at each tire rotationinterval.

WARNING

O After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

O Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

O Do not include the T-type sparetire or any other small size sparetire in the tire rotation.


Tire rotation (18-inch tire models)Tires cannot be rotated on this vehicle,as front tires are a different size fromrear tires and the direction of the wheelrotation is fixed for each tire.

A pin is on the front brake rotor to pre-vent the rear wheels from being in-stalled in place of the front wheels. Thespare tire can be installed in place ofthe front and rear wheels. When install-ing the spare tire in the front wheel, thehole in the spare tire wheel must bealigned with the pin on the brake rotor.

WARNING

O Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).


SDI1662


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Wear indicator2. Wear indicator location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

O Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking,bulging or objects caught in thetread. If excessive wear, cracks,bulging or deep cuts are found, thetire(s) should be replaced.

O The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When wearindicators are visible, the tire(s)should be replaced.

O Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician, becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

O Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact an INFINITIdealer.

O For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information” (Canada)in the Warranty InformationBooklet.

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. See “Specifica-tions” in the “9. Technical and consumerinformation” section for recommendedtypes and sizes of tires and wheels.

WARNING

O The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires of dif-ferent brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns canadversely affect the ride, braking, han-dling, ground clearance, body-to-tireclearance, tire chain clearance, speed-ometer calibration, headlight aim andbumper height. Some of these effectsmay lead to accidents and could result inserious personal injury.

O If the wheels are changed for any reason,always replace with wheels which havethe same off-set dimension. Wheels of adifferent off-set could cause prematuretire wear, degrade vehicle handling char-acteristics and/or interference with thebrake discs/drums. Such interferencecan lead to decreased

MDI0004B


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

braking efficiency and/or early brakepad/shoe wear. Refer to “Wheels andtires” in the “9. Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual forwheel off-set dimensions.

O When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-cated, the TPMS will not function and thelow tire pressure warning light will flashfor approximately 1 minute. The light willremain on after 1 minute. Contact yourINFINITI dealer as soon as possible fortire replacement and/or system reset-ting.


O Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Such wheelsor tires could have structural damageand could fail without warning.

O The use of retread tire is notrecommended.

O For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or ra-dial), and tread pattern on all four wheels.Failure to do so may result in a circumferencedifference between tires on the front andrear axles which will cause excessive tirewear and may damage the transmission,transfer case and differential gears (AWDmodels).

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehiclehandling and tire life. Even with regularuse, wheels can get out of balance. There-fore, they should be balanced as re-quired.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to transmission damage.

For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Informa-tion” (US) or “Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the INFINITI Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Care of wheels

O Wash the wheels when washing thevehicle to maintain their appearance.

O Clean the inner side of the wheelswhen the wheel is changed or the un-derside of the vehicle is washed.

O Do not use abrasive cleaners whenwashing the wheels.

O Inspect wheel rims regularly for dentsor corrosion. Such damage may causeloss of pressure or poor seal at thetire bead.

O INFINITI recommends that the roadwheels be waxed to protect againstroad salt in areas where it is usedduring winter.


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY(T-type) spare tire)

When a spare tire is mounted (t-type orconventional), the low tire pressure warn-ing system will not function.

Observe the following precautions if theT-type spare tire must be used, otherwiseyour vehicle could be damaged or in-volved in an accident.

WARNING

O The T-type spare tire should be used foremergency use. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

O Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

O Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar). Always keepthe pressure of the full size spare tire (ifso equipped) at the recommended pres-sure for standard tires, as indicated onthe Tire and Loading Information label.For Tire and Loading Information labellocation, see “Tire and Loading Informa-tion label” in the index of this manual.

O With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive your vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

O When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire should be used on the frontwheels and original tire used on the rearwheels (drive wheels). Use tire chainsonly on the two rear original tires.

O Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire will wear at a faster rate thanthe standard tire. Replace the spare tireas soon as the tread wear indicatorsappear.

O Do not use the spare tire on other ve-hicles.

O Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

CAUTION

O Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will notfit properly and may cause damage tothe vehicle.

O Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do not driveover obstacles. Also do not drive the ve-hicle through an automatic car washsince it may get caught.


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

MEMO


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ... 9-2Fuel recommendation .................................. 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..... 9-5Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations......................... 9-6

Specifications ................................................... 9-7Engine......................................................... 9-7Wheels and tires......................................... 9-8Dimensions ................................................. 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country................................................ 9-9Vehicle identification........................................ 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate .... 9-9Vehicle identification number (Chassisnumber) ...................................................... 9-9Engine serial number................................. 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10Emission control information label............. 9-10Tire and loading information label.............. 9-11

Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11Installing front license plate............................ 9-12Vehicle loading information ............................ 9-13

Terms ........................................................ 9-13Vehicle load capacity................................. 9-14Loading tips............................................... 9-15Measurement of weights ........................... 9-16

Towing a trailer............................................... 9-16Flat towing................................................. 9-16

Uniform tire quality grading ............................ 9-17Emission control system warranty................... 9-18Reporting safety defects (US only) .................. 9-18Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) .................................................. 9-19Event data recorders ..................................... 9-20Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation..................................................... 9-20

In the event of a collision .......................... 9-21

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure in-structed in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) RecommendedspecificationsUS measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 76 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI (RON 96)*1Engine oil*5Drain and refill

With oil filter change 5-1/8 qt 4-3/8 qt 4.9 O Engine oil with API Certification Mark*2O Viscosity SAE 5W-30Without oil filter

change 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6

Cooling systemWith reservoir 9-1/2 qt 7-7/8 qt 9.0 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled waterReservoir 7/8 qt 3/4 qt 0.8Automatic transmissionfluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF*3

Manual transmission gearoil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF)

HQ Multi 75W-85 or API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 or 75W-90Differential gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 80W-90 or API GL-5 Viscosity SAE 80W-90*6

Transfer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic Trans-mission Fluid*7

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the “8. Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent*9Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3Multi-purpose grease

without limited slipdifferential

NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)with limited slip dif-ferential

Air conditioning systemrefrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*8

Air conditioning systemlubricants — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil

Type S or exact equivalentWindow washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent

*1: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for fuel recommendation.*2: For additional information, see later in this paragraph for engine oil and oil filter recommendation.*3: Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not

covered by the INFINITI new vehicle limited warranty.*4: Available in mainland US through an INFINITI dealer.*5: For additional information, see “Engine oil” in the “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section for changing engine oil.*6: For hot climates, viscosity SAE 90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 32°F (0°C).*7: DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent may also be used. Outside the continental United States and Alaska contact an INFINITI dealer for more information regarding suitable fluids, including recommended

brand(s) of DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM automatic transmission fluid.*8: For additional information, see “Vehicle identification” in this section for air conditioner specification label.*9: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRONTMIII/MERCONTM or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information

w 06.8.14/V36-D X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

INFINITI recommends the use of unleadedpremium gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 93 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number(Research octane number 98).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-able, you may use unleaded regular gaso-line with an octane rating of at least 87AKI number (Research octane number 91),but you may notice a decrease in perfor-mance.

CAUTION

O Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol system, and may also affect war-ranty coverage.

O Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, because this will dam-age the three-way catalyst.

O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on E-85fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuelsystem components and is not coveredby the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

INFINITI recommends using gasoline thatmeets the World-Wide Fuel Charter(WWFC) specifications where it is avail-able. Many of the automobile manufactur-ers developed this specification to im-prove emission system and vehicle perfor-mance. Ask your service station managerif the gasoline meets the World-Wide FuelCharter (WWFC) specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producingreformulated gasolines. These gasolinesare specially designed to reduce vehicleemissions. INFINITI supports efforts to-wards cleaner air and suggests that youuse reformulated gasoline when avail-able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBEand methanol with or without advertisingtheir presence. INFINITI does not recom-mend the use of fuels of which the oxy-genate content and the fuel compatibilityfor your INFINITI cannot be readily deter-mined. If in doubt, ask your service sta-tion manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline,please take the following precautions asthe usage of such fuels may cause vehicleperformance problems and/or fuel systemdamage.

O The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than that rec-ommended for unleaded gasoline.

O If an oxygenate-blend, excepting amethanol blend, is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

O If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol (me-thyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It shouldalso contain a suitable amount of appro-priate cosolvents and corrosion inhibi-tors. If not properly formulated with ap-propriate cosolvents and corrosion in-hibitors, such methanol blends maycause fuel system damage and/or ve-hicle performance problems. At thistime, sufficient data is not available toensure that all methanol blends are suit-able for use in INFINITI vehicles.

If any undesirable driveability problemssuch as engine stalling or hard hotstarting are experienced after using

Technical and consumer information 9-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuelwith a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

E-85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso-line. E-85 can only be used in a FlexibleFuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel inyour vehicle. U.S. government regulationsrequire fuel ethanol dispensing pumps tobe identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbre-viation or the appropriate percentage forthat region.

Aftermarket fuel additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofany aftermarket fuel additives (Example:fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, in-take valve deposit removers, etc.) whichare sold commercially. Many of these ad-ditives intended for gum, varnish or de-posit removal may contain active solventor similar ingredients that can be harmfulto the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended above cancause persistent, heavy spark knock.(Spark knock is a metallic rapping noise.)If severe, this can lead to engine damage.If you detect a persistent heavy sparkknock even when using gasoline of thestated octane rating, or if you hear steadyspark knock while holding a steady speedon level roads, have an INFINITI dealer cor-rect the condition. Failure to correct thecondition is misuse of the vehicle, forwhich INFINITI is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing will result inknocking, after-run or overheating. This inturn may cause excessive fuel consump-tion or damage to the engine. If any of theabove symptoms are encountered, haveyour vehicle checked at an INFINITI dealeror other competent service facility.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time while ac-celerating or driving up hills. This is nocause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. API certification mark2. API service symbol

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensuresatisfactory engine life and performance,see “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” earlier in this section. IN-FINITI recommends the use of an energyconserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-cation or International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee (IL-SAC) certification and SAE viscosity stan-dard. These oils have the API certificationmark on the front of the container. Oilswhich do not have the specified qualitylabel should not be used as they couldcause engine damage.

Oil additives

INFINITI does not recommend the use ofoil additives. The use of an oil additive isnot necessary when the proper oil type is

used and maintenance intervals are fol-lowed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter orhas been previously used should not beused.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thicknesschanges with temperature. Because ofthis, it is important that the engine oil vis-cosity be selected based on the tempera-tures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. Choosingan oil viscosity other than that recom-mended could cause serious engine dam-age.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new vehicle is equipped with a high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use the genuine oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described inchange intervals.

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals foryour engine are based on the use of thespecified quality oils and filters. Oil andfilter other than the specified quality, oroil and filter change intervals longer than

STI0505


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

recommended could reduce engine life.Damage to engines caused by impropermaintenance or use of incorrect oil andfilter quality and/or viscosity is not cov-ered by the new INFINITI vehicle limitedwarranties.

Your engine was filled with a high qualityengine oil when it was built. You do nothave to change the oil before the first rec-ommended change interval. Oil and filterchange intervals depend upon how youuse your vehicle. Operation under the fol-lowing conditions may require more fre-quent oil and filter changes.

O repeated short distance driving at coldoutside temperatures,

O driving in dusty conditions,

O extensive idling,

O stop and go “rush hour” traffic,

O aggressive driving.

Refer to the “INFINITI Service and Mainte-nance Guide” for the maintenance sched-ule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANTRECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioning system in yourINFINITI vehicle must be charged with therefrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the lu-bricant, NISSAN A/C system oil Type S orthe exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or lubricantwill cause severe damage to the air condi-tioning system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner system compo-nents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourINFINITI vehicle will not harm the earth’sozone layer. Although this refrigerantdoes not affect the earth’s atmosphere,certain governmental regulations requirethe recovery and recycling of any refriger-ant during automotive air conditioningsystem service. Your INFINITI dealer hasthe trained technicians and equipmentneeded to recover and recycle your airconditioning system refrigerant.

Contact an INFINITI dealer when servicingyour air conditioning system.


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ENGINE

Model VQ35HR

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60°

Bore 3 Stroke in (mm) 3.760 3 3.205 (95.5 3 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6

Idle speed rpm See the emission control informationlabel on the underside of the hood.Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

STI0425VQ35HR models

SPECIFICATIONS


w 06.9.14/V36-D X

WHEELS AND TIRES

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum

17 x 7-1/2J 1.77 (45)

Front: 18 x 7-1/2J 1.77 (45)

Rear: 18 x 8-1/2J 1.97 (50)

Spare 17 x 4T 1.18 (30)

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Conventional

P225/55R17

33 (230)Front: 225/50R18

Rear: 245/45R18

Spare (T-type) T145/80D17 60 (420)

DIMENSIONS

Overall length (With frontlicense plate) in (mm) 187.2 (4,755)

Overall width in (mm) 69.7 (1,770)

Overall height in (mm)57.1 (1,450)*1*357.7 (1,465)*2

Front tread in (mm) 59.8 (1,520)

Rear tread in (mm)59.8 (1,520)*160.0 (1,525)*260.2 (1,530)*3

Wheelbase in (mm) 112.2 (2,850)

*1: Two-wheel drive (2WD) 18-in tire models*2: All-wheel drive (AWD) models*3: Two-wheel drive (2WD) 17-in tire models


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

If you plan to travel in another country, youshould first find out if the fuel available issuitable for your vehicle’s engine.

Using fuel with too low an octane ratingmay cause engine damage. All gasolinevehicles must be operated with unleadedgasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your ve-hicle to areas where appropriate fuel isnot available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modifythe vehicle to meet local laws and regula-tions.

The laws and regulations for motor ve-hicle emission control and safety stan-dards vary according to the country,state, province or district; therefore, ve-hicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, trans-portation, and registration are the respon-sibility of the user. INFINITI is not respon-sible for any inconvenience that may re-sult.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATE

The vehicle identification number plate isattached as shown. This number is theidentification for your vehicle and is usedin the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(Chassis number)

The number is stamped as shown in theengine compartment.

STI0431 STI0492

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING YOURVEHICLE IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine asshown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certificationlabel is affixed as shown. This label con-tains valuable vehicle information, suchas: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR),Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), monthand year of manufacture, Vehicle Identifi-cation Number, (VIN), etc. Review it care-fully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATIONLABEL

The emission control information label isattached as shown.

STI0509 STI0493 STI0422


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on theTire and Loading Information label affixedto the pillar as illustrated.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABEL

The air conditioner specification label isattached as shown.

STI0494 STI0495


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Use the following steps to mount the li-cense plate:

Before mounting the license plate, con-firm that the following parts are enclosedin the plastic bag.

Only use the recommended mounting po-sition or Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)sensor obstruction (if so equipped) mayresult.

O License plate bracket

O J-nut x 2

O Screw x 2

O Screw grommet x 2

1. Temporarily place the license platebracket while aligning the lines qA be-hind the top of the front bumperopening with part qB of the rear sur-face of the license plate bracket.

2. To determine where to drill the hole,mark along both sides of themounting hole by using a felt-tip pen.

3. Remove the license plate bracket andconnect the arcs to form ovals. Markthe point in the center of each oval.These are the pilot drilling locations.

4. Carefully drill two pilot holes using aSTI0496

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

0.39 in (10 mm) drill bit at the markedlocations. (Be sure that the drill onlygoes through the fascia, or damage tothe nut may occur.)

5. Insert grommets into the hole on thefascia.

6. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into thegrommet hole to add 90° turn onto thepart qC .

7. Insert a J-nut into the license platebracket before placing the licenseplate bracket on the fascia.

8. Install the license plate bracket withscrews.

9. Install the license plate with bolts thatare no longer than 0.55 in (14 mm).

WARNING

O It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside the vehicle.In a collision, people riding inthese areas are more likely to beseriously injured or killed.

O Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

O Be sure everyone in your vehicle isin a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourselfwith the following terms before loadingyour vehicle:

O Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment,fluids, emergency tools, and sparetire assembly. This weight does notinclude passengers and cargo.

O GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

O GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)- maximum total combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers,luggage, hitch, trailer tongue loadand any other optional equipment.This information is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

O GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit speci-fied for the front or rear axle. Thisinformation is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

O GCWR (Gross Combined WeightRating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

O Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum com-bined weight of occupants andcargo that can be loaded into the ve-hicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

trailer, the trailer tongue weightmust be included as part of thecargo load. This information is lo-cated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label.

O Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the weight of total occu-pants weight subtracted from theload limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as “The combined weightof occupants and cargo” on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not ex-

ceed the number of occupants shownas “Seating Capacity” on the Tire andLoading Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

STI0365


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

occupants, then add the total luggageweight to the value. Examples areshown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct loadlimit

(1) Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load ca-pacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.) or 640 − 340 (5 x70) = 300 kg.

(5) Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) foryour vehicle. See “Measurement ofWeights” later in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflationpressures. See the Tire and Loading In-formation label.

LOADING TIPS

O The GVW must not exceed GVWR orGAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

O Do not load the front and rear axle

to the GAWR. Doing so will exceedthe GVWR.

WARNING

O Properly secure all cargo to helpprevent it from sliding or shifting.Do not place cargo higher than theseatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

O Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or the maxi-mum front and rear GAWRs. If youdo, parts of your vehicle can break,tire damage could occur, or it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in loss ofcontrol and cause personal injury.

O Overloading could not only shortenthe life of your vehicle and the tires,but also could lead to hazardousvehicle handling and long brakingdistance. This may cause a prema-ture tire malfunction, which couldresult in a serious accident and per-


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

sonal injury. Failures caused byoverloading are not covered by thevehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance ofyour vehicle. When the vehicle isloaded, drive to a scale and weigh thefront and the rear wheels separately todetermine axle loads. Individual axleloads should not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings (GAWR). Thetotal of the axle loads should not ex-ceed the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings are given on thevehicle certification label. If weight rat-ings are exceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights below the rat-ings.

Your vehicle was designed to be used tocarry passengers and cargo. INFINITI doesnot recommend trailer towing, because itplaces additional loads on your vehicle’sengine, drivetrain, steering, braking, andother systems.

If you must use this vehicle to tow atrailer, the trailer load should never ex-ceed 1,000 lb.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from towing atrailer is not covered by INFINITI warranties.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground is sometimes called flattowing. This method is sometimes usedwhen towing a vehicle behind a recre-ational vehicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

O Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

O Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

O DO NOT tow any automatic transmissionvehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission parts dueto lack of transmission lubrication.

O For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing Recommended by INFINITI”in the “6. In case of emergency” sectionof this manual.

Automatic transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with an auto-matic transmission, an appropriate ve-hicle dolly MUST be placed under thetowed vehicle’s drive wheels. Alwaysfollow the dolly manufacturer’s recom-mendations when using their product.

Manual transmission

O Always tow with the manual transmis-sion in Neutral.

O After towing 500 miles, start and idlethe engine with the transmission in

TOWING A TRAILER


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Neutral for two minutes. Failure to idlethe engine after every 500 miles oftowing may cause damage to thetransmission’s internal parts.

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Qual-ity Grades: All passenger car tires mustconform to federal safety requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-ing based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditionson a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wearone and one-half (1 1/2) times as well onthe government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires de-pends upon actual conditions of their usehowever, and may depart significantlyfrom the norm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades from highest tolowest are AA, A, B and C. Those gradesrepresent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction perfor-mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-sponds to a level of performance whichall passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required bylaw.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-rately or in combination, can cause heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

Your INFINITI is covered by the followingemission warranties.

For US:

O Emission Defects Warranty

O Emissions Performance Warranty(See Warranty Information Booklet fordetails.)

For Canada:

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be foundwith other vehicle warranties in your War-ranty Information Booklet (Warranty andRoadside Assistance Information (Canadaonly)) that comes with your INFINITI. If youdid not receive a Warranty InformationBooklet (Warranty and Roadside Assis-tance Information (Canada only)), or it hasbecome lost, you may obtain a replace-ment by writing to:

O INFINITI DivisionNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 685003Franklin, TN 37068-5003

O Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario,L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-fying INFINITI.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in agroup of vehicles, it may order a re-call and remedy campaign. However,NHTSA cannot become involved in in-dividual problems between you, yourdealer, or INFINITI.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,400 Seventh Street, SW., WashingtonDC 20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (US only)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

You may notify INFINITI by contactingour Consumer Affairs Department,toll-free, at 1-800-662-6200.

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive(AWD) should never be tested using a twowheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-mometers used by some states for emis-sions testing), or similar equipment. Makesure you inform test facility personnelthat your vehicle is equipped with AWDbefore it is placed on a dynamometer. Us-ing the wrong test equipment may resultin transmission damage or unexpectedvehicle movement which could result inserious vehicle damage or personal in-jury.

Due to legal requirements in some states/areas, your vehicle may be required to bein what is called the “ready condition” foran Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”when it is driven through certain drivingpatterns. Usually, the “ready condition”can be obtained by ordinary usage of thevehicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-paired or the battery is disconnected, thevehicle may be reset to a “not ready con-dition”. Before taking the I/M test, checkthe vehicle’s inspection/maintenance testreadiness condition. Push the ignition

switch to the ON position without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction IndicatorLight (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, theI/M test condition is “not ready”. If theMIL does not blink after 20 seconds, theI/M test condition is “ready”.

If the MIL indicates the vehicle is in a “notready” condition, drive the vehiclethrough the following pattern to set thevehicle to the “ready condition”. If youcannot or do not want to perform thedriving pattern, an INFINITI dealer canconduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe and pru-dent manner according to traffic conditionsand obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine. Allow the engine toidle until the engine coolant tempera-ture gauge needle points between theC and H (normal operating tempera-ture).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the accel-

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

erator pedal completely and keep it re-leased for at least 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedalfor a moment, then drive the vehicle ata speed of 53 to 60 MPH (86 to 96km/h) for at least 9 minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle. Leave the enginerunning.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55km/h) and maintain the speed for 20seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h) and maintain the speed for atleast 3 minutes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the automatictransmission selector lever in the P orN position or the manual transmissionshift lever in the N position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 through 8 at least onemore time.

If step 1 through 7 is interrupted, repeatthe preceding step. Any safe driving modeis acceptable between steps. Do not stopthe engine until step 7 is completed.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variety ofcomputers that monitor and control a num-ber of systems to optimize performanceand help service technicians with diag-nosis and repair. Some of the computersmonitor emission control systems, brakingsystems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems and air bagsystems. Some data about vehicle opera-tion may be stored in the computers foruse during servicing. Other data may bestored if a crash event occurs. For example,vehicle speed, brake application, steeringangle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance and seat belt use by the driver orpassenger may be recorded. These typesof systems are sometimes called EventData Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to accessthe electronic data that may be stored inthe vehicle’s computers (sounds are notrecorded). INFINITI and INFINITI dealershave equipment to access some of thisdata; others may also have this equip-ment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special re-search. It might also be accessed with theconsent of the vehicle owner or leasee, inresponse to a request by law enforcement,or as otherwise required or permitted bylaw.

A genuine INFINITI Service Manual is thebest source of service and repair informa-tion for your vehicle. Filled with wiringdiagrams, illustrations and step-by-stepdiagnostic and adjustment procedures,this manual is the same one used by thefactory trained technicians working at anINFINITI dealer. Also available are genuineINFINITI Owner’s Manuals, and genuineINFINITI Service and Owner’s Manuals forolder INFINITI models.

In the USA:

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the2000 model year and later, contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com/infiniti

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Service Manuals for the1999 model year and prior, see an INFINITIdealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability ofgenuine INFINITI Owner’s Manuals for this

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUALORDER INFORMATION


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

model year and prior, see an INFINITIdealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood DriveStrongsville, OH 441491-800-247-5321

In Canada:

To purchase a copy of a genuine INFINITIService Manual or Owner’s Manual pleasecontact an INFINITI dealer. For the phonenumber and location of an INFINITI dealerin your area call the INFINITI SatisfactionCenter at 1-800-361-4792 and a bilingualINFINITI representative will assist you.

Also available are genuine INFINITI Ser-vice and Owner’s Manuals for olderINFINITI models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION

Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In thisunlikely event, there is some importantinformation you should know. Many insur-ance companies routinely authorize theuse of non-genuine collision parts inorder to cut costs, among other reasons.

Insist on the use of GenuineINFINITI Collision Parts!

If you want your vehicle to be restoredusing parts made to INFINITI’s original ex-acting specifications — if you want tohelp it to last and hold its resale value,the solution is simple. Tell your insuranceagent and your repair shop to only useGenuine INFINITI Collision Parts. INFINITIdoes not warrant non-INFINITI parts, nordoes INFINITI’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine INFINITI Parts can help pro-tect your personal safety, preserve yourwarranty protection and maintain the re-sale value of your vehicle. And if your ve-hicle was leased, using Genuine INFINITIParts may prevent or limit unnecessaryexcess wear and tear expenses at the endof your lease.

INFINITI designs its hoods with crumplezones to minimize the risk that the hoodwill penetrate the windshield of your ve-hicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imita-tion) parts may not provide such built insafeguards. Also, non-genuine parts oftenshow premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?

In over 40 states, the law says you mustbe advised if non-genuine parts are usedto repair your vehicle. And some stateshave enacted laws that restrict insurancecompanies from authorizing the use ofnon-genuine collision parts during thenew vehicle warranty. These laws helpprotect you, so you can take action toprotect yourself.

It’s your right!

If you should need further informationvisit us at:

www.infiniti.com (for U.S. customers) orwww.infiniti.ca (for Canadian customers)


w 07.2.6/V36-D X

MEMO


w 06.7.27/V36-D X

10 Index

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....................... 5-49Adaptive front lighting system (AFS) ................ 2-37Advanced air bag system.................................. 1-41Aiming control, Adaptive front lighting system(AFS)................................................................ 2-37Air bag system

Advanced air bag system ........................... 1-41Front passenger air bag and status light ... 1-43Side and curtain (See supplementalside-impact air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system) ...................... 1-46

Air bag warning labels ..................................... 1-49Air bag warning light............................... 1-49, 2-18Air cleaner housing filter.................................. 8-19Air conditioner

Air conditioner service............................... 4-31Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11Air conditioning system refrigerant andlubricant recommendations ................ 4-31, 9-6Automatic climate control.......................... 4-25In-cabin microfilter .................................... 4-31Operation (See automatic climatecontrol) ..................................................... 4-25

Alarm, How to stop alarm (see vehicle securitysystem) ............................................................ 2-31Alcohol, drugs and driving................................. 5-6All-wheel drive (AWD)....................................... 5-42All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light ................. 2-14

Antenna ........................................................... 4-57Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....................... 5-49Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warning light ... 2-14Appearance care

Exterior appearance care............................. 7-2Interior appearance care ............................. 7-4

Armrest .............................................................. 1-7Armrest, Rear armrest pocket .......................... 2-50Ashtrays (See cigarette lighter and ashtrays)... 2-45Audible reminders ........................................... 2-20Audio operation precautions............................ 4-32Audio system................................................... 4-32

Steering wheel audio controls................... 4-56Audion system, Hard-disk drive audio system(Music Box) ..................................................... 4-46Autochanger

Compact Disc (CD) .................................... 4-42Autolight system.............................................. 2-35Automatic

Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-54Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12Climate control.......................................... 4-25Drive positioner ........................................ 3-26Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10Seat positioner ......................................... 3-26

Auxiliary port................................................... 4-20Avoiding collision and rollover ........................... 5-5

B

Battery ............................................................. 8-15Battery saver system ................................ 2-36Intelligent Key........................................... 8-23Variable voltage control system................. 8-17

Before starting the engine ................................. 5-9Belts (See drive belts) ...................................... 8-17Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System ............. 4-58Booster seats ................................................... 1-31Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)................. 5-49Brake fluid ................................................ 8-13Brake system ............................................ 5-45Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16Warning light............................................. 2-14

Break-in schedule ............................................ 5-41Brightness control, Instrument panel ............... 2-39Bulb check/instrument panel ........................... 2-13Bulb replacement............................................. 8-25

C

Cabin air filter.................................................. 4-31Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .... 9-2Car phone or CB radio ..................................... 4-58Card holder ..................................................... 2-50Cargo (See vehicle loading information) ........... 2-51Cargo net ......................................................... 2-51

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst .............. 5-3CD/CF care and cleaning.................................. 4-54Center multi-function control panel.................... 4-3Child restraints................................................. 1-16

Booster seats............................................. 1-31Installation using LATCH ............................ 1-21Installation using the seat belts ................ 1-24LATCH system ............................................ 1-18Precautions on child restraints .................. 1-16Top tether strap ........................................ 1-20

Child safety ...................................................... 1-10Child safety rear door lock ................................ 3-7Chimes

Audible reminders..................................... 2-20Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18

Cigarette lighter and ashtrays.......................... 2-45Circuit breaker, Fusible link ............................. 8-22Cleaning exterior and interior ..................... 7-2, 7-4Climate control, Automatic climate control....... 4-25Clock ............................................................... 2-43Coat hooks....................................................... 2-51Cockpit .............................................................. 2-2Cold weather driving ........................................ 5-52Command (See Bluetooth Hands-Free PhoneSystem)............................................................ 4-71Command (See INFINITI voice recognitionsystem) ................................................... 4-12, 4-81Compact Disc (CD) changer (See audiosystem) ........................................................... 4-42Compact spare tire .......................................... 8-38CompactFlash (CF) player(See audio system).......................................... 4-44Compass display ............................................... 2-9Console box .................................................... 2-49

Controller, Center multi-function controlpanel................................................................. 4-4Controls

Control panel button (display) .................... 4-3Heater and air conditioner controls (Seeautomatic climate control)......................... 4-25

CoolantCapacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8

Corrosion protection .......................................... 7-6Cruise control ................................................... 5-17Cruise control, Fixed speed cruise control(on ICC system) ............................................... 5-36Cruise control, Intelligent cruise control (ICC)system ............................................................. 5-19Cup holders..................................................... 2-46Curtain side-impact air bag system.................. 1-46

D

Daytime running light system .......................... 2-37Defroster switch, Rear window and outsidemirror defroster switch .................................... 2-33Dimensions ....................................................... 9-8Display cleaning ................................................ 4-6Display controls (See center multi-functioncontrol panel) .................................................... 4-3Dot matrix liquid crystal display....................... 2-21Drive belts ....................................................... 8-17Drive positioner ............................................... 3-26Driving

All-wheel drive (AWD)................................ 5-42

All-wheel drive (AWD) safety precautions .... 5-6Cold weather driving ................................. 5-52Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2

E

Economy, Fuel .................................................. 5-41Elapsed time.................................................... 2-27Emission control information label ................... 9-10Emission control system warranty .................... 9-18Engine

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9Break-in schedule...................................... 5-41Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Changing engine coolant ............................ 8-9Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10Checking engine coolant level .................... 8-8Checking engine oil level............................ 8-9Coolant temperature gauge......................... 2-8Engine block heater .................................. 5-54Engine compartment check locations .......... 8-7Engine cooling system................................ 8-8Engine oil ................................................... 8-9Engine oil and oil filter recommendation..... 9-5Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5Engine serial number ................................ 9-10Engine specifications .................................. 9-7If your vehicle overheats ........................... 6-10Starting the engine ..................................... 5-9

Entry/exit function, Automatic drivepositioner ........................................................ 3-26

10-2

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Event data recorders ....................................... 9-20Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)......................... 5-2

F

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label........... 9-10Filter

Air cleaner housing filter ........................... 8-19Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10

Flashers (See hazard warning flasherswitch) ............................................................ 2-40Flat tire.............................................................. 6-2Flat towing ....................................................... 9-16Floor mat cleaning ............................................. 7-5Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12Brake fluid ................................................ 8-13Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2Engine coolant............................................ 8-8Engine oil ................................................... 8-9Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12Window washer fluid................................. 8-14

FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer ........................................................... 4-40Fog light switch ............................................... 2-39Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) system ............ 5-52Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) warning light ... 2-15Front passenger air bag and status light.......... 1-43Front power seat adjustment.............................. 1-2Front seat adjustment ........................................ 1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2

Fuel economy ............................................ 5-41Fuel octane rating ....................................... 9-3Fuel recommendation.................................. 9-3Fuel-filler cap............................................ 3-20Fuel-filler door .......................................... 3-20Gauge......................................................... 2-9

Fuses............................................................... 8-22Fusible links .................................................... 8-22

G

Garage door opener, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ...................................................... 2-59Gas cap ........................................................... 3-20Gauge................................................................ 2-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge.............. 2-8Fuel gauge.................................................. 2-9Odometer.................................................... 2-7Speedometer .............................................. 2-7Tachometer................................................. 2-8Trip computer............................................ 2-27

General maintenance......................................... 8-2Glove box ........................................................ 2-48

H

Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth ............ 4-58Hard-disk drive audio system (Music Box) ....... 4-46Hazard warning flasher switch......................... 2-40Head restraints................................................... 1-5Headlights

Aiming control (See adaptive front lightingsystem (AFS)) ............................................ 2-37

Bulb replacement...................................... 8-26Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35Xenon headlights...................................... 2-34

Heated seats.................................................... 2-41Heater

Automatic climate control.......................... 4-25Engine block heater .................................. 5-54

HomeLink Universal Transceiver..................... 2-59Hood release.................................................... 3-17Hook, Coat hooks............................................. 2-51Horn ................................................................ 2-40

I

Ignition switchIgnition switch (Push-button) ...................... 5-7Automatic transmission models................. 5-10Manual transmission models ..................... 5-15

Immobilizer system .......................................... 2-31In-cabin microfilter ........................................... 4-31Indicator lights................................................. 2-18Indicator, Dot matrix display ............................ 2-21INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System................. 2-31INFINITI voice recognition system ..................... 4-81Inside mirror.................................................... 3-24Inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ................... 9-19Instrument brightness control.......................... 2-39Instrument panel ............................................... 2-4Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system .............. 5-19Intelligent cruise control (ICC) system, Previewfunction............................................................ 5-41Intelligent Key system ....................................... 3-8

Battery replacement.................................. 8-23Key operating range ................................... 3-8

10-3

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Key operation............................................ 3-10Warning light............................................. 2-16Warning signals......................................... 3-12

Intelligent Key warning light ............................ 2-16Interior light control switch.............................. 2-57Interior light replacement ................................ 8-26Interior lights................................................... 2-56Interior trunk lid release .................................. 3-19ISOFIX child restraint ........................................ 1-18

J

Jump starting .................................................... 6-8

K

Keyless entry (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................................ 3-14Keys (Intelligent Key) ......................................... 3-2Keys, For Intelligent Key system ........................ 3-8

L

LabelsAir bag warning labels .............................. 1-49Air conditioner specification label .............. 9-11Emission control information label ............ 9-10Engine serial number ................................ 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .... 9-10Tire and Loading Information label ... 8-30, 9-11Vehicle identification number (VIN)............. 9-9

LATCH system................................................... 1-18License plate, Installing front license plate ...... 9-12

LightAir bag warning light................................. 1-49Bulb replacement...................................... 8-25Fog light switch ........................................ 2-39Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35Headlights bulb replacement .................... 8-26Indicator lights .......................................... 2-18Interior light control switch ....................... 2-57Interior lights ............................................ 2-56Map lights ................................................ 2-56Personal lights .......................................... 2-57Replacement ............................................. 8-25Trunk light ................................................ 2-58Vanity mirror lights ................................... 2-58Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders.................................................. 2-14Xenon headlights...................................... 2-34

Lights, Exterior and interior lightreplacement .................................................... 8-26Loading information (See vehicle loadinginformation) ..................................................... 9-13Lock

Door locks................................................... 3-5Glove box lock.......................................... 2-48Power door lock .......................................... 3-5Trunk lid.................................................... 3-18

Low tire pressure warning light........................ 2-16Low tire pressure warning system (See tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)).................. 5-3

M

MaintenanceBattery ...................................................... 8-15

General maintenance .................................. 8-2Indicators for maintenance (dot matrix)..... 2-25Inside the vehicle ....................................... 8-3Maintenance precautions ............................ 8-5Maintenance requirements.......................... 8-2Outside the vehicle..................................... 8-2Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-15Under the hood and vehicle ....................... 8-4

Malfunction indicator light (MIL)....................... 2-19Map lights ....................................................... 2-56Memory storage, Automatic drive positioner.... 3-28Meter, Trip computer ....................................... 2-27Meters and gauges............................................ 2-6Meters and gauges, Instrument brightnesscontrol............................................................. 2-39Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ............. 3-25Inside mirror ............................................. 3-24Outside mirrors ......................................... 3-25

Monitor, Rearview monitor ............................... 4-21Music Box (hard-disk drive audio system) ....... 4-46

N

Net, Cargo net .................................................. 2-51New vehicle break-in ........................................ 5-41

O

Odometer .......................................................... 2-7Oil

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants ................................................... 9-2

10-4

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10Checking engine oil level............................ 8-9Engine oil ................................................... 8-9Engine oil viscosity ..................................... 9-5

Operation, Indicators for operation (dotmatrix) ............................................................. 2-23Outside mirrors................................................ 3-25Overheat, If your vehicle overheats.................. 6-10Owner’s Manual/Service Manual orderinformation...................................................... 9-20

P

ParkingBrake break-in .......................................... 5-46Parking brake operation ............................ 5-16Parking on hills......................................... 5-44

Personal lights................................................. 2-57Phone

Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System....... 4-58Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-58

PowerFront seat adjustment ................................. 1-2Power door lock .......................................... 3-5Power outlet ............................................. 2-44Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12Power steering system .............................. 5-45Power windows ......................................... 2-52Power window switch finisher ..................... 7-5

Pre-tensioner seat belt system......................... 1-48Precautions

All-wheel drive (AWD) driving safety............ 5-6Audio operation ........................................ 4-32Braking precautions .................................. 5-45

Child restraints .......................................... 1-16Cruise control ............................................ 5-17Maintenance ............................................... 8-5Seat belt usage........................................... 1-8Supplemental restraint system .................. 1-35When starting and driving........................... 5-2

Preview function .............................................. 5-46Preview function (for Intelligent cruise controlsystem) ............................................................ 5-41Push starting ................................................... 6-10Push-button ignition switch ............................... 5-7

R

Radio...................................................... 4-32, 4-56Car phone or CB radio .............................. 4-58FM-AM-SAT radio with Compact Disc (CD)changer .................................................... 4-40

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M)test (US only) ................................................... 9-19Rear armrest pocket ........................................ 2-50Rear door lock, Child safety rear door lock ........ 3-7Rear power point ............................................. 2-44Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch.............................................................. 2-33Rearview monitor ............................................. 4-21Recorders, Event data...................................... 9-20Registering your vehicle in another country....... 9-9Remote keyless entry system ........................... 3-14Reporting safety defects (US only) ................... 9-18Roadside assistance program ............................ 6-2Rollover ............................................................. 5-5

S

SafetyChild seat belts ......................................... 1-10Reporting safety defects (US only)............. 9-18

Seat adjustmentFront power seat adjustment ....................... 1-2Front seats .................................................. 1-2

Seat belt(s)Child safety ............................................... 1-10Infants........................................................ 1-11Injured persons .......................................... 1-11Larger children ........................................... 1-11Pre-tensioner seat belt system .................. 1-48Precautions on seat belt usage ................... 1-8Pregnant women......................................... 1-11Seat belt cleaning ....................................... 7-5Seat belt extenders .................................... 1-15Seat belt maintenance ............................... 1-15Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18Seat belts ................................................... 1-8Shoulder belt height adjustment ................ 1-15Small children ............................................ 1-11Three-point type......................................... 1-12

Seat(s)Driver-side memory................................... 3-26Heated seats ............................................. 2-41Seats........................................................... 1-2Synchronization function, Automatic drivepositioner ................................................. 3-27

Secondary trunk lid release ............................. 3-20Security system (INFINITI Vehicle ImmobilizerSystem), Engine start ....................................... 2-31Security system, Vehicle security system......... 2-29

10-5

w 06.9.14/V36-D X

Selector lever, Shift lock release ...................... 5-14Servicing air conditioner (See automaticclimate control)................................................ 4-25Servicing climate control .................................. 4-31Shift lock release, Transmission....................... 5-14Shifting

Automatic transmission ............................. 5-10Manual transmission ................................. 5-15

Shoulder belt height adjustment....................... 1-15Side-impact air bag system.............................. 1-46Snow mode switch .......................................... 2-42Spare tire .......................................................... 9-8Spark plugs ..................................................... 8-18Speedometer ..................................................... 2-7Starting

Before starting the engine .......................... 5-9Jump starting.............................................. 6-8Precautions when starting and driving ........ 5-2Push starting............................................. 6-10Starting the engine ..................................... 5-9

Status light, Front passenger air bag ............... 1-43Steering

Four-wheel active steer (4WAS) system ..... 5-52Power steering fluid .................................. 8-12Power steering system .............................. 5-45Steering-wheel-mounted controls foraudio ........................................................ 4-56Tilting telescopic steering column ............. 3-22

Storage ........................................................... 2-46Sun visors ....................................................... 3-23Sunglasses holder........................................... 2-48Sunroof............................................................ 2-54

Automatic sunroof..................................... 2-54Supplemental air bag warning labels ............... 1-49

Supplemental air bag warning light......... 1-49, 2-18Supplemental restraint system ......................... 1-35

Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem....................................................... 1-35

Supplemental side-impact and curtainside-impact air bag system .............................. 1-46Switch

Autolight switch ........................................ 2-35Fog light switch ........................................ 2-39Hazard warning flasher switch.................. 2-40Headlight switch ....................................... 2-35Ignition switch automatic transmissionmodels ...................................................... 5-10Ignition switch manual transmissionmodels ...................................................... 5-15Power door lock switch ............................... 3-7Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch ....................................................... 2-33Snow mode switch.................................... 2-42Turn signal switch..................................... 2-39Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch....................................................... 2-42

T

Tachometer ....................................................... 2-8Temperature gauge, Engine coolant temperaturegauge................................................................ 2-8Theft (INFINITI Vehicle Immobilizer System),Engine start...................................................... 2-31Three-way catalyst ............................................. 5-3Tilting telescopic steering column.................... 3-22Tire pressure, Low tire pressure warninglight ................................................................. 2-16

TiresFlat tire....................................................... 6-2Low tire pressure warning system............... 5-3Spare tire ................................................. 8-38Tire and Loading information label ... 8-30, 9-11Tire chains ................................................ 8-35Tire dressing............................................... 7-3Tire pressure ............................................ 8-28Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) ................................................. 5-3, 6-2Tire rotation.............................................. 8-36Types of tires............................................ 8-34Uniform tire quality grading....................... 9-17Wheel/tire size ........................................... 9-8Wheels and tires....................................... 8-28

Top tether strap child restraints....................... 1-20Touch screen system ......................................... 4-5Towing

Flat towing ................................................ 9-16Tow truck towing ....................................... 6-11Towing a trailer ......................................... 9-16Towing load/specification chart................. 9-16

TPMS, Tire pressure monitoring system ...... 5-3, 6-2Trailer towing................................................... 9-16Transceiver, HomeLink UniversalTransceiver ...................................................... 2-59Transmission

Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) ............ 8-12Driving with automatic transmission.......... 5-10Driving with manual transmission .............. 5-15Transmission selector lever lock release.... 5-14

Transmitter (See remote keyless entrysystem) ............................................................ 3-14

10-6

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

Traveling or registering your vehicle in anothercountry.............................................................. 9-9Trip computer .................................................. 2-27Trip odometer .................................................. 2-27Trunk

Interior trunk lid release............................ 3-19Light ......................................................... 2-58Pass-through ............................................... 1-7Secondary trunk lid release ...................... 3-20Trunk lid.................................................... 3-18Trunk net ................................................... 2-51

Turn signal switch ........................................... 2-39

U

Underbody cleaning........................................... 7-3Uniform tire quality grading ............................. 9-17

V

Vanity mirror lights.......................................... 2-58Variable voltage control system ....................... 8-17Vehicle

Dimensions................................................. 9-8Identification number (VIN) ......................... 9-9Loading information .................................. 9-13Recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).............. 6-15Security system ........................................ 2-29Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch....................................................... 2-42Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system....... 5-50Vehicle information and settings(display) ..................................................... 4-9

Ventilators ....................................................... 4-25

Voice command (See Bluetooth Hands-FreePhone System) ................................................. 4-71Voice command (See INFINITI voicerecognition system) ................................. 4-12, 4-81Voice recognition system ................................. 4-81

W

Warning labels, Air bag warning labels ............ 1-49Warning light

Air bag warning light ........................ 1-49, 2-18All-wheel drive (AWD) warning light........... 2-14Anti-lock braking system (ABS) warninglight .......................................................... 2-14Brake warning light ................................... 2-14Four-wheel active steer (FWAS) warninglight........................................................... 2-15Intelligent Key warning light...................... 2-16Low tire pressure warning light ................. 2-16Seat belt warning light and chime............. 2-18

Warning lights.................................................. 2-14Warning, Dot matrix display ............................. 2-21Warning, Hazard warning flasher switch.......... 2-40Warning, Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)........................................................ 5-3, 6-2Warning, Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders......................................................... 2-13Warranty, Emission control system warranty .... 9-18Washer switch, Windshield wiper and washerswitch.............................................................. 2-32Washing ............................................................ 7-2Waxing .............................................................. 7-2Wheel/tire size.................................................. 9-8Wheels and tires ............................................. 8-28

Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................. 7-3Wheels, Four-wheel active steer (4WAS)system ............................................................. 5-52Window washer fluid........................................ 8-14Window(s)

Cleaning ..................................................... 7-3Power windows ......................................... 2-52

Windshield wiper and washer switch ............... 2-32Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch ........ 2-32Wiper blades............................................. 8-19

X

Xenon headlights............................................. 2-34

10-7

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

MEMO

10-8

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

INFINITI recommends the use of unleadedpremium gasoline with an octane rating ofat least 93 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number(Research octane number 98).

If unleaded premium gasoline is not avail-able, you may use unleaded regular gaso-line with an octane rating of at least 87AKI number (Research octane number 91),but you may notice a decrease in perfor-mance.

CAUTION

O Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emission con-trol systems, and may also affect war-ranty coverage.

O Under no circumstances should a leadedgasoline be used, since this will damagethe three way catalyst.

O Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Yourvehicle is not designed to run on E-85fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage the fuelsystem components and is not coveredby the INFINITI vehicle limited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capaci-

ties and recommended fuel/lubricants” inthe “9. Technical and consumer informa-tion” section.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

O Engine oil with API Certification Mark

O Viscosity SAE 5W-30

See “Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “9. Technical and con-sumer information” section for engine oiland oil filter recommendation.

COLD TIRE PRESSURES:

See Tire and Loading Information label af-fixed to the driver’s side center pillar.

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-INPROCEDURES RECOMMENDATION:

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) ofvehicle use, follow the recommendationsoutlined in the “Break-in schedule” Infor-mation found in the “5. Starting and driv-ing” section of this Owner’s Manual.Follow these recommendations for the fu-ture reliability and economy of your newvehicle.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

1. Engine oil (P.8-9)


3. Hood release (P.3-17)

4. Seat (P.1-2)

5. Seat belt (P.1-8)

6. Door lock (P.3-5)

7. Engine coolant (P.8-8)

8. Windshield washer fluid (P.8-14)

9. Battery (P.8-15)

10. Air conditioner (P.4-25)Audio system (P.4-32)

11. Fuel-filler door release (P.3-20)Fuel recommendation (P.9-3)

12. Spare tire (P.6-2)

STI0512

w 06.7.27/V36-D X

2007 infiniti g35 sedan owner guide

Documents